130 Hour Advanced TEFL PDF

5
16
33
52
63
73
79
91
102
112
128
138
159
178
183
192
217
225
CHAPTER 1 Page 5
Linguists define grammar as a set of components; phonetics (the production and

perception of sounds), phonology (how sounds are combined), morphology (the
study of forms, or how elements are combined to create words), syntax (how words
are strung together into sentences), and semantics or meaning. Because all
languages are characterised by these components, a language does not exist
without grammar.
Why do we analyse language?
Teachers analyse language in order to raise their awareness so that they can
anticipate problems and prepare ways to deal with them in class.
The role of grammar in communicative language teaching suggests an uneasy
relationship between two elements: namely, grammar on the one hand, and
communication on the other. Since the acquisition of competence in a second
language is a gradual, developmental process, the teacher is the guide and
model of competence that learners will use. Hence, interpretive skills come first;
acquired through immersion in the language, exposure to excellent models, and
interaction with interesting subject matter. Fluency in oral and written expression
develops gradually, as a consequence of exposure to good models and pleasant
interaction in the second language. Hence, functional language ability would be
acquired only through exposure to interesting texts accompanied by meaningful
interaction in the second language.
Task
Define Grammar.
Grammar is the study and use of rules by which words change their forms and are
combined into sentences.
Language Analysis: Building Blocks (Parts of Speech):
Nouns:
The names of living, non-living things and concepts.
They are classified into several categories.
E.g.: Eve…
Pronouns:
They replace a noun. Hence, they also fall into several categories.
E.g.: She…
Adjectives:
They describe a noun's size, quality, quantity, material, nationality, shape, colour…
etc.
E.g.: Eve, a strong young lady,…
Articles:
Indefinite: A (preceding a consonant)
An (preceding a vowel)[meaning: one]
E.g.: Eve, a strong young lady,…
Definite: The [meaning: the one and only…]
E.g.: Eve, the head of the Sales Department,…
TEFL Certificate - Notting Hill College

CHAPTER 1 Page 6
Verbs:
Action words. They are classified into different tenses.
E.g.: Eve, the head of the Sales Department, punched Adam…
Adverbs:
They describe the quality of the verb (how did it happen?).
E.g.: Eve, the head of the Sales Department, punched Adam hard…
Prepositions:
They describe the time and place. They also combine with verbs in order to form
phrasal verbs, or with nouns and adjectives to form collocations.
E.g.: Eve, the head of the Sales Department, punched Adam hard in the nose at
noon,…
Conjunctions:
Linking words used to combine or merge two or more long sentences into one.
E.g.: Eve, the head of the Sales Department, punched Adam hard in the nose at
noon and he fell unconscious.
Interjections:
Sounds rather than words used to express emotions.
E.g.: Oops! Eve, a strong woman, punched Adam hard in the nose at noon and he
fell unconscious. Ouch!
Types of Nouns:
Common Proper Abstract Collective Compound
Definition A general The name It names an It refers to a It is made up
name for a of a intangible group of of two or
person, a particular idea, people or more words.
place or a person, quality or things. It may be
thing. place, state rather written as
thing or than a one word,
idea. tangible separate
object that words or
can be seen, hyphenated
heard, smelt, words.
tasted or
touched.
Examples man, Adam, Beauty, Team, Aeroplane,

theatre, Symphony strength, family, staff, rain forest,
fruit. Centre, courage. audience, runner-up,
Kellogg's police. mother-in-
Cornflakes. law.
How to form General _____ ______ Same rules The second
plural Rule: add as word only is
"s' common put in plural
Exceptions: nouns form
see NB 1
A note on Lower case Always Lower case Lower case Sometimes

punctuation capitalised hyphenated

CHAPTER 1 Page 7
Plural Formation Rules:

 If the noun ends in: "s", "x", "o", "z", "ch", or "sh", the plural is formed by adding
the suffix "es" to the singular form.
 If the noun ends in: "f", or "fe", the plural is formed by crossing out the "f", or "fe",
and adding the suffix "ves" to the singular form.
 If the noun ends in: "y" preceded by a consonant, the plural is formed by
crossing out the "y" and adding the suffix "ies" to the singular form.
 Some nouns stay the same in both the singular and plural forms.
 Other irregularities concern change of vowels or adding letters to the singular
form especially when the word is derived from Latin.
Types of Pronouns:
Possessive Possessive
Subject Object Pronouns Pronouns Reflexive
Pronouns Pronouns (followed by a (at the end of a Pronouns
noun) sentence)
I Me My Mine Myself
You You Your Yours Yourself
He Him His His Himself
She Her Her Hers Herself
It It Its Its Itself
We Us Our Ours Ourselves
You You Your Yours Yourselves
They Them Their Theirs Themselves
Order of Adjectives:
No. IN- OPIN- SIZE SHAPE WIDTH PARTICI- AGE COL- ORI- MATE-
TENSI ION/ PLE OUR GIN RIAL
FIER Qual-
The Very Boring Tiny Round Thin Worn An- Dark Western Wooden
first tique
Three Quite Rare Min- Rectan- Thick Tattered Cur- Light Irish Plastic
ute gular rent
A Rather Useful Gi- Hexago- Narrow Underlying Mod- Blue Oriental Woolen
dozen ganti nal ern
c
A Some- Friendl me- Box– Wide Shut Con- Red- Arab Cloth
cou- what y dium Shaped tempor dish
ple of ary
Comparison of Adjectives:
In order to show intensity of the adjective used, the comparative form is used when
comparing two nouns, and the superlative one is used when comparing more than
two nouns according to the following rules:
Mono-Syllabic Adjectives:
Comparative form: Adj. + er + than
Superlative form: The + Adj. + est
Adjectives of Two or More Syllables:
Comparative form: More + Adj. + than
Superlative form: The+ Most + Adj.

CHAPTER 1 Page 8
Articles:
Indefinite Articles
/ \
A An
-“A” is used before singular unspecified common nouns beginning with a
consonant letter such as: a glass, a doctor, a boy, a hospital, a hotel.
-“A” is also used before common nouns starting by the sound “you” such as:
a university, a European.
- “A” must also be used before “little” and “few” to determine quantity.
- “An” is used before singular unspecified common nouns beginning with a vowel
(a, e, i, o, u) such as: an egg, an engineer, an eye, an accountant.
-“An” is also used before singular common nouns beginning with a silent letter
followed by a vowel such as: an hour.
-“A” and “An” are used to mean “per” as in: This car runs at 180 km. an hour;
I visit my uncle once/twice/three times…etc. a week/year/month...etc;
It is one pound a kilo.
- “A” and “An” are used in exclamations as in:
What a strong man!
What an ugly woman!
What a fast car!
What a big dog!
The Definite Article (The)
It is used before:
1-Specific common nouns:
E.g.: I met an old man yesterday. The old man was riding a bike.
2-Unique objects:
E.g.: The: sun, sky, moon, stars, clouds, earth, North Pole
3-Names of seas, rivers, canals and oceans:
E.g.: The Mediterranean Sea, the Mississippi, the Suez Canal and the Atlantic
Ocean.
4-Names of mountains and hills:
E.g.: The Alps, The Himalayas.
Exceptions: Mount Everest, Mount Rushmore.
5-Names of republics or kingdoms or states:
E.g.: The United States of America, The United Kingdom
(N.B. “The” must not be added before the names of countries except: The Sudan
and The Netherlands. But we do NOT say “The America” for example.)
6-Historical places and works of art:
E.g.: The Pyramids, The Mona Lisa.
7-An adjective that denotes a certain class of people:
E.g.: The poor, the rich, the Italians.
8-Nouns that denote different times of the day:
E.g.: In the morning, afternoon, evening.

CHAPTER 1 Page 9
9-In the superlative form:

E.g.: Peter is the most sportive boy in the class. John is the tallest boy in the team.
10-Names of musical instruments:
E.g.: The piano, the flute … etc.
11-Family Names:
E.g.: The Smiths, The Bells…etc.
“The” is NEVER used before:

1-Names of lakes:
E.g.: Lake Victoria
2-If the noun “Man” is used in the sense of mankind or the human race in general:
E.g.: Man can control beasts.
3-Meals: breakfast, lunch, dinner:
E.g.: I like to have breakfast in bed.
4-The following nouns: work, home, bed, prison, school:
E.g.: He went home late.
My dad reads a story in bed every night.
I go to school five days a week.
UNLESS: the above nouns are preceded by an adjective; in which case “the” is
added.
E.g.: She graduated from the German school.
5-Abstract nouns:
E.g.: love, hate, honesty, bravery, freedom, honour…etc.
E.g.: Bravery is a good quality.
Adverbs:
Basically adverbs are formed by adding the suffix "ly" to the adjective. However,
irregularities occur due to spelling rules or special syntactic cases such as the
following:
 If the adjective ends in: "y" preceded by a consonant, the adverb is formed by
crossing out the "y" and adding the suffix "ily" to the adjective.
 If the adjective ends in: "ly", the adverb is formed by using the phrase: "in a …
way" where the ellipses are substituted by the adjective.
 Some adverbs keep the same form as the adjective without any change.

CHAPTER 1 Page 10
The Passive Form:

An active sentence starts with the subject and ends with the object, whereas a
passive sentence starts with the subject and may end with the subject.
It is used:
 When the person who does the action (subject) is unknown or unimportant.
 To lay more emphasis on the receiver of the action (object).
ACTIVE PASSIVE EXAMPLE
Present Simple Am/is/are + pp. He repairs cars.

Cars are repaired.
Past Simple Was/were + pp. He repaired the cars.

The cars were repaired.
Present Continuous Am/is/are + being + He is repairing cars.

(Progressive) pp. Cars are being repaired.
Past Continuous Was/were + being + He was repairing cars.

(Progressive) pp. Cars were being repaired.
Present Perfect Has + been + pp. He has repaired the cars.

The cars have been repaired.
Past Perfect Had + been + pp. He had repaired the cars.

The cars had been repaired.
Future: Will Will + be +pp. He will repair the cars.

The cars will be repaired.
(Be + Going to) Am/is/are+going He is going to repair the cars.

to+be+pp The cars are going to be re-
paired.
Modals: Can/May/ Can/may/must + He must repair the cars.

Must… be + pp. The cars must be
repaired.

CHAPTER 1 Page 11
Conditionals:
TYPE FORM USE EXAMPLE
Zero If + Present Simple To express facts. If you heat water, it boils.

↓
Present Simple
1st If + Present Simple To predict a situa- If the weather is fine, I will go

↓ tion that’s likely to to the beach.
will/can/ may+ inf. happen in the
present or future.
2nd If + Past Simple 1-To describe a 1- If I saw a ghost, I would

↓ situation that’s run.
would/could/might improbable to
+ inf. happen in the 2- If I were you, I would take
present or future. the job
2– To give advice.
If +Past Perfect To express regret or 1- If I had locked the car,

3rd
↓ criticism about a it would not have been
might/could/would situation in the past. stolen.
+have + p.p.
2- If he had not fought, he
would not have got a black
eye.

CHAPTER 1 Page 12
WH-Words:
Function Question Word Relative Pronouns
- People
↓ Who is the boy in the blue jeans? The boy who is wearing blue jeans,
Who was punched.
- Things What is he wearing today?

↓ You won’t believe what happened
What to my blue jeans.
- Choice Which jeans shall I wear, the blue or

↓ black? The jeans which I wore today were
Which blue.
- Possession Whose jeans are these?

↓ (belonging) The boy whose jeans are blue, is my
whose brother.
- Place
↓ Where are my blue jeans? Macy's is where I bought my jeans.
Where
- Time
↓ When did you buy that pair of blue Last autumn is when I bought my
When jeans? blue jeans.
- Reason
↓ Why aren’t you wearing your jeans? The coffee stain is why I can’t wear
Why my blue jeans.
- The way
(of doing
something) How did you clean the coffee stain Baggy is how I like my jeans.
↓ on your jeans?
How
- Price How much does that pair of blue

↓ jeans cost? I bought my sister a pair of jeans to
How much show how much I care for her.
- Frequency How often do you wear jeans?

↓ __________________________
How often

CHAPTER 1 Page 13
Task 1:
Language Analysis: Form & Function
Read the sentences below. Reflect on how the function of each utterance changes
due to the change in structure.
 Knock before you enter.

 You should knock before you enter.
 You should have knocked before you entered.
 You must knock before you enter.
 You may knock before you enter.
 If I were you, I would knock before I enter.
 Could you please knock before you enter?
 How about knocking / Why don't you knock before you enter?
 You had better knock before you enter.
 Don't you dare enter before you knock.
 I'm going to knock before I enter.
 Knocked before you enter.
Answers:
- Knock before you enter.

↓
Imperative
- You should knock before you enter.

↓
Advice
- You should have knocked before you entered.

↓
Reprimand
- You must knock before you enter.

↓
Obligator
- You may knock before you enter.

↓
Permission

CHAPTER 1 Page 14
- If I were you, I would knock before I enter.

↓
Advice
- Could you please knock before you enter?

↓
Polite Request
- How about knocking / Why don’t you knock before you enter?
↓ ↓
Suggestion
- You had better knock before you enter.

↓
Ultimatum
- Don’t you dare enter before you knock.

↓
Threat
- I’m going to knock before I enter.

↓
Future Intention / Plan
- Knocked before you enter.

↓
Error: does not exist in the
English Language

CHAPTER 2 Page 16
The phonetic chart is an extremely useful tool to have when teaching/ learning a
language. It is very common for learners to be familiar with the chart.
There are 44 sounds in English; 24 consonant, 12 vowels and 8 diphthongs. (See
figure 1). Sounds are written between slashes such as /m/, /k/ or /t/. Each of these
symbols represents a sound and not a letter.
Figure 1:English phonetic chart
A consonant is a speech sound produced by a partial or complete obstruction of

the air stream by any of various constrictions of the speech organs, such as /p/,
/f/, /r/, /w/, and /h/. There are 24 consonants in English. They can be classified
according to the way that they are produced by the organ of speech.
(See figure 2) Sounds are categorised as to place and manner of articulation and
whether they are voiced or voiceless.
Figure 2: Place of articulation

CHAPTER 2 Page 17
Place of Articulation:
It is the place of obstruction of air at some points in the vocal cords. It is used to
classify consonants. Each place of articulation has an adjective applied to a
consonant.
Nouns Adjectives
Lips Labial/ Bilabial
Teeth Dental
Alveolar ridge Alveolar
Hard palate Palatal
Soft palate Velar
Uvula Uvular
Pharynx Pharyngeal
Tip Apical
Blade Laminal
Front Dorsal
Back Dorsal
Manner of Articulation:
In the above section, you were introduced to the places of articulation. These are
the points in the vocal tract at which the articulators alter the shape of the vocal
tract to produce distinct consonant sounds.
However, consonants are further distinguished on the basis of how the articulators
alter the shape of the vocal tract. That is, how the airflow is regulated by the
tongue or lips. This is called manner of articulation.
Plosives:
A plosive is formed by the complete obstruction of the vocal tract by the
articulators. This obstruction is then released, allowing the air to "explode" out of the
mouth. When the air is blocked by the articulator, it begins to rise in pressure. Then,
when the air is released, the high pressure air rushes out into the lower pressure area
beyond the blockage. This results in a burst of air, signifying a plosive. Examples of
plosives in English are / p/, /b/, /t/, /d/, /k/, and /g/.
Fricatives:
A fricative is formed by a s the vocal tract by the articulators, such as the tongue or
the lips. However, unlike stops, the occlusion (blockage) in the vocal tract is not
complete. Some of the air is allowed to come through a very narrow opening. This
air becomes turbulent, because of the friction between the airflow and the narrow
passage. Examples of fricatives in English are /f/, /v/, /s/, /z/, /ʃ/, and /ʒ/.

CHAPTER 2 Page 18
Affricates:
An affricate combines the manners of articulation for the plosive and the fricative.
Like a stop, the articulation of the affricate begins with a complete closure of the
vocal tract by an articulator. However, when the closure is released, the release is
somewhat gradual, providing a narrow space between the articulator and the
mouth for the airflow to move through. This narrow space creates an environment
similar to a fricative, in that the airflow moving out becomes turbulent for a brief
period until full release of the closure. Examples of affricates in English are /tʃ/,
and /dʒ/.
Nasals:
A nasal is formed by the obstruction of the vocal tract and the lowering of the
velum. This lowering of the velum allows the airflow to flow out through the nasal
cavity, rather than through the oral cavity. Examples of nasals in English are /m/,
/n/, and /ŋ/.
Approximants:
An approximant is formed by the constriction of the vocal tract, but with no
obstruction in the vocal tract. Therefore, there is no turbulent airflow, as in a
fricative. Instead, the air is allowed to flow freely through the vocal tract. Examples
of approximants in English are /l/, /r/, /j/, and / w/.
The sound /l/ is also known as a lateral approximant, since the articulators do touch
at a central point, but the air is allowed to flow through one or both sides of the
contact point.
Other Articulations:
There are two other articulations in varieties of English that should be noted here:
the tap and the trill. A tap is formed by a quick contact between an articulator and
the vocal tract. In Standard American English, for example, there is the tap /r/,
which can be found in the middle of words such as ladder, and butter.
A trill is formed by the rapid vibration of the tongue tip against the roof of the
mouth. This vibration is caused by the motion of a current of air. This sound,
represented by /r/ , is found, for example, in varieties of British and Scots English. It is
also known as a "rolled r".
Summary:
In this lesson, you have been introduced to several manners of articulation. They
are listed below:
 Plosive: Formed by a blockage of the vocal tract, followed by an explosive
release of air.
 Fricative: Formed by slight contact between articulators, allowing turbulent
airflow.
 Affricate: Formed by a blockage of the vocal tract, like a plosive, followed by a
gradual release of turbulent air, like a fricative.
 Nasal: Formed by the lowering of the velum, allowing air to flow through the nasal
cavity.
 Approximant: Formed by the constriction of the vocal tract, but with no blockage
of the airflow.

CHAPTER 2 Page 19
 Tap: Formed by a quick contact between articulators.

 Trill: Formed by the rapid vibration of the tongue tip by a current of air.
Voicing:
In the phonetics of languages such as English, voice or voicing is one of the three
major parameters used to describe a speech sound. A voiced sound is one in
which the vocal cords vibrate, and a voiceless sound is one in which they do not.
Voicing is the difference between pairs of sounds such as [s] and [z] in English. If
one places the fingers on the voice box (i.e. the location of the Adam's apple in
the upper throat), one can feel a vibration when one pronounces “zzzz”, but not
when pronouncing “ssss”.
All vowels are voiced as are most nasals and rolls. Consonants, which are voiceless,
have a "partner" which is voiced.
Voiced Voiceless
/b/ /p/
/d/ /t/
/g/ /k/
/v/ /f/
/z/ /s/
/ð/ /θ/
/dʒ/ /tʃ/
/ʒ/ /ʃ/
/r/,/n/,/m/,/l/,/ŋ/,/w/,/j/

CHAPTER 2 Page 20
Description of Consonants:
Figure 3 shows a detailed description of consonants. The horizontal row describes

the consonant’s place of articulation and the vertical row describes its manner of
articulation and whether the consonant is voiced or voiceless.
Bilabial Labiodentals Interdental Alveolar Palatal Velar Glottal
Stop (oral) glottal

pet till kill
- voiceless stop
Stop (oral)
bet dill gill
- voiced
Nasal
met nil sing
(stop)
Fricative -
feel thin seal mesher hill
voiceless
Fricative -
veal then zeal measure
voiced
Affricate -
church
voiceless
Affricate -
judge
voiced
Glide -
which*
voiceless
Glide -
witch* you
voiced
Liquid lead, read
Description of Vowels:
A vowel is a speech sound, such as /ē/ or /ĭ/, created by the relatively free passage
of air stream through the larynx and oral cavity, usually forming the most prominent
and central sound of a syllable.
The Vowel-Chart:

CHAPTER 2 Page 21
A. Heat
B. Hero
A. Hit
B. Mirror
A. Hate
B. Day-rate [between compound members only]
A. Hair
B. Mary
A. Set
B. Merry
A. Hat
B. Marry
A. Sight
B. Pirate
A. House
B. Cowrie
A. Father
B. Starry
A. Hot
B. Forest
A. Fought
B. Warring
A. Coin
B. Moira [dubious]
A. Mourn
B. Boring
A. Hope
B. Low-road [between compound members only]
A. Put
B. ----- [none]
A. Hoot
B. Fury
A. Hurt
B. Furry
A. Hut
B. Hurry
A. About
ə B. Again

CHAPTER 2 Page 22
Schwa:
The schwa is the vowel sound in many lightly pronounced, unaccented syllables in
English words of more than one syllable. It is sometimes signified by the
pronunciation "uh" or symbolised by the symbol ‘ə’ (an upside-down rotated e). It is
the commonest vowel sound in English language. Its sound depends on the
adjacent consonants and it is a very short, neutral vowel sound.
Stress, Rhythm and Intonation:

The consonants and vowels are the "segmental" features of English phonology.
Other features like; stress, rhythm and intonation are known as "Supra-segmental".
Word Stress in English:

Word stress is your magic key to understanding spoken English. Unlike most
languages in the world, English is a stress-timed language. This means that stress is
placed at fairly regular intervals in a sentence not on the syllables themselves. For
this reason, non-native speakers, who speak English to native speakers without using
word stress, encounters two problems:
1. They find it difficult to understand native speakers, especially those speaking fast.
2. The native speakers may find it difficult to understand them.
In this lesson we look at the most important aspects of word stress, followed by a
short quiz to check your understanding:
Understanding Syllables:
To understand word stress, it helps to understand syllables.
Every word is made from syllables.
Each word has one, two, three or more syllables.
Word Number of Syllables
dog dog 1
green green 1
quite quite 1
quiet qui-et 2
orange or-ange 2
table ta-ble 2
expensive ex-pen-sive 3
interesting in-ter-est-ing 4
realistic re-al-is-tic 4
unexceptional un-ex-cep-tion-al 5

CHAPTER 2 Page 23
Notice that (with a few rare exceptions) every syllable contains at least one vowel
(a, e, i, o or u) or vowel sound.
What is Word Stress?
In English, we do not say each syllable with the same force or strength. In one word,
we accentuate ONE syllable. We say one syllable very loudly (big, strong,
important) and all the other syllables very quietly.
Let's take 3 words: photograph, photographer and photographic. Do they sound
the same when spoken? No. Because we accentuate (stress) ONE syllable in each
word. And it is not always the same syllable. So the shape of each word is different.
Total Stressed
Word Shape
Syllables Syllable
PHO TO GRAPH 3 #1
PHO TO GRAPH ER 4 #2
PHO TO GRAPH IC 4 #3
This happens in ALL words with 2 or more syllables: TEACHer, JaPAN, CHINa, aBOVE,
converSAtion, INteresting, imPORtant, deMAND, etCETera, etCETera, and etCETera.
The syllables that are not stressed are ‘weak’ or ‘small’ or ‘quiet’. Native speakers of
English listen for the STRESSED syllables, not the weak syllables. If you use word stress
in your speech, you will instantly and automatically improve your pronunciation
and your comprehension. Try to hear the stress in individual words each time you
listen to English, on the radio, or in films for example. Your first step is to HEAR and
recognise it. After that, you can USE it!
Why is Word Stress Important?

Word stress is not used in all languages. Some languages, Japanese or French for
example, pronounce each syllable with eq-ual em-pha-sis. Other languages,
English for example, use word stress.

CHAPTER 2 Page 24
Word stress is not an optional, extra feature that you can add to the English
language if you want. It is part of the language! English speakers use word stress to
communicate rapidly and accurately, even in difficult conditions. If, for example,
you do not hear a word clearly, you can still understand the word because of the
position of the stress. Think again about the two words photograph and
photographer. Now imagine that you are speaking to somebody by telephone
over a very bad line. You cannot hear clearly. In fact, you hear only the first two
syllables of one of these words, photo... Which word is it, photograph or
photographer? Of course, with word stress you will know immediately which word it
is, because in reality, you will hear either PHOto... or phoTO... So without hearing the
whole word, you probably know what the word is (PHOto...graph or
phoTO...grapher). It is magic! (Of course, you also have the 'context' of your
conversation to help you.)
This is a simple example of how word stress helps us understand English. There are
many, many other examples, because we use word stress all the time, without
thinking about it.
Rules of Word Stress in English:
There are two very simple rules about word stress:
1. One word has only one stress. (One word cannot have two stresses. If you hear
two stresses, you hear two words. Two stresses cannot be in one word. It is true
that there can be a "secondary" stress in some words. But a secondary stress is
much smaller than the main [primary] stress, and is only used in long words.)
2. We can only stress vowels, not consonants.
Here are some more rules that can help you understand where to put the stress.
But do not rely on them too much, because there are many exceptions. It is
better to try to "feel" the music of the language and to add the stress naturally.
1. Stress on First Syllable:
Rule Example
Most 2-Syllable Nouns PRESent, EXport, CHIna, TAble
Most 2-Syllable Adjectives PRESent, SLENder, CLEVer, HAPpy
2. Stress on Last Syllable:

Rule Example
Most 2-Syllable Verbs To preSENT, To exPORT, To deCIDE, To beGIN
3. Stress on Penultimate Syllable: (penultimate = second from end)
Rule Example
Words Ending in -ic GRAPHic, geoGRAPHic, geoLOGic
Words Ending in -sion and -tion teleVIsion, reveLAtion

CHAPTER 2 Page 25
4. Stress on Ante-Penultimate Syllable: (ante-penultimate = third from end)

Rule Example
Words Ending in -cy, -ty, -phy and deMOcracy, dependaBIlity, phoTOgraphy,

-gy geOLogy
Words Ending in -al CRItical, geoLOGical

5. Compound Words: (words with two parts)
Rule Example
For compound nouns, the stress is on the first part BLACKbird, GREENhouse
For compound adjectives, the stress is on the

bad-TEMpered, old-FASHioned
second part
For compound verbs, the stress is on the second part to underSTAND, to overFLOW
Word Stress Quiz:

1. Can you pass me a plastic _______ knife?
2. I want to take a photography _________ class.
3. China _________ is the place where I was born.
4. Please turn off the television ________ before you go out.
5. I can’t decide _______ which book to borrow.
6. Do you understand ________ this lesson?
7. Sparky is a very happy _________ puppy.
8. It’s critical ________ that you finish your essay.
9. My grandfather wears an old-fashioned ________ coat.
10. There is a lot of traffic __________ on the highway today.
Stress:
The major types of sentence stress are explicated. Four major types of stress are
identified:
 unmarked tonic stress
 emphatic stress
 contrastive stress
 new information stress
Tonic Stress:
An intonation unit almost always has one peak of stress, which is called 'tonic stress',
or 'nucleus'. Because stress applies to syllables, the syllable that receives the tonic
stress is called 'tonic syllable'. The term tonic stress is usually preferred to point to this
kind of stress in referring, proclaiming, and reporting utterances. Tonic stress is
almost always found in a content word in the utterance’s final position. Consider
the following examples, in which the tonic syllable is underlined:
 I'm going.
 I'm going to London.
 I'm going to London for a holiday.

CHAPTER 2 Page 26
A question does arise as to what happens to the previously tonic assigned syllables.
They still get stressed, however, not as much as the tonic syllable, producing a three
level stress for utterances. Then, the following is arrived at, where the tonic syllable is
further capitalised;
I'm going to London for a HOliday.
Emphatic Stress:
One reason to move the tonic stress from its utterance final position is to assign an
emphasis to a content word, which is usually a modal auxiliary, an intensifier, an
adverb, etc. Compare the following examples. The first two examples are adapted
from. Roach (1983:144).
i. It was very BOring. (unmarked)
ii. It was VEry boring. (emphatic)
i. You mustn't talk so LOUDly. (unmarked)
ii. You MUSTN'T talk so loudly. (emphatic)
Some intensifying adverbs and modifiers (or their derivatives) that are emphatic by
nature are “indeed, utterly, absolute, terrific, tremendous, awfully, terribly, great,
grand, really, definitely, truly, literally, extremely, surely, completely, barely,
entirely, very (adverb), very (adjective), quite, too, enough, pretty, far, especially,
alone, only and own. (Leech & Svartvik, 1.975:135)
Contrastive Stress:
In contrastive contexts, the stress pattern is quite different from the emphatic and
non-emphatic stresses. In that, any lexical item in an utterance can receive the
tonic stress provided that the contrastively stressed item can be contrastable in that
universe of speech. No distinction exists between content and function words
regarding this. The contrasted item receives the tonic stress provided that it is
contrastive with some lexical element (notion) in the stimulus utterance. Syllables
that are normally stressed in the utterance almost always get the same treatment
they do in non-emphatic contexts. Consider the following examples:
a) Do you like this one or THAT one?
b) I like THIS one.
Many other larger contrastive contexts (dialogues) can be found or worked out, or
even selected from literary works for a study of contrastive stress. Consider the
following:
 She played the piano yesterday. (It was her who...)
 She played the piano yesterday. (She only played (not. harmed) ...)
 She played the piano yesterday. (It was the piano that...)
 She played the piano yesterday. (It was yesterday...)

CHAPTER 2 Page 27
New Information Stress:

In a response given to a wh-question, the information supplied, naturally enough, is
stressed. That is, it is pronounced with more breath force, since it is more prominent
against a background given information in the question. The concept of new
information is much clearer to students of English in responses to wh-questions than
in declarative statements. Therefore, it is best to start with teaching the stressing of
the new information supplied to questions with a question word:
a) What's your NAME?
b) My name's GEORGE.
a) Where are you FROM?
b) I'm from WALES.
a) Where do you LIVE ?
b) I live in BONN.
a) When does the school term END?
b) It ends in MAY.
a) What do you DO?
b) I'm a STUdent.
Sentence stress can also be illustrated and practised by writing a long sentence on
the board, which can be made to carry many different meanings or points of
emphasis.
For example: Janet's going to Brighton tomorrow afternoon to buy herself a pair of
red, leather shoes.
Practice of sentence stress is achieved by cueing the learners with questions while
requiring them to use the whole sentence in reply. The second time this is done, the
learners can discard the parts of the sentence which do not contain the important
element of the answer in order to form a more natural response.
Intonation:
Tone: A unit of speech bounded by pauses has movement, of music and rhythm,
associated with the pitch of voice (Roach, 1983:113). This certain pattern of voice
movement is called 'tone'. A tone is a certain pattern, not an arbitrary one,
because it is meaningful in discourse. By means of tones, speakers signal whether to
refer, proclaim, agree, disagree, question or hesitate, or indicate completion and
continuation of turn-taking, in speech.
There are four types of tones that can be efficiently taught to non-native speakers
of English:
 fall
 low-rise
 high-rise
 fall-rise

CHAPTER 2 Page 28
Fall (A Falling Tone):

A falling tone is by far the most common used tone of all. It signals a sense of
finality, completion, belief in the content of the utterance, and so on. A speaker, by
choosing a falling tone, also indicates to the addressee that that is all he has to say,
and offers a chance (turn-taking) to the addressee to comment on, agree or
disagree with, or add to his utterance. Now, let us see the areas in which a failing
tone is used.
 I'll report you to the HEADmaster
 A falling tone may be used in referring expressions as well.
I've spoken with the CLEAner.
 Questions that begin with wh-questions are generally pronounced with a
falling tone:
Where is the PENcil?
 Imperative statements have a falling tone.
- Go and see a DOCtor.
- Take a SEAT.
 Requests or orders have a falling tone too.
- Please sit DOWN
- Call him IN.
 Exclamations:
Watch OUT!
 Yes/No questions and tag questions seeking or expecting confirmation can be
uttered with a falling tone. And the response to it may be lengthened.
Consider the following example:
- You like it, DON'T you?
- YEES.
 In a Yes/No question structure, if the speaker uses a falling tone, we assume
that he already knows the answer, or at least he is sure that he knows, and the
purpose of asking the question, as far as the speaker is concerned, is to put
the answer on record. In the following exchange, the speaker is sure to get a
'Yes' answer from the addressee:
- Have you MET him?
- YES.
Low Rise (A Rising Tone):
This tone is used in genuine 'Yes/No' questions where the speaker is sure that he
does not know the answer, and that the addressee knows the answer. Such Yes/No
questions are uttered with a rising tone. For instance; consider the following
question uttered with a rising tone, the answer of which could be either of the three
options:
A: Isn't he NICE ?
B: i) Yes.
ii) No.
iii) I don't know.

CHAPTER 2 Page 29
Compare the above example with the following example, which is uttered with a
falling tone, and which can only have one appropriate answer in the context:
a) Isn't he NICE ?
b) YES.
Other examples which are uttered with a rising tone are:
 Do you want some COFfee?
 Do you take CREAM in your coffee?
High Rise (A Rising Tone):
If the tonic stress is uttered with extra pitch height, as in the following intonation
units, we may think that the speaker is asking for a repetition or clarification, or
indicating disbelief.
a) I'm taking up TAxidermy this autumn.
b) Taking up WHAT? (clarification)
a) She passed her DRIving test.
b) She PASSED? (disbelief)
Fall Rise (Followed by Fall):
While the three tones explicated so far can be used in independent, single
intonation units, the fourth tone, fail-rise, appears to be generally used in what may
be called 'dependent' intonation units, such as; those involving sentential adverbs,
subordinate clauses, compound sentences, and so on. Fall-rise signals
dependency, continuity, and non-finality (Cruttenden, 1986:102). It generally
occurs in sentence non-final intonation units. Consider the following in which the
former of the intonation units are uttered with a fall-rise tone (the slash indicates a
pause):
 Private enterPRISE / is always EFficient.
 A quick tour of the CIty / would be NICE.
 PreSUmably / he thinks he CAN. (Leech & Svartvik, 1.975:135)
 Usually / he comes on SUNday.
One of the most frequent complex clause types in English is one that has
dependent (adverbial or subordinate) clause followed by an independent (main)
clause. When such a clause has two intonation units, the first, non-final, normally
has a fall-rise while the second, final, has falling tone:
Examples:
 When I passed my REAding test / I was VEry happy.
 If you SEE him / give my MESsage.
When the order of complex clause is reversed, we may still observe the pattern
fall-rise and fall respectively, as in:
 I WON'T deliver the goods / unless I receive the PAYment.
 The moon revolves around the EARTH / as we ALL know.
 Private enterprise is always EFficient / whereas public ownership means
INefficient.

CHAPTER 2 Page 30
All in all, final intonation units have a falling tone while non-final ones have fall-rise.
Consider further complex clauses:
 He joined the ARmy / and spent all his time in ALdershot.
 My sister who is a NURSE / has ONE child.
This completes the four major tones selected for the framework: < http://iteslj.org/
Techniques/Celik-Intonation.html>
Teaching Pronunciation:
When teaching pronunciation, the following criteria should be put into account:
1. Comprehensible: are learners able to identify the sounds and are their
articulations understood by native speakers?
2. Social Acceptability: are learners producing sounds that are aesthetically
acceptable to the ears of native speakers?
3. Ease of Production: do learners have a good chance of successfully learning to
produce the sounds?
4. Number of Familiar Words (Functional Load): do the sounds occur frequently in
essential and/ or very useful words?
5. Likely to Be a Bad Habit Affecting Other Sounds: are errors getting in the way of
other important targets?
Phonology Lessons Will Centre on:
1. Hearing: physical demonstration. Discrimination exercises e.g. ship or sheep?
/i/ or /i:/? Which vowel sounds occur in: "it", "bit", "eat", "fit", "feet", "seat", "sit"?
2. Production: physically making sounds.
3. Expanded Contexts: Phrases and sentences as well as phonemes between
closed consonant.
Tips for Teaching Pronunciation:
a. Distinguish between production and comprehension in your teaching.
B. Teach intonation in context. Use model dialogues to represent particular
functions of the voice. Some practice on linking intonation patterns to attitude
will probably help in clearer communication of meaning in spite of the findings
of the Scottish Intonation Project.
C. Use of "dialogues" as English pronunciation teaching materials.
D. Link intonation practice to practice on grammatical accuracy. Provide learners
with the phonological rehearsal and memory training needed to achieve
accuracy in oral English.
Colin Mortimer's dialogues in The Cambridge Elements of Pronunciation series (e.g.

"Stress Time", "Weak Forms", "Link Up" and "Clusters") include single lexical items and
conversational phrases i.e. some very essential features of speaker/listener
interaction.

CHAPTER 2 Page 31
Conclusion:
 Differences in sound systems have a phonological basis: they depend on
variation in speech, organ, positions, or breath control. Teachers must
understand the physical aspects of sound production.
 Teachers will not necessarily teach these to students, but this knowledge will
provide a basis for teachers to identify the physical reasons for inaccurate
approximations of foreign language sounds, enabling them to give precise
instructions which will help students' correct faulty pronunciation.
 Unless teachers understand how students are using their speech organs in
producing a native language sound and what they should be doing to
reproduce the foreign language sound acceptably, teachers will not be able to
help students beyond a certain stage of earnest but inaccurate imitation.
Incorrectly articulated consonants will affect the production of vowels, as vowels
will affect consonants. Students, therefore, require steady practice and muscle
training. Pronunciation is a motor skill that needs practice.

CHAPTER 3 Page 33
Overview of Language Teaching Methodology:

The word "methodology" is usually given lip-service as an explanation for the way a
given teacher goes about his/her teaching, a sort of umbrella-term to describe the
job of teaching another language. Most often, methodology is understood to
mean methods in a general sense, and in some cases it is even equated to specific
teaching techniques. It does in fact mean and involve much more than that; it is
the study of pedagogical practices in general (including theoretical underpinnings
and related research). In other words, all considerations that are involved in "how to
teach" are methodological.
Task:
Define the three following terms.
 An Approach
 A Method
 A Curriculum/Syllabus
 A Technique
Approach:
An Approach is the theoretical positions and beliefs about the nature of language,
the nature of language learning, and the applicability of both to pedagogical
settings.
Method:
A Method is a generalised set of classroom specifications for accomplishing
linguistic objectives. Methods tend to be primarily concerned with teacher and
student's roles and behaviours, and secondarily with such features as linguistic and
subject-matter objectives, sequencing, and materials. They are almost always
thought of as being broadly applicable to a variety of audiences in a variety of
contexts.
Curriculum/Syllabus:
A syllabus is designed for carrying out a particular language programme. Features
include a primary concern with the specification of linguistic and subject-matter
objectives, sequencing, and materials to meet the needs of a designated group of
learners in a defined context.
Technique:
A Technique is any of a wide variety of exercises, activities, or devices used in the
language classroom for realising lesson objectives.
Task:
What are the techniques you deem effective in teaching a foreign language?
---------------------------------------------------————————————----------------------------
——--------------------------------------------------------------———————————-------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------————————————-----
--------------------————————————-----------------------------------------------------------

CHAPTER 3 Page 34
Grammar Translation:
Latin has been studied for centuries, with the prime objectives of learning how to
read classical Latin texts, understanding the fundamentals of grammar and
translation, and gaining insights into some important foreign influences Latin has
had on the development of other European languages. The method used to
teach it overwhelmingly bore those objectives in mind, and came to be known
(appropriately!) as the Classical Method. It is now more commonly known in
Foreign Language Teaching circles as the Grammar Translation Method.
It is hard to decide which is more surprising - the fact that this method has survived
right up until today (alongside a host of more modern and more "enlightened"
methods), or the fact that what was essentially a method developed for the study
of "dead" languages involving little or no spoken communication or listening
comprehension is still used for the study of languages that are very much alive and
require competence not only in terms of reading, writing and structure, but also
speaking, listening and interactive communication. How has such an archaic
method, "remembered with distaste by thousands of school learners" persevered?
(Richards and Rodgers, 1986:4)
It is worth looking at the objectives, features and typical techniques commonly
associated with the Grammar Translation Method, in order to both understand how
it works and why it has shown such tenacity as an acceptable (even
recommended or respected) language teaching philosophy in many countries
and institutions around the world.
Objectives:
Most teachers who employ the Grammar Translation Method to teach English
would probably tell you that (for their students at least) the most fundamental
reason for learning the language is to give learners access to English literature,
develop their minds "mentally" through foreign language learning, and to build their
grammar, reading, vocabulary and translation skills.
Some teachers who use the method might also tell you that it is the most effective
way to prepare students for "global communication" by beginning with the key skills
of reading and grammar. Others may even say it is the "least stressful" for students
because almost all the teaching occurs in L1 and students are rarely called upon to
speak the language in any communication fashion.
More conservative teachers from many conservative countries are even likely to be
put out by anyone merely questioning the method, and a typical response could
be "because that's the way it's always been done - it's the way I learned and look,
now I'm a professor". The point being, the method is institutionalised and
considered fundamental. Such teachers are probably even unaware that the
method has a name and can be compared alongside other methods.

CHAPTER 3 Page 35
Key Features:
According to Prator and Celce-Murcia (1979:3), the key features of the Grammar
Translation Method are as follows:
1. Classes are taught in the mother tongue, with little active use of the target
language.
2. Much vocabulary is taught in the form of lists of isolated words.
3. Long elaborate explanations of the intricacies of grammar are given.
4. Grammar provides the rules for putting words together, and instruction often
focuses on the form and inflection of words.
5. Reading of difficult classical texts is begun early.
6. Little attention is paid to the content of texts, which are treated as exercises in
grammatical analysis.
7. Often the only drills are exercises in translating disconnected sentences from the
target language into the mother tongue.
8. Little or no attention is given to pronunciation.
Typical Techniques:
Diane Larsen-Freeman, in her book Techniques and Principles in Language
Teaching (1986:13) provides expanded descriptions of some common/typical
techniques closely associated with the Grammar Translation Method. The listing
here is in summary form only.
1. Translation of a Literary Passage:
Translating target language to native language.
2. Reading Comprehension Questions:
Finding information in a passage, making inferences and relating to personal
experience.
3. Antonyms/Synonyms:
Finding antonyms and synonyms for words or sets of words.
4. Cognates:
Learning spelling/sound patterns that correspond between L1 and the target
language.
5. Deductive Application of Rule:
Understanding grammar rules and their exceptions, then applying them to new
examples.
6. Fill-in-the-Blanks:
Filling in gaps in sentences with new words or items of a particular grammar
type.
7. Memorisation:
Memorisinsg vocabulary lists, grammatical rules and grammatical paradigms.
8. Use of New Words in Sentences:
Students create sentences to reflect their knowledge of the meaning and use of
new words.
9. Composition:
Students write about a topic using the target language.

CHAPTER 3 Page 36
Example from a Classroom:

As we enter the classroom, students are reading a passage in their textbook. The
passage is an excerpt entitled “The Boys' Ambition" from Mark Twain's Life on the
Mississippi. Each student is called on to read a few lines from the passage. After he
has finished reading, he is asked to translate into Spanish the few lines he has just
read. The teacher helps him with new vocabulary items. When the students have
finished reading and translating the passage, the teacher asks them in Spanish if
they have any questions. One student says, “No understand 'gorgeous.' "The
teacher translates, "Primoroso."
Then, the teacher asks them to write the answers to the comprehension questions
which appear at the end of the excerpt. The questions are in English, and the
students are instructed to write the answers in English as well. They do the first one
together as an example. A student reads out loud, "When did Mark Twain live?"
Another student replies, "Mark Twain lived from 1835 to 1910." "Bueno," says the
teacher, and the students begin working quietly by themselves.
After one hour, the teacher, speaking in Spanish, asks the students to stop and
check their work. One by one each student reads a question and then reads his
response. If he is correct, the teacher calls on another student to read the next
question. If the student is incorrect, the teacher selects a different student to supply
the correct answer, or the teacher herself gives the right answer.
In the next activity, the teacher asks the students to turn the page in their text.
There is a list of words there. The students see the words “ambition," "career,"
"wharf," "tranquil," "gorgeous," "loathe," and "envy,". They are instructed to give the
Spanish equivalent for each word.
The next section of the chapter deals with grammar. Students follow in their books
as the teacher reads a description of two-word (phrasal) verbs. Then they are given
the rule for use of a direct object with two-word verbs:
 If the two-word verb is separable, the direct object may come: between the
verb and its particle. However, separation is necessary when the direct
object is a pronoun. If the verb, is inseparable, then there is no separation of
the verb and particle by the object. For example:
 John put away his book.
Or
 John put his book away/John put it away.
But not
 John put away it.
(Because "put away" is a separable two-word verb.)
 The teacher went over the homework.
But not
 The teacher went the homework over.
(Because "put away" is an in separable two-word verb.)

CHAPTER 3 Page 37
After that students are given a list of verbs and are asked to tell which of them is
separable and which is inseparable. They refer to the passage for clues. If they
cannot tell from the passage, they use their dictionaries or ask their teacher.
At the end of the chapter there is a list of vocabulary items that appeared in the
passage. The list is divided into two parts: the first contains words, and the second,
idioms like "to give someone a cold shoulder." Next to each is a Spanish word or
phrase. For homework, the teacher asks the students to memorise the Spanish
translation for the first twenty new words and to write a sentence in English using
each word.
The Direct Method:
Origin:
Towards the end of the late 1800s, a revolution in language teaching philosophy
took place that is seen by many as the dawn of modern foreign language
teaching. Teachers, frustrated by the limits of the Grammar Translation Method in
terms of its inability to create communicative competence in students, began to
experiment with new ways of teaching language. Basically, teachers began
attempting to teach foreign languages in a way that was more similar to first
language acquisition. It incorporated techniques designed to address all the areas
that the Grammar Translation did not. The method also moved as far away as
possible from various techniques typical of the Grammar Translation Method - for
instance using L1 as the language of instruction, memorising grammatical rules and
lots of translation between L1 and the target language.
Objectives:
The basic premise of the Direct Method is that students will learn to communicate in
the target language, partly by learning how to think in that language and by not
involving L1 in the language learning process whatsoever. Objectives include
teaching the students how to use the language spontaneously and orally, linking
meaning with the target language through the use of realia, pictures or pantomime
(Larsen-Freeman 1986:24). There is to be a direct connection between concepts
and the language to be learned.
Key Features:
Richards and Rodgers (1986:9-10) summarise the key features of the Direct Method
thus:
1. Classroom instruction is conducted exclusively in the target language.
2. Only everyday vocabulary and sentences are taught.
3. Oral communication skills are built up in a carefully-traded progression
organised around question-and-answer exchanges between teachers and
students in small, intensive classes.
4. Grammar is taught inductively.
5. New teaching points are taught through modeling and practice.
6. Concrete vocabulary is taught through demonstration, objects, and pictures;
abstract vocabulary is taught by association of ideas.
7. Both speech and listening comprehension are taught.
8. Correct pronunciation and grammar are emphasised.

CHAPTER 3 Page 38
Typical Techniques:
Diane Larsen-Freeman, in her book Techniques and Principles in Language
Teaching (1986:26-27) provides expanded descriptions of some common/typical
techniques closely associated with the Direct Method. The listing here is in summary
form only.
1. Reading Aloud:
Reading sections of passages, plays or dialogues out loud.
2. Question and Answer Exercise:
Asking questions in the target language and having students answer in full
sentences.
3. Student Self-Correction:
Teacher facilitates opportunities for students to self correct using follow-up
questions, tone, etc.
4. Conversation Practice:
Teacher asks students and students ask students questions using the target
language.
5. Fill-in-the-Blank Exercise:
Items use target language only and inductive rather than explicit grammar rules.
6. Dictation:
Teacher reads passage aloud various amounts of times at various tempos,
students write down what they hear.
7. Paragraph Writing:
Students write paragraphs in their own words using the target language and
various models.
Weaknesses:
Still, the Direct Method was not without problems. "(It) did not take well in public
education where the constraints of budget, classroom size, time, and teacher
background made such a method difficult to use." By the late 1920s, the method
was starting to go into decline and there was even a return to the Grammar
Translation Method, which guaranteed more in the way of scholastic language
learning orientated around reading and grammar skills. But the Direct Method
continues to enjoy a popular following in private language school circles, and it
was one of the foundations upon which the well-known "Audio-lingual Method"
expanded from starting half way through the 20th century.
The teacher is calling the class to order as we find seats toward the back of the
room. He has placed a big map of the United States in the front of the classroom.
He asks the students to open their books to a certain page number. The lesson is
entitled "Looking at a Map." As the students are called on they read a sentence
from the reading passage at the beginning of the lesson. The teacher points to the
part of the map the sentence describes after each student has read his sentence.
The passage begins:

CHAPTER 3 Page 39
We are looking at a map of the United States. Canada is the country to the north of the
United States, and Mexico is the country to the south of the United States. Between
Canada and the United States are the Great Lakes. Between Mexico and the United
States is the Rio Grande River. On the East Coast is the Atlantic Ocean, and on the West
Coast is the Pacific Ocean. In the East is a mountain range called the Appalachian
Mountains. In the West are Rocky Mountains.
After the students finish reading the passage, they are asked if they have any
questions. A student asks what a mountain range is. The teacher turns to the
blackboard and draws a series of inverted cones to illustrate a mountain range.
The student nods and says, “I understand." After all of the questions have been
answered, the teacher asks some of his own.
"Class, are we looking at a map of Italy?"

The class replies in chorus, "No!"
The teacher reminds the class to answer in a full sentence. "No, we aren't
looking at a map of Italy," they respond. The teacher asks, "Are we looking at
a map of the United States?" "Yes. We are looking at a map of the United
States."
"Is Canada a state in the United States?"
"No. Canada isn't a state. It is a country."
"Are the Great Lakes in the North of the United States?”Yes. The Great
Lakes are in the North."
"Is the Mississippi a river or a lake?"
"The Mississippi is a river."
"It's a river. Where is it?"
"It's in the middle of the United States."
"What colour is the Mississippi River on the map?" "It's blue."

CHAPTER 3 Page 40
Finally, the teacher invites the students to ask questions. Hands go up, and the
teacher calls on students to pose questions one at a time, to which the class replies.
A student asks, "What is the ocean in the West Coast?" The teacher interrupts
before the class has a chance to reply, saying, "What is the ocean in the West
Coast? ... or on the West Coast?" The student hesitates, and then says, "On the West
Coast." "Correct," says the teacher. "Now, repeat your question." "What is the ocean
on the West Coast?"
The class replies in 'chorus, “The Ocean on the West Coast is the Pacific." The
teacher begins asking questions and making statements again. This time, however,
the questions and statements are about the students in the classroom and contain
one of the prepositions "on," "at," "to," "in," or "between,"
Finally, the teacher asks the students to take out their notebooks, and he gives
them a dictation. The passage he dictates is one paragraph long and is about
the geography of the United States.

CHAPTER 3 Page 41
The Audio-lingual Method:

Origin:
The next revolution in terms of language teaching methodology coincided with
World War II, when America became aware that it needed people to learn foreign
languages very quickly as part of its overall military operations. The "Army Method"
was suddenly developed to build communicative competence in translators
through very intensive language courses focusing on aural/oral skills. This in
combination with some new ideas about language learning coming from the
disciplines of descriptive linguistics and behavioural psychology went on to
become what is known as the Audio-lingual Method (ALM).
Objectives:
Just as with the Direct Method that preceded it, the overall goal of the Audio-
lingual Method was to create communicative competence in learners. However, it
was thought that the most effective way to do this was for students to "over learn"
the language being studied through extensive repetition and a variety of elaborate
drills. The idea was to project the linguistic patterns of the language (based on the
studies of structural linguists) into the minds of the learners in a way that made
responses automatic and "habitual". To this end it was held that the language
"habits" of the first language would constantly interfere, and the only way to
overcome this problem was to facilitate the learning of a new set of "habits"
appropriate linguistically to the language being studied.
Key Features:
Here is a summary of the key features of the Audio-lingual Method, taken from
Brown (1994:57) and adapted from Prator and Celce-Murcia (1979).
1. New material is presented in dialogue form.
2. There is dependence on mimicry, memorisation of set of phrases, and over
learning.
3. Structures are sequenced by means of contrastive analysis and taught one at
a time.
4. Structural patterns are taught using repetitive drills.
5. There is little or no grammatical explanation. Grammar is taught by inductive
analogy rather than deductive explanation.
6. Vocabulary is strictly limited and learned in context.
7. There is much use of tapes, language labs, and visual aids.
8. Great importance is attached to pronunciation.
9. Very little use of the mother tongue by teachers is permitted.
10. Successful responses are immediately reinforced.
11. There is great effort to get students to produce error-free utterances.
12. There is a tendency to manipulate language and disregard content.

CHAPTER 3 Page 42
Typical Techniques:
Larsen-Freeman, in her book Techniques and Principles in Language Teaching
(1986:45-47) provides expanded descriptions of some common/typical techniques
closely associated with the Audio-lingual Method. The listing here is in summary
form only.
1. Dialogue Memorisation:
Students memorise an opening dialogue using mimicry and applied role-
playing.
2. Backward Build-Up (Expansion Drill):
Teacher breaks a line into several parts; students repeat each part starting at
the end of the sentence and "expanding" backwards through the sentence,
adding each part in sequence.
3. Repetition Drill:
Students repeat teacher's model as quickly and accurately as possible.
4. Chain Drill:
Students ask and answer each other one-by-one in a circular chain around the
classroom.
5. Single Slot Substitution Drill:
Teacher states a line from the dialogue, then uses a word or a phrase as a "cue"
that students, when repeating the line, must substitute into the sentence in the
correct place.
6. Multiple-Sot Substitution Drill:
Same as the Single Slot drill, except that there are multiple cues to be substituted
into the line.
7. Transformation Drill:
Teacher provides a sentence that must be turned into something else, for
example a question to be turned into a statement, an active sentence to be
turned into a negative statement, etc.
8. Question-and-Answer Drill:
Students should answer or ask questions very quickly.
9. Use of Minimal Pairs:
Using contrastive analysis, teacher selects a pair of words that sound identical
except for a single sound that typically poses difficulty for the learners - students
are to pronounce and differentiate the two words.
10. Complete the Dialogue:
Selected words are erased from a line in the dialogue - students must find and
insert.
11. Grammar Games:
Various games designed to practise a grammar point in context, using lots of
repetition.
Weaknesses:
Through extensive mimicry, memorisation and over-learning of language patterns
and forms, students and teachers were often able to see immediate results. This
was both its strength and its failure in the long run, as critics began to point out that
the method did not deliver in terms of producing long-term communicative ability.

CHAPTER 3 Page 43

In the classroom, the students are attentively listening to the teacher who is
presenting a new dialogue. The students know they will be expected to eventually
memorise the dialogue. All of the teacher's instructions are in English. Sometimes
she uses actions to convey meaning, but not one word of the students' mother
tongue is uttered. After finishing the dialogue, students repeat each line several
times.
When students stumble, the teacher uses the backward drill/ build-up drill. The
purpose of this drill is to break down the troublesome sentence into smaller parts;
the teacher starts with the end of the sentence and has the class repeat just the
last two words. Since they can do this, the teacher adds few more words, and the
class repeats this expanded phrase. Little by little the teacher builds up the phrases
until the entire sentence is being repeated.
TEACHER: Repeat after me. Post office.
CLASS: Post office.
TEACHER: To the post office.
CLASS: To the post office.
TEACHER: Going to the post office.
CLASS: Going to the post office.
TEACHER: I'm going to the post office.
CLASS: I'm going to the post office.
After the students have repeated the dialogue several times, the teacher gives
them a chance to adopt one of the roles in the dialogue while she says the other.
Before the class actually says each line, the teacher models it. In effect, the class is
experiencing a repetition drill where the task is to listen carefully and attempt to
mimic the teacher's model as accurately as possible. For further practice, the class
and the teacher switch roles, then the class is divided into two groups and each
take a role of the dialogue. Finally, the teacher selects two students to perform the
entire dialogue for the rest of the class. When they are finished, two others do the
same.
The teacher moves next to the second major phase of the lesson. She continues to
drill the students with language from the dialogue. The first is a single-slot substitution
drill in which the students repeat a sentence from the dialogue and replace a word
or phrase in the sentence with the word or phrase the teacher gives them. This
word or phrase is called the cue.
E.g. the teacher begins by reciting a line from the dialogue, "I am going to the post
office." Following this she shows the students a picture of a bank and says the
phrase, "The bank." She pauses, and then says, "I am going to the bank."

CHAPTER 3 Page 44
Finally, the teacher increases the complexity of the task by leading the students in a
multi-slot substitution drill. This is essentially the same type of drill as the single-slot the
teacher just used. However with this drill, students must recognise what part of
speech the cue word is and where it fits into the sentence.
The substitution drills are followed by a transformation drill. This type of drill asks
students to change one type of sentence into another; an affirmative sentence
into a negative or an active sentence into a passive. In this class, the teacher uses
a substitution drill that requires the students to change a statement into a yes/no
question. The teacher offers an example, "I say, 'She is going to the post office.”You
make a question by saying, 'Is she going to the post office?”. The teacher models
another sentence with a student.
Then she selects students to answer her cue questions and give immediate
feedback. She sometimes provides her students with situations that require a
negative answer and sometimes with situations that require a positive one. She calls
on individuals now, smiling encouragement to each student. She holds up pictures
and poses questions. The students seem to be comfortable answering the
questions. The only time she changes the rhythm is when a student seriously
mispronounces a word. When this occurs, she restates the word and works briefly
with the student until his pronunciation is closer to her own. Finally, she recaps on
the dialogue for the last time and dismisses the class.

CHAPTER 3 Page 45
Communicative Language Teaching Approach:

Origin:
By the mid-eighties, teaching methodology was moving towards the concept of a
broad "approach" to language teaching that encompassed various methods:
motivations for learning English, types of teachers and the needs of individual
classrooms and students themselves. It would be fair to say that if there is a single
umbrella approach to language teaching that has become the accepted "norm"
in this field, it would have to be the Communicative Language Teaching
Approach. This is also known as (CLT).
Objectives:
"Beyond grammatical discourse elements in communication, we are probing the
nature of social, cultural, and pragmatic features of language. CLT explores
pedagogical means for 'real-life' communication in the classroom. It tries to get our
learners to develop linguistic fluency, not just the accuracy that has so consumed
our historical journey. CLT teachers equip their students with tools for generating
unrehearsed language performance 'out there' when they leave the womb of our
classrooms. They are concerned with how to facilitate lifelong language learning
among their students, not just with the immediate classroom task. Learners are
partners in a cooperative venture. And classroom practices seek to draw on
whatever intrinsically sparks learners to reach their fullest potential."
Features of (CLT):
David Nunan (1991:279) lists five basic characteristics of Communicative Language
Teaching:
1. An emphasis on learning to communicate through interaction in the target
language.
2. The introduction of authentic texts into the learning situation.
3. The provision of opportunities for learners to focus, not only on the language
but also on the learning process itself.
4. An enhancement of the learner's own personal experiences as important
contributing elements to classroom learning.
5. An attempt to link classroom language learning with language activation
outside the classroom.
6. Meaning is paramount.
7. Dialogues, if used, centre on communicative functions and are not normally
memorised.
8. Contextualisation is a basic premise.
9. Effective communication is sought.
10. Drilling may occur, but peripherally.
11. Comprehensible pronunciation is sought.
12. Any device which helps the learners is accepted - varying according to their
age, interest, etc.
13. Attempts to communicate may be encouraged from the very beginning.
14. Reading and writing can start from the first day, if desired.

CHAPTER 3 Page 46
15. The target linguistic system will be learned best through the process of
struggling to communicate.
16. Communicative competence is the desired goal.
17. Linguistic variation is a central concept in materials and methods.
18. Sequencing is determined by any consideration of content function, or
meaning which maintains interest.
19. Teachers help learners in any way that motivates them to work with the
language.
20. Language is created by the individual often through trial and error.
21. Fluency and acceptable language is the primary goal, accuracy is judged not
in the abstract but in context.
22. Students are expected to interact with other people, either in the flesh,
through pair and group work, or in their writings.
23. Intrinsic motivation will spring from an interest in what is being communicated
by the language.
Weaknesses:
CLT is a generic approach, and can seem non-specific at times in terms of how to
actually go about using practices in the classroom in any sort of systematic
way. There are many interpretations of what CLT actually means and involves.

The teacher greets the class and distributes a handout. On one side is a copy of a
sports column from a recent newspaper. The reporter discusses who he thinks will
win the World Cup. The teacher asks the students to underline the predictions the
reporter has made. All directions are given in the target language. When they
finish, they read what they have underlined. The teacher writes the predictions on
the blackboard. He then asks them which predictions the reporter feels more
certain about and which he feels less certain.
 Malaysia is very likely to win the World Cup this year.
 Italy can win if they play as well as they have lately.
 Czechoslovakia probably won't be a contender.
 England may have an outside chance.
Then he asks the students to rephrase the statement to give the same meaning.
One student says, "Malaysia probably will win the World Cup," "Yes," says the
teacher. "Any others?" No one responds. The teacher offers, "Malaysia is almost
certain to win the World Cup." All the other predictions are tackled in the same
manner. The teacher evaluates students’ answers and makes sure they all convey
the same degree of certainty.
Next, the teacher asks students to turn to the other side of the handout, where they
find the already discussed sentences jumbled. The teacher tells the students to
unscramble the sentences, to put them in their proper order once again. When
they finish, the students compare what they have done with the original on the
other side of the handout.

CHAPTER 3 Page 47
The teacher next announces that the students will be playing a game. He divides
the class into small groups of fives. He hands each group a deck of thirteen cards.
Each card has a picture of a piece of sports equipment. As the students identify the
items, the teacher writes each name on the blackboard; e.g. basketball, soccer
ball, volleyball, tennis racket, skis, ice skates …etc.
The cards are shuffled, and for every four of the students in a group are three cards.
They do not show their cards to anyone else. The extra card is placed face down in
the middle of the group. The fifth person in the group receives no cards. She is told
that she should try to predict what it is that Mary-Ann (one of the students in the
class) will be doing the following weekend. The fifth student is to make statements
like, “Mary-Ann may go skiing this weekend."
If one of the members of this group has a card showing skis, the group member
would reply, for example, “Mary-Ann can't go skiing, because I have her skis." If, on
the other hand, no one has the picture of the skis, then the fifth student can make
a strong statement about the likelihood of Mary-Ann going skiing. She says, for
example, "Mary-Ann will go skiing." She can check her prediction by turning over
the face-down card. If it is the picture of the skis, then she knows she is correct. The
students seem to really enjoy playing the game. They start taking turns so that they
all participate.
For the next activity, the teacher reads a number of predictions.

 In 2020, a woman will be elected President of the United States.
 By 2030, solar energy will replace the world's reliance on fossil fuels.
 By 2050, people will be living on the moon.
The students are told to make statements about how probable they think the
predictions are and why they believe so. They are also asked how they feel about
the prediction. During the discussion, one of the students says, “I don't think that it's
like that a world government will be in place by the twenty-second century”. The
teacher and students ignore the mistake and the discussion continues.
Next, the teacher has the students divided into groups of three. One member of
each group is given a picture strip story. There are six pictures in a row on a piece of
paper. The student with the story shows the first picture only to the other members
of his group. The other students try to predict what they think will happen in the
second picture. The student in charge corrects his colleagues and moves to the
next picture. This process is repeated until all pictures are revealed.
For the final activity, the students are told that they will do a role-play. The teacher
tells them that they are to be divided into groups of four. They are to imagine that
they are all employees of the same company. One of them is the others' boss. They
are having a meeting to discuss what will possibly occur as a result of their
company merging with another company. Before they begin, they discuss some
possibilities together. They decide that they can talk about topics such as changing
polices, reducing labour force, increasing salaries. The teacher stresses that they
need to address their boss more formally. The teacher provides some examples of
formal ways of agreement and disagreement.

CHAPTER 3 Page 48
For fifteen minutes the students perform their role-play. The teacher moves from
group to group to answer questions and offer any advice on what the groups can
discuss. After it is over, the students have an opportunity to pose any questions. In
this way, they elicit some relevant vocabulary words.
The teacher uses the last few minutes to give the homework assignment. The
students are to watch a debate between two political candidates on television
that night. They are then asked to write their prediction of who they think will win
the election and why. They will read their reports to their classmates at the start of
the next class.

CHAPTER 3 Page 49
The Natural Approach:

Origin:
Stephen Krashen and Tracy Terrell developed the Natural Approach in the early
eighties (Krashen and Terrell, 1983), based on Krashen's theories about second
language acquisition. The approach advocated the need for a silent phase,
waiting for spoken production to "emerge" of its own accord, and emphasising the
need to make learners as relaxed as possible during the learning process.
Some important underlying principles are that there should be a lot of language
"acquisition" as opposed to language "processing", and there needs to be a
considerable amount of comprehensible input from the teacher. Meaning is
considered as the essence of language and vocabulary (not grammar) is the heart
of language.
As part of the Natural Approach, students listen to the teacher using the target
language communicatively from the very beginning. It has certain similarities with
the much earlier Direct Method, with the important exception that students are
allowed to use their native language alongside the target language as part of the
language learning process. In early stages, students are not corrected during oral
production, as the teacher is focusing on meaning rather than form (unless the error
is so drastic that it actually hinders meaning).
Communicative activities prevail throughout a language course employing the
Natural Approach, focusing on a wide range of activities including games, role-
plays, dialogues, group work and discussions. There are three generic stages
identified in the approach:
(1) Preproduction:
Developing listening skills.
(2) Early Production:
Students struggle with the language and make many errors which are
corrected based on content and not structure.
(3) Extending Production:
Promoting fluency through a variety of more challenging activities.
Weaknesses:
Krashen's theories and the Natural approach have received plenty of criticism,
particularly orientated around the recommendation of a silent period that is
terminated when students feel ready to emerge into oral production, and the idea
of comprehensible input. Critics point out that students will "emerge" at different
times (or perhaps not at all!) and it is hard to determine which forms of language
input will be "comprehensible" to the students. These factors can create a
classroom that is essentially very difficult to manage unless the teacher is highly
skilled. Still, this was the first attempt at creating an expansive and overall
"approach" rather than a specific "method".

CHAPTER 3 Page 50
Resources and Books on Methodology

 Asher, James. 1977. Learning Another Language Through Actions: The
Complete Teacher's Guidebook. Los Gatos, CA: Sly Oaks Productions. See also
<http://www.tpr-world.com/.>
 Brown, H. Douglas. 1994. Teaching by Principles: An Interactive Approach to
Language Pedagogy. Prentice Hall.
 Finocchiaro, Mary & Brumfit, Christopher. 1983. The Functional-Notional
Approach: From Theory to Practice. Oxford University Press.
 Krashen, Stephen D., & Terrell, Tracy D. 1983. The Natural Approach: Language
Acquisition in the Classroom. Pergamon Press. See also Bilingual Education:
Arguments For and (Bogus) Arguments Against , Theory of Second Language
Acquisition, A Summary of Stephen Krashen's "Principles and Practice in Second
Language Acquisition", Why Bilingual Education?
 Larsen-Freeman, Dianne. 1986. Techniques and Principles in Language
Teaching. New York: Oxford University Press.
 Nunan, David. 1991. Language Teaching Methodology: A Textbook for
Teachers. Prentice Hall. See also <http://ec.hku.hk/dcnunan/>
 Prator, Clifford H. & Celce-Murcia, Marianne. 1979. "An outline of language
teaching approaches." In Celce-Murcia, Marianne & McIntosh, Lois (Ed.),
Teaching English as a Second or Foreign Language. Newbury House.
 Richards, Jack & Rodgers, Theodore. 1986. Approaches and Methods in
Language Teaching. New York: Cambridge University Press.
Online Resources:
 Second Language Teaching Methodologies - Eric Clearinghouse on
Languages and Linguistics.
 Teaching Techniques - From <www.eslabout.com>
 Whole Language, Whole Person - A Handbook of Language Teaching
Methodology
 <http://www.englishraven.com>

CHAPTER 4 Page 52
Task:
Define Classroom Management.
“Classroom management embraces all actions teachers take to maintain a

smooth, focused flow of activity for the purpose of nurturing learners’ academic
and personal development.”
It also refers to all the things a teacher does to organise students, space, time, and
materials so that learning can take place” (Wong, 2004).
Task:
What does Classroom Management entail?
 It is an effective discipline.
 It is prepared for a class.
 It motivates your students.
 It provides a safe, comfortable learning environment.
 It builds your students’ self esteem.
It is creative and imaginative in daily lessons.

In order for a teacher to create a stress-free environment that facilitates the
occurrence of the learning process, three main factors need to be put into
consideration. The process of learning is a process of acquiring skills and retaining
knowledge.
1. The Room:
Stress-Free Environment:
1. The creation of stress in a learning set up should be avoided in order to ensure
the achievement of aims in the set time limit in a smooth, sailing process.
2. The teacher may welcome the class in a friendly way and make interpersonal
connections in order to relax pupils. (Establish rapport.)
3. The physical environment of the classroom should give appropriate messages,
suggesting that active pursuit of challenge is encouraged.
4. Pupils can be given a degree of choice and a sense of control over what and
how they learn.
5. Questioning of pupils should be carefully gauged to avoid causing individuals
stress.
6. The atmosphere in the classroom should be one of respect between all learners
and teachers.

CHAPTER 4 Page 53
7. Resources should be readily available to allow for pupils to engage in

challenging tasks.
8. The teacher should recognise effort and show that it is valued.
9. The layout of the classroom should facilitate pupil discussion and collaboration,
but also where possible the opportunity for independent working.
Seating Arrangement:
Students' seating arrangements in a classroom can determine:
 Their attitude to each other and you.
 Your attitude to them.
 How they interact.
 Types of activities they can perform.
Even if the activities of the learning session do not require changing the seating
rearrangements, there are several reasons to do so:
1. Learners are given a new perspective on the activity by sitting in a different
part of the room.
2. They get better acquainted with their peers.
3. learners are not consistently “punished” by being at greater distances from the
screen or speakers.
4. Small cliques do not arise, there is nothing wrong with cliques but in some
cases they can become a problem by forcing their norms or agendas upon
the entire group.
Seating arrangements are a main part in a teacher's plan for classroom
management. Not only do the teachers need to consider the physical
arrangement of the room, but also the nature of the students involved. The
considerations in arranging the physical environment of the room is so that
teaching and learning can occur as efficiently as possible. The teacher needs to
be able to walk around the room without the students having to move their desks.
Teachers needs to take into account that students seated in the center or front of
the classroom tend to interact more frequently with the teacher and the number of
behavioral problems tend to increase as students sit farther from the teacher. Also,
students in the back and corners of the room are more likely to be off-task than
those close to the front or to the teacher's desk. There are many seating
arrangements that teachers can use, eight common arrangements are cluster,
rows, table rows, semi-circle, circles, U-shape, pairs and groups. The best
arrangement depends on the activity and the number and age of students.

CHAPTER 4 Page 54
Desks in Clusters:
Clusters consist of four or five desks pushed together so every desk is facing another
one. The fifth desk, if needed, would be put on the end of the group of four. The
classroom would have clusters scattered around, so each cluster would be far
enough apart that the students’ chairs would not hit each other. In this situation,
the teacher is free to walk around the room without bumping into students’ desks or
chairs and can work with the groups. The groups of students need to be thought
about before setting up. The students need to be able to work together. There will
have to be different levels of students at each group so that they can help each
other learn and grow. Clusters are very common in situations where there is a lot of
group learning and work. The desks together make it easy for all students in the
cluster to see each other and to hold discussions. In this situation, the philosophy of
the teacher is more collaborative learning. This lets students have hands-on
activities and learn by practising. The teacher shares and gives guidance and help
to students. This arrangement also, allows for students to do individual work at their
desk.
Desks in Rows:
Rows indicate a no-nonsense, academic focus. It immediately draws attention to
the teacher. If you have had problems keeping students focused on you, perhaps
arranging the desks formally will change their perception of your class. If you are
constantly moving desks into groups for activities, perhaps it is time to move into
rows.
Table Rows:
Table rows consist of long tables that are placed in rows that are perpendicular to
the front and back of the room. The students sit next and across from each other.
This set-up is typically found in science labs and writing workshops. It is a good
arrangement for group work and large group projects. The philosophy of the
teacher who would set up their classroom with table rows is probably collaborative
learning. They motivate their students by letting them work together, and it helps
students learn how to learn. During writing workshops, it is easy for students to turn to
a person and do a peer editing and share their work. In science labs, it is sensible to
have a large table where everyone can see the item and participate.
The problem with this set-up is that there are students that are at the end of the
tables at the back of the room that will not be able to see during the direct
instruction time. Also, it is hard for the teacher to see all the students and watch
their faces and behaviour. It allows the student for a lot of socialising and it is very
bad in a test situation. None of the students are facing the front of the room when
sitting at the table. It is hard to have class discussions because the students will not
hear each other without moving and looking around to see who is talking. Table
rows are good for situations where there is hardly any direct instruction and students
work together to figure out problems and activities. Usually this is found in the
middle grades in science classes.

CHAPTER 4 Page 55
Desks in Semi-Circles:
Semi-circle seating arrangement is when all the desks touch each other facing the
front of the room in a semi-circle shape. The teacher can easily see each student
and they can see him/ her and the instructional aids. The philosophies of the
teacher using this arrangement can be direct instruction, child-run or collaborative.
Each philosophy could be implemented into this classroom setting. Because all the
students can see each other; they can have debates and discussions amongst
themselves. The students can give ideas on how they want to do an activity and
the seating arrangement could probably accommodate the activity. Also,
because students all have clear vision to the board, direct instruction from the
teacher could be very common. The teacher would have full control over the
students. The teacher could easily walk around the room and monitor everybody's
work. The students would also be able to work together doing projects and
activities.
The semi-circle seating arrangement would not be recommended because the
teacher would have a hard time meeting with the students one-on-one. This is
because the seats are very close to each other. Also, the semi-circle would take up
almost the entire classroom so there is not much room for activities or conferencing
outside the desk area. Semi-circle desk arrangement can be used in all grade
classrooms and for all educational philosophies. This is because the teacher can
have classroom discussions and all the students can see and hear each other well.
The teacher can take a passive role and listen to the students and let them run the
class.
Also, in this arrangement the teacher can run the class giving the students step by
step instructions. All the students are facing the front of the room and have their
own space to work. Students can work easily together without much movement
because they are sitting directly next to each other which make hands-on-activities
and collaborative learning possible.
Desks in Circles:
Circles and/or squares indicate an open, sharing classroom. Students must face
one another and cannot hide. This can be nurturing to some students, terrifying to
others. If you are having trouble getting a smaller group to share and interact with
one another, a circle or square might help.
Desks in U-Shape:
U-shaped arranged desks indicate a stage. It allows for more students to sit in the
“front,” and can accommodate doubling or tripling the U-rows. It creates a
presentation-centred classroom, where the teacher or students present lessons to
the rest of the class. If you are focusing on presentations, this model works well. A
passageway at the vertex of the U is often helpful so you will not have to travel
around the perimeter of the classroom. Note that a U-shaped arrangement
requires a large space; if you have a small classroom with many students to
accommodate, forget it.

CHAPTER 4 Page 56
Desks in Pairs:
Pairs are tricky. They seem great from a teacher’s standpoint since students have
instant partners for activities, and the primary focus is still on the teacher. Students
are paired up with either students with similar abilities, or students with opposite
abilities, to complement and help one another. This theory, however, is often
detrimental to many students. Would you like to be paired up for the year with a
lazy co-worker? Or a co-worker who constantly outperforms you? Let’s face it;
schools must teach students to have tolerance and work together with many types
of people, but in the real world, you are rarely forced to work continuously one-on-
one with someone who makes you feel uncomfortable or inferior. Putting students
in this stressful one-on-one situation may not be as kind as it seems.
Desks in Groups:
Groups of three or four, however, work wonders. Adding more students to the mix
alleviate the tension that pairing creates. It creates both an atmosphere for
teacher-centred and student-centred activities. Students can be expected to be
silent for a short period, but realise that they will naturally want to interact with the
students in their small groups. You can also encourage competition between
groups by having them name their group and post group progress on specific
activities
2. Teacher
Attention Spread:
A class is made up of individuals who want to be listened to and/or addressed by
the teacher. Make sure that attention is equally distributed to the whole class. This
can be established through eye contact, voice projection, meta-language and
teacher’s movement around the classroom.
Eye Contact:
Teacher needs to establish eye contact with all students in order to:
- Notice their reactions.
- Establish rapport.
- Indicate the student that is being addressed or required to perform a task.
- Hold attention of students not addressed and encourage them to listen to those
talking.
- Indicate to inattentive students that you are taking notice.
- Replace naming students for example during a fast drill.
Voice Projection:
Voice alters naturally according to the activity, the size of the class, the room and
the other similar variables. Intonation also helps teacher in delivering messages to
students.
Teacher’s voice is an aid to:
- Gain attention.
- Announce changes in the lesson stages.
- Sustain students’ interest.
- Give gentle correction.
- Reprimand.

CHAPTER 4 Page 57
Body Language (Meta-language):

Not all language is produced through the vocals. In order to reduce TTT and hold
the Ss. attention for the longest possible span, the teacher can use facial
expressions and gestures in order to convey the message required to be
communicated to the students. However, it is a double-edged weapon that can
cause confusion rather than speed up and facilitate communication and learning.
Hence, the teacher needs to be careful that the body language she uses is both
clear and consistent.
Positioning and Movement:
Tell your learners the following;
- What type of activity it is.
- What each of the teacher’s and student’s role is.
- Who you are attending to and not attending to.
- Whether you expect a student to talk to you or not.
Rapport:
To establish rapport the teacher should:
- Show personal interest in the students and their progress.
- Attain the right professional manner.
- Respond and react to what the students say.
- Strike a balance between being firm and friendly.
Giving Instructions:
If students do not clearly understand what they are to do, they will not be able to
perform their task satisfactorily.
Instructions should be:
- Economic.
- Clear.
- Simple.
- Short.
- Graded and segmented to the level of the learners.
- Checked for comprehension.
The teacher should be:
- Firm.
- Directive.
- Good humored.
- Well positioned (voice, gestures and attention spread are vital).
- Consistent especially with low level classes i.e. use the same words/signals for
the same instruction.

CHAPTER 4 Page 58
Monitoring:
Monitoring what students are doing is as important as teaching. Teacher’s aim at
that stage would be to assess how well your students are performing the task and
evaluate particular language strengths and weaknesses. While performing a task;
whether individual, pair or group work, teacher passes by and checks on how
students are progressing without correcting any mistakes or lends a guiding hand to
faltering ones.
Correction Techniques:
Teachers are often afraid that students might "learn their mistakes". This idea derives
from views of language learning which were popular in the 1950s and 1960s; that
languages were learnt by repetition of correct forms until they become automatic.
Hence, repeating incorrect forms would be harmful as they would become
fossilised mistakes.
Nowadays, it is widely agreed that language is rather a system of rules that the
learner has to acquire, and that "trying out" language and making errors are
accepted as a natural part of the learning process such as when mastering chess,
learning a musical instrument or to cook, or when a baby learns to walk or talk.
Errors are a useful way of students showing what they have and have not learnt.
Therefore, instead of seeing errors negatively; as a sign of failure (by the student or
the teacher), they can be seen positively as an indication of what still needs to be
taught. Obviously, if we try to prevent students from making errors, we can never
find out what they do not know. The correct methods of correction help inform the
teacher about the class's general level.
Most teachers would agree that we need to correct some errors, to help students
learn the correct forms of the language. It also helps hold the class attention and
encourage the idea that students can learn from each other. However, this does
not mean that we have to correct students all the time. If we do, it might make
them unwilling or unable to say anything at all. We also need to make sure that we
do not inhibit students.; if we hurt their feelings or humiliate them, we lose rapport.
Thus, one of the techniques could be giving a chance for self-correction. In order
to achieve that the teachers might;
 Use facial expressions to show that there is a mistake.
 Use gestures to elicit correction.
 Repeat the sentence up to the mistake and stop to show where the mistake is.
E.g.: Student: Pavarotti is the singer who I like him.
Teacher: "Pavarotti is the singer I…like…?"
• Repeat the mistake in such a way as to highlight it.
E.g.: Teacher: "him?"
 Echoing.
E.g.: Teacher: Yes, he's got a good voice. Phil Collins is the singer I like best.

CHAPTER 4 Page 59
 Move from self-correction, if unsuccessful, to peer-correction.

Ask if anyone else in the class can help. If they can, go back to the original
student for a correct version.
• Give the statement form yourself as a last resort. If it comes to this, you know that
no one in your class was capable of producing the standard form, so the first
student did not really make a mistake in something that had been learnt. The
erring student was attempting to say something: that your students are not able
to use the structure yet. The idea of correction is therefore not really appropriate-
what is needed is more teaching.
3. Students:
Grouping:
Whether the students work individually, in pairs or groups is up to the teacher to
decide depending on the following factors:
- Stage within lesson plan.
- Aim of task.
- Time allotted to task.
- Number of students.
This variety in patterns serves in:
- Breaking the monotony of the lesson.
- Catering to multiple intelligences.
- Enhancing the sense of co-operation and team spirit.
- Allowing slow learners to catch up.
- Allotting the responsibility of aiding slow learners to faster ones.
However, teacher has to beware that instructions are clear and roles are allotted in
case of group work; among such roles would be:
-The Spokesperson: responsible for presenting the final product to the teacher and
other groups.
-The Secretary: responsible for taking down notes and designing layout of final
product.
-The Facilitator: collects all the material needed to produce the final product such
as crayons, markers, newspaper sheets, glue tack, etc.
-The Time Keeper: keeps record of how much time has elapsed and how much is
left.
Movement:
Way back in the early and mid twentieth century, it was believed that a disciplined
class does not move from their seats unless it is lunch or school dismissal time.
However, this has proven erroneous with the emergence of theories such as MI and
ALG. A healthy class is a noisy bustling one; as long as it is kept in more like a bee
hive in which individuals collaborate to produce food for thought and the soul than
a chaotic jungle in which the fittest survive. If the teacher sets clear rules and fair
disciplinary code from the beginning, he/she can allow a range of movement that
serves the aims of the lesson without causing anarchy.

CHAPTER 4 Page 60
Physical Classroom Conditions:

Seating Arrangements:
Where students sit in a classroom can determine:
- Their attitude to each other and you.
- Your attitude to them.
- How they interact.
- Types of activities they can perform.
Organising an Activity:
To organise an activity, the teacher should consider the following:
- A lead-in.
- Teacher instructs.
- Teacher initiates.
- Teacher organises feedback.
Giving Instructions:
If students do not clearly understand what they are to do, they will not be able to
perform their task satisfactorily.
Instructions should be:
- Economic.
- Clear.
- Short.
- Simple.
- Graded and segmented to the level of the learners.
- Checked for comprehension.
The teacher should be:
- Firm.
- Directive.
- Well-positioned (voice, gestures and attention spread are vital).
- Good-humoured.
- Consistent especially with low level classes, i.e. use the same words / signals for
the same instructions.
Setting Up Pair and Group Work:
The Importance of Pair and Group Work:
Pair and group work increase students' participation and language use and be
used for a number of activities whether listening, speaking, reading or writing.
Communicative efficiency rather than accuracy is the aim and the teacher's role is
that of the assessor, prompter and / or resource. During pair and group work
activities, students experience some degree of self-reliance. Familiarise students
with pair and group work at the beginning of a course as this enables you to
extend the range of activities being offered. Make sure that pre-work needed for
pair or group work has been done by you or the class. Possibly get one pair or
group to demonstrate. Do not let pair or group work activities go on for too long as
students soon get bored. No research has given an answer to the ideal
combinations for either pairs or groups since each has its strengths and weakness.

CHAPTER 4 Page 61
Pair Work:
It seems sensible to be selective about pairing if you are planning an activity which
is long and perhaps difficult for some students. However, random pairing which
occurs as a result of some seating is fine and has the advantage of not interrupting
the flow of the lesson.
Group Work:
Group work is more dynamic than pair work as there are more people to react with
and against in a group and therefore a greater demand on the students' ability to
cooperate closely with only one other person. It has the advantage of allowing
different groups of students to be doing different things at the same time in class.
Starting a Lesson:
When starting a lesson, it is important to consider the following strategies:
a. Punctuality is important and if possible be in the classroom before the students.
b. Before the start of a lesson is an ideal opportunity to socialise, give back
homework, discuss individual problems, and the way a student is approaching
his / her learning.
c. You need to supply a signal for the start of the lesson.
Establish lesson objectives whenever this is possible either orally or in writing on the
board.
Finishing a Lesson:
When finishing a lesson, it is important to consider the following strategies:
a. Timing is essential if the students are not to leave the class with the impression
that the lesson ended badly.
b. Allow time for homework and announcements before it is time for the students
to leave.
c. Clarify the finishing point, e.g. Close you books, Good, Well done etc. maintain
class attention through eye contact.
d. You can summarise and evaluate your lesson by asking the students what they
have learnt from today's lesson.
e. Make sure you say good bye naturally, it is a good opportunity for the students
to learn how to do it.
Remember that although you influence what happens in the class, it is often more
a case of 'managing learning' than teaching.

CHAPTER 5 Page 63
The Contents of a Lesson:

The length of a lesson varies enormously from one institution to another; from 45
minutes to 2 or more hours. Planning the lesson is vital in order to ensure that time is
not wasted and the learners receive the maximum benefit from the work arranged.
It is also very important to plan so that the bell ringing for the end of the lesson does
not interrupt activities. The learners will feel a sense of frustration and under-
achievement if this happens. Planning will make sure that the teacher has all the
necessary equipment at hand to make the lesson effective. It can be disappointing
for the teacher to discover that she/he could have got point over much better if
not for the lack of variety in the activities they do in class, especially young learners
or long classes. If they always do the same type of activity every lesson as well they
will soon become bored and lose concentration and motivation (as will the
teacher). The lesson should be planned with teacher domination at a minimum. This
can be seen before the lesson takes place on any lesson plan and action taken to
include more learner participation.
When considering writing a lesson plan there are certain elements which need to
be considered. Most lesson plan formats will have some or all of the following:
 Name of the teacher
 Name of the class
 Date
 Level of learners
 Number of learners
 Time of lesson
 Aims of lesson - structural and skills areas
 Assumptions made - relevant pre-knowledge of learners
 Anticipated problem areas: e.g. pronunciation/concept/mother-tongue
interference, etc.
 Materials needed
 Stages
 Classroom management: seating arrangements/ pairing/grouping, etc.
 Approximate timing for each stage
 Board plans
 Interaction

CHAPTER 5 Page 64
Figure 1: Contents of a Lesson Plan

Teacher: Class: Level: Time:
Number of Students:
Aim (structural):
Aim (skills area):
Assumptions / Problem Areas:
Classroom Management:
Materials / Aids:
Stage:
Board Work:
Interaction:
Time:
Comments:
Details of lesson go here:
Lesson Plan Procedures:

One of the primary roles that you will perform as a teacher is that of designer and
implementer of instruction. Teachers at every level prepare plans that aid in the
organisation and delivery of their daily lessons. These plans vary widely in the style
and degree of specificity. Some instructors prefer to construct elaborate, detailed
and impeccably typed outlines; others rely on the briefest of notes handwritten on
scratch pads or on the backs of discarded envelopes. Regardless of the format, all
teachers need to make wise decisions about the strategies and methods they will
employ to help students move systematically toward learner goals.
Teachers need more than a vague, or even a precise, notion of educational goals
and objectives to be able to sequence these objectives or to be proficient in the
skills and knowledge of a particular discipline. The effective teacher also needs to
develop a plan to provide direction toward the attainment of the selected
objectives. The more organised a teacher is, the more effective the teaching, and
thus the learning, is. Writing daily lesson plans is a large part of being organised.
Several lesson plan outlines will be presented. You as a teacher will probably begin
by choosing a desirable outline and sticking fairly close to it. Planning and
classroom delivery innovations usually come once you are in the classroom with
your own set of learners, have developed your own instructional resources, and
have experimented with various strategies. Although fundamental lesson planning
elements tend to remain unchanged, their basic formula is always modified to suit
the individual teacher's lesson preparation or style of presentation.

CHAPTER 5 Page 65
The lesson plan is a dreaded part of instruction that most teachers detest. It
nevertheless provides a guide for managing the learning environment and is
essential if a substitute teacher is to be effective and efficient. Three stages of
lesson planning follow:
Stage 1: Pre-Lesson Preparation:
1. Goals
2. Content
3. Student entry level
Stage 2: Lesson Planning and Implementation:
1. Unit title
2. Instructional goals
3. Objectives
4. Rationale
5. Content
6. Instructional procedures
7. Evaluation procedures
8. Materials
Stage 3: Post-Lesson Activities: lesson evaluation and revision
Lesson planning involves much more than making arbitrary decisions about "what
I'm going to teach today." Many activities precede the process of designing and
implementing a lesson plan. Similarly, the job of systematic lesson planning is not
complete until after the instructor has assessed both the learner's attainment of the
anticipated outcomes and effectiveness of the lesson in leading learners to these
outcomes.
There are many approaches to lesson planning. However, there are basic elements
that should be included when planning any lesson. Finally, even teachers who
develop highly structured and detailed plans rarely adhere to them in lock-step
fashion. Such rigidity would probably hinder, rather than help, the teaching-
learning process. The elements of your lesson plan should be thought of as guiding
principles to be applied as aids, but not blueprints, to systematic instruction. Precise
preparation must allow for flexible delivery. During actual classroom interaction, the
instructor needs to make adaptations and to add artistry to each lesson plan and
classroom delivery.
Generic Form:
This open form includes the above framework. It does have a suggested sequence
of instructional procedures which corresponds more closely to direct instruction:
1. Focusing event (something to get the students' attention)
2. Teaching procedures (methods you will use)
3. Formative check (progress checks throughout the lesson)
4. Student Participation (how you will get the students to participate)
5. Closure (how you will end the lesson)

CHAPTER 5 Page 66
Figure 2: Generic Lesson Plan Form: A Daily Lesson Plan
Course Title: Date: Lesson Number:

Instructor: Unit: Specific Topic:
Instructional Goal:
(outcome that students would be able to demonstrate upon completion of the entire
unit)
Performance Objective: (use an action verb in a description of a measurable outcome)
Rationale: (brief justification – why you feel the student need to learn this topic)
Lesson Content: (what is to be taught)
Instructional Procedures:
Focusing event (something to get the students' attention)
Teaching procedures (method you will use)
Formative check (progress checks throughout the lesson)
Student participation (how you will get the students to participate)
Closure (how you will end the lesson)
Evaluation Procedures: (how you will measure outcomes to determine if the material
has been learned)
Materials and Aids: (what you will need in order to teach this lesson)
Honolulu Community College:
<http://edweb.sdsu.edu/Courses/EDTEC470/sections/F02-10/lesson_planning.htm>
Presentation, Practice, and Production (PPP) Lesson:

While this is not the only way to structure an ESL lesson plan, it is perhaps the most
commonly taught and used format. The main idea behind this is that it gives
students the opportunity to learn something in context, have it modeled by the
teacher, practise it in a controlled way and then practise it freely. If you were to
look at a visual of this structure, you would see that it fits neatly into the shape of a
pyramid, with the Presentation taking up the least amount of space at the top, and
the Production part taking up the most amount of space at the bottom.
Figure 3:

CHAPTER 5 Page 67
So What Actually Happens in Each phase of a PPP Lesson?

Presentation: Teacher sets the context for the students. Rules for the topic might be given
from the context. The point is to make the students understand the language item,
vocabulary set, situation, or other language focus of the class.
Practice: Students begin to use what the teacher presented in the first part by using drills
that go from controlled to less controlled. These can be written or oral drills.
Production: Teacher allows students to use what they learned in an uncontrolled way
through role-plays, discussions, language games, etc. Teacher monitors students from a
distance so that students can feel free to try out what they have learned. After the activity,
the teacher gives feedback to the students about common errors and also on the correct
language that was used.
Task-Based Learning (TBL) Lesson:

In addition to PPP, Task-Based Learning (TBL) is another attractive approach to teaching.
While the definition of TBL has not been agreed upon, it can generally be said that TBL
methodologies "share a common idea: giving learners to transact, rather than items to
learn, provides an environment which best promotes the language learning
process" (Foster, 1999).
The rationale behind this approach is that it fosters learning in a "natural" environment
through discovery. It involves hypothesis making, interaction, and negotiation of meaning,
which many linguists would say are important factors for learning a language.
So What actually Happens in Each Phase of a TBL Lesson?

First, it is important to understand what constitutes a task. In TBL, a task is a goal-oriented
activity with a clear purpose. It should achieve an outcome and create a final product.
Some examples include: listing, ordering and sorting, comparing, problem-solving, sharing
personal experiences, and creative tasks.
As in PPP, there are three main phases in a TBL lesson. They include the pre-task phase, the
task cycle and language focus.
In the pre-task phase, there is an introduction to the topic and the task, exposure to real
language (which could include tape recordings of native speakers completing the same
task), and the use of texts and activities involving the texts.
In the task cycle phase, a task is completed, then students are asked to engage in a
'planning' stage to prepare for reporting on how they completed the task. During the
planning stage, students can draft and rehearse what they want to say, with the help of
the teacher. In the reporting stage, students report on the task, while others listen and give
comments. There is no error-correction during the task cycle phase.
The final phase is the language focus, where students analyse language and practise it.
Based on the texts that students used in the first phase, the teacher will set some language-
focused tasks. Here, there is a focus on form.
Authentic Use, Restricted Use, and Clarification and Focus (ARC) Lesson:
Another more modern approach is the “ARC” which seems to fit in more with what is going
on in contemporary classroom. "ARC" is a model for analysing and understanding the
structure of any ESL lesson. "ARC" stands for "Authentic Use," "Restricted Use," and
"Clarification and Focus." These categories form a pretty all inclusive partition of all possible
language teaching activities. The main difference between the PPP approach and ARC is
that ARC can be carried out in any order that the teacher deems appropriate.

CHAPTER 5 Page 68
So What Actually Happens in Each Phase of an ACR Lesson?

The ARC model breaks a lesson down into a sequence of these three types of activities. For
example, a CRRA lesson consists of the following sequence of activity types:
1. Clarification and Focus;
2. Restricted Use;
3. Restricted Use;
4. Authentic Use.
Such a lesson might begin with examples of how to make and respond to polite requests,
e.g. A: "Would you happen to have a ....?" B: "I'm sorry ....." (1) The students would then
practise these patterns verbally in pairs making requests for different items or actions (2). This
would be followed by the students individually writing their own dialogues of two or three
conversational turns using the pattern (3). The use of language is restricted in step (3)
because students must use the sentence patterns. However, they are free to create their
own situations in which these patterns are used. Finally, they go around the classroom
practising the dialogues they have written with other students (4). The use of language in
step (4) is authentic use because each student is confronted with new unpredictable
situations as he/she interacts with other students. The student is forced to improvise a bit
when he/she responds to the polite requests.
CRRA lessons emphasise the deduction or generation of new sentences from a pattern
sentence. Students are given a pattern sentence (1) and they deduce new sentences from
it (2, 3). It has been referred to as a "Teach-Test" type of lesson plan. It is very similar to the
PPP model (Present-Practice-Produce).
An RCR type of lesson has more of an inductive pattern to it. It would consist of the following
sequence of activity types: 1. Restricted Use; 2. Clarification and Focus; 3. Restricted Use.
Such a lesson might begin with a series of tape recorded polite requests, the students
having to identify which are appropriate and which are inappropriate (1). The teacher then
goes around the class noting down which mistakes were common and offers an
explanation as to why those choices are wrong (2). A second set of similar tape recorded
polite requests are played and the students are asked to identify which are appropriate (3).
This time they are equipped with the explanation given in step (2) which should help them
avoid mistakes. This type of lesson has a sort of feedback or review cycle built into it and has
been referred to as a "Test-Teach-Test" type of lesson.
The same type of lesson might be done with an even more inductive, more open ended,
communicative activity (an Authentic use type activity) where the student has more
opportunity to experiment with language of his own creation. The lesson pattern would then
be ACA consisting of the following sequence of activity types: 1. Authentic Use; 2.
Clarification and Focus; 3. Authentic Use. This lesson type also has a feedback or review
cycle built into it.
The ARC model also has potential for helping teachers design "component"-like lessons that
address particular teaching points (grammatical, lexical, functional/pragmatic) that can be
"plugged into" appropriate places in the syllabus. The ARC model could help teachers
isolate exactly what goes into a successful lesson and incorporate an already existing lesson
into a new lesson that addresses new teaching points. This idea is basically just an extension
of what teachers already do in their everyday lesson preparation, cutting, pasting,
adapting, and extending activities and authentic texts from various sources into their own
new (but highly derivative) material.

CHAPTER 5 Page 69
Following is a list which categorises activity types into three main sections;
Authentic Use, Restricted Use and Clarification and Focus:
1. Authentic use for:
- meaning
- communications
- fluency
- real-life
- pleasure
Example Activities:
Listening
- conversations
- radio, TV
- narratives
Speaking
- communicative activities
- discussions
- conversations
- role plays
Reading
- newspaper or magazine articles
- short stories, novels
- leaflets, notices, ads
Writing
- stories
- poems
- essays
2. Restricted use for:
- form
- practice
- accuracy
- testing
- display
Example Activities:
Listening
- discrete sounds
- words
- sentences
- course-book tasks
- examples from course-books

CHAPTER 5 Page 70
Speaking
- drills
- language practice activities
- elicited dialogues
- jazz chants, poems, texts
Reading
- examples
- course-book texts
- exercises
- stories
Writing
- copying
- exercises
- guided writing
3. Clarification and Focus
What Happens?
- I tell you
- I show you
- I help you find out for yourself
- You find out for yourself
Tools and Techniques:
 rules
 examples
 reference information
 diagrams, timelines
 substitution tables
 translation
 questions about meaning
 questions about form
 questions about use
 problems and puzzles
 error analysis
 sentence analysis
 explanations, lectures
 demonstrations
 gestures, mime
 pictures, flashcards, visual aids
 contexts and situations
 repetition
 elicitation
 voice, intonation, silence
 discussion
 personalisation
 models, toys, realia

CHAPTER 5 Page 71
Getting Feedback:
To sum up this chapter, we need to stress the fact that there is no fixed lesson plan.
A good teacher will look back at their lessons and try to improve constantly. All
teachers need to do this, no matter whether they have taught for one week or
twenty years. After the lesson, things to think about in general are whether the
learners achieved the aim, were they all actively involved, was the teacher talk
time appropriate and what could the teacher learn that can be used to improve
the next lesson. Many teachers have personal aims such as how they can
encourage learner autonomy or better correcting. By reflecting on the taught
lessen, teachers would be able to amend their activities and ultimately produce a
more effective lesson plan.
References:
The material in this section is based on "Learning Teaching: A Guidebook for English
Language Teachers" by Jim Scrivener (Heinemann, 1994), pp 133-138 and ESL
lesson plans <http://www.esl-lesson-plan.com/archives/2007/05/
teacher_development>

CHAPTER 6 Page 73
Task:
Mention some problems associated with grammar teaching in general.
Although grammar instruction has recently been associated with contextual

teaching, we need to go beyond this movement to bring grammar instruction fully
to life and to make it purposeful and communicative.
Some problems related to teaching grammar are;
- Direct grammar instruction is still very common.
- Contextual instructional techniques are not readily accessible to practitioners.
- In most cases, grammar instruction is not integrated into the four skills but given in
isolation.
- Mostly it is teachers that formulate grammar rules. Grammar rules will be clearer
and be remembered better when students formulate them themselves
(inductive learning) than when teachers formulate them (deductive learning).
- Learners need repeated input of a grammar item. Just one grammar
presentation is not enough.
- Learners should not be overwhelmed with linguistic terminology (Brown, 2001).
- Grammar should be taught in digestible segments bearing the cognitive process
in mind.
Traditional grammar teaching, for instance, tends to cover the following points in
the same lesson:
 The passive voice with all the tenses,
 All the uses of indirect speech (i.e. reporting statements, negative statements,
question forms, imperatives, requests, time expressions, etc.)
All forms of a structure (i.e. statements, negative statements, questions, exceptions,
etc).
Task:
How could we present grammar in a communicative way?
To introduce grammar communicatively, teachers need to treat teaching

grammar like teaching the four skills. The lesson needs to be divided into pre-, while-
and post-stages in an attempt to provide integrated learning environments.
In the pre-grammar stage, the teacher should bring grammar instruction to life,
stimulate interest in the topic, and raise awareness by providing a reason for
learning.
The while-grammar stage should facilitate noticing of the new grammar point, and
provide meaningful input through contextual examples, pictures, and texts.

CHAPTER 6 Page 74
The post-grammar stage should provide an opportunity to put grammar to use, and
relate grammar instruction to real life situations. The main distinction between the
while- and post-stages is that the while-stage involves the clarification of
the meaning, whereas the post-stage focuses on the productive aspects of the
new structure.
Task:
Compare between a traditional grammar lesson and an integrated grammar lesson
Traditional grammar lesson Integrated grammar lesson
Steps of an Integrated Grammar Lesson:

Traditional grammar teaching starts with the teacher's statement of the
grammatical point on the board. Integrated grammar teaching is a unique and an
authentic approach because it implements the pre-, while- and post-stages.
The application of pre-, while- and post-stages into teaching grammar is shown
below in two sample grammar lessons.
Sample Grammar Lesson 1: (Used to)
1. Pre-Grammar:
- The teacher discusses the topic "changes in people over the years".
- The teacher shows two pictures of a woman. One picture was taken 20 years
ago and the other one is new. The old picture shows her playing the guitar while
the new one displays her painting pictures. The teacher then asks them to
compare the two pictures.
2. While-Grammar:
This stage provides a context for input generation and an opportunity to notice the
new grammatical structure. The teacher tells students they are going to learn a
new structure (for the purpose of noticing) but does not mention the name
of structure (for motivational purposes).
- The teacher makes a transition from the context created in 1b to the grammatical
point by showing the same pictures and telling the picture differences with "used
to" and "simple present tense" (i.e. "She used to play the guitar as a hobby, but
now she doesn't, she paints pictures as a hobby” , etc).
- The teacher creates other contexts for the teaching of grammatical point through
some other picture comparisons, discussions, stories, or reading/listening texts.
- The teacher asks some clarification check questions to ensure that the meaning is
clear. Some examples are:
 Did she often play the guitar in the past? /Does she play the guitar now?
 Did she often paint pictures in the past? /Does she paint pictures now?
 Did she have long hair in the past? /Does she have long hair now?

CHAPTER 6 Page 75
- The teacher asks the students to formulate the rule on the board for the given
sentence providing help if needed.
- She used to play the guitar.
(S + Used to + V 1)
Note:
The while-stage may involve production of the new structure through some
questions about the pictures. In this case, however, the purpose is to confirm
whether the meaning has been clarified.
3. Post-Grammar:
Brainstorming:
The teacher asks students to think back to when they were children. Then he/she
asks the following questions: "What are the differences and similarities between your
life then and now? Think about where you lived, your likes/dislikes, your holidays
and your family, and fill in the following lines with appropriate sentences".
Your life as a child...
________________________________________
________________________________________
________________________________________
Your present life…
________________________________________
________________________________________
________________________________________
Role-Play:
The teacher forms pairs of students and gives a role play to each student. The role
playing students are supposed to be old friends meeting after a long time. They are
supposed to communicate and note the differences in each using either their
imagination or the role-play cues.
Writing:
The teacher asks students to write a story about the following topic for the school
magazine.
Imagine that you have been asleep from 2007 till 2050. You have just woken up to
be shocked about everything around you. Compare your old and new lives and
write your story using "used to".
Sample Grammar Lesson 2: The Present Perfect Passive Voice
Pre-Grammar Stage:
First, the teacher has a discussion on burglaries. Following this discussion, the
teacher shows a picture of a living room and says: "Today, a burglar has broken into
this room. What do you think he has taken?" (The teacher tries to elicit responses
such as he has taken the lap-top; he has stolen the jewellery, etc.)

CHAPTER 6 Page 76
While-Grammar Stage:
The teacher shows a different picture of the same living room and turns attention to
the missing items and says the following:
"The lap-top computer has been taken from the room.
The jewellery has been stolen.
The small TV has been taken as well.
The picture on the wall has been taken, too".
The teacher asks questions to elicit the passive voice structure. Following this,
the teacher asks clarification check questions such as:
What is the difference between "the burglar has stolen the jewellery", and "the
jewellery has been stolen"? When do you think we need the second structure?
The teacher asks the students to formulate the rule on the board.
Alternatively, or additionally, the context can be created through a reading text
written in the present perfect passive voice.
Post-Grammar Stage:
The teacher gives the following hand-out to be filled out and asks students to walk
around and ask questions to the class members.
Find Someone Class Members Name
Who has been blamed for something he/she hasn't
done?
Who has been disappointed by a close friend?
Who has been told some good news lately?
Who has been told some bad news lately?
Who has been abandoned by his/her girlfriend/

boyfriend?
Who has been misunderstood lately?
Who has been forgiven by an old friend recently?
Who has been given a present today?

CHAPTER 6 Page 77
Role-Play:
1. The teacher forms pairs of students and gives a role play to each student. One
of the pairs holds the names of the cities and their weather reports, the other
holds information about some football matches and the name of the cities
where they are being held. They will exchange the information and find out
which football matches have been cancelled.
The teacher assigns an incomplete writing task and asks them to complete it
using some cue words and the present perfect passive tense.
2. Your wedding is very soon, but most of the arrangements have not been made
yet. Write a complaint letter to the wedding specialist using these clues:
wedding invitations, wedding dress, wedding party, wedding cake, wedding
photographer, honeymoon, limousine cars.
Dear wedding specialist,
I visited your office today but you were out. I have seen that
most of the wedding arrangements have not yet been made.
To begin with, ….…
Conclusion:
During grammar instruction, teachers should provide meaningful input through
context and provide an opportunity to put grammar to use, and relate grammar
instruction to real life situations. This is best achieved if grammar instruction is treated
in the same way as the teaching of the four skills which involves smooth and
organised transitions of pre-, while- and post- grammar stages.
References:
 Brown, H. D. (2001). Teaching by principles. An interactive approach to
language teaching pedagogy. Newyork: Longman
 Clandfield, L. (n.d). Task-based grammar teaching. Retrieved 15th July 2007,
from <http://onestopenglish.com/english_grammar/grammar_task_based.htm>
 Mora, J. K. (2003). Major components of the study of grammar and
syntax: Teaching grammar in context. Retrieved 15th July 2007, <from http://
coe.sdsu.edu/people/jmora/grammar.htm>
 Tennant, A. (n.d). Using the discovery technique for teaching grammar.
Retrieved 15th July 2007, from <http://onestopenglish.com/english_grammar/
grammar_discovery_technique.htm>
 Weaver, C. (1996). Teaching grammar in context. Portsmouth, NH: Boynton/
Cook Publishers, Inc.

CHAPTER 7 Page 79
Task:
What words should we teach?
We do not have time to teach all the words, nor do we have time to look at many
more than a few words in each class. This is extremely important because it means
that EVERYTHING we do as vocabulary teachers has to be focused on:
a. Building the learner's 'start up' or initial vocabulary.
b. Developing the learner's understanding of what learning words means.
c. Showing the learner how to learn the words most effectively.
Which Words?
Research shows that learners need about 3000 'word families' to be good at English.
(A 'word family' is a group of words that share the same meaning such as 'help',
'helping' 'helped 'helpless' etc.). Teachers should concentrate on the most frequent
and useful words first, as it is these words the learners will meet very often. Many
teachers focus on rarer words assuming that the basic words like 'get', 'make' and
'bring' are known. But it is these words which are among the most troublesome, with
their multiple meanings and idiomatic uses. Therefore, teachers and learners should
work very hard on the highly frequent words.
How Should Learners Learn Vocabulary?
The most fundamental idea that should underlie any method is that 'the most
important vocabulary to work on is that the learners learned yesterday'. The nature
of human memory dictates that vocabulary will probably be forgotten, especially if
the word has just been met. Vocabulary loss happens because it is at the initial
stage of word learning that word knowledge is so fragile. This means that words and
phrases need to be recycled often to cement them in memory. Introducing a word
and not recycling or revisiting it, means that it is highly likely that it will be forgotten.
Course-books are usually very bad at recycling, so the teacher must work out ways
to recycle the vocabulary that is introduced in the course book.
How to Teach Vocabulary?
Effective learning of a foreign or a second language involves to a great extent
learning new vocabulary words. Adults and adolescents need between ten and
sixteen encounters with a new word before they can put it in their long term
memories. This has implications for vocabulary practice. Words, chunks and
grammatical structures need to be spread out and built up from noticing, to
recognition to production.
From Passive to Active Production:

There is a gradual progression in vocabulary learning. Learners usually start by
noticing then recognising a word before they are able to produce it.

CHAPTER 7 Page 80
There are Four Stages in the Acquisition of New Vocabulary:

 The learner notices the new word (with help).
 The learner learns to recognise it (with help).
 The learner recognises it on his/her own.
 The learner can recognise and produce it.
Ways to Make Vocabulary Learning Interesting:

Students need to be motivated to learn vocabulary constantly. Therefore, it is
important that the review is as interesting as possible in terms of the types of
exercises, strategies and activities. The visual element is equally important. Here are
some of the activities that are used in EFL classes. They are, by no means
exhaustive.
Stage 1: Noticing the Word: the Visual Element
 Flashcards
 Pictures
Stage 2: Recognition
 True/false
 Categorise the words
 Matching (this category is huge with both open and closed types of exercises).
Matching the word to its definition, adjectives and nouns, verbs and adverbs,
word to the adjectives and nouns, verbs and adverbs, word to the picture,
match two words that go together.
 Multiple choices
 Drawing the word
 Bingo games
 Circle the word you hear
Stage 3: Production
 Dictation
 Answering questions
 Picture description
 Miming
 vocabulary charades
Final Words: Points to Consider
 Try to have as many success-oriented activities that are geared to the age
group you teach.
 Gradually progress from one stage to another but vary the activities within
each stage.
 Consider appealing to the various multiple intelligences. The visual element in
learning is particular important - for all age groups but particularly important
for younger children.

CHAPTER 7 Page 81
Presenting New Words:

 Before reading this section, answer the following task
Task:
Think of ways to present new words.
Different teachers have different ways to present new words.

Some suggestions:
 Provide creative examples.
 Elicit meaning from the students before telling them.
 Use related words such as synonyms, antonyms etc. to show the meaning.
 Think about how to check students’ understanding.
 Relate the new word(s) to real life context(s).
 Predict possible misunderstanding or confusion.
Task:
Which of the two following techniques is more effective? Why?
Teacher A:
a. Wrote “grumble” on the blackboard.
b. Said “grumble means to complain about someone or something in an
annoyed way”.
c. Translated the word into the students’ native language.
d. Gave more examples (sentences) for the students to translate into their
native language.
Teacher B:
 Teacher B said “some people grumble about everything. For example, they
grumbled about the weather. If it is sunny, they say it is too hot. If it is cool, they
say it is too cold. They are never happy with the weather. They always grumble
about the weather”.
 Then set out to check the students’ understanding by asking “So what does
‘grumble’ mean?”
Task:
Can you think of other ways to present new words?

CHAPTER 7 Page 82
Some More Suggested Ways:

 Matching
 Mind maps
 Word relations
 (Synonyms, opposites, etc.)
 Explanation
 Pictogram
 Context
 Dictionaries
 Different exercises (e.g., gap-filling, MCQ, etc.)
 Use pictures, diagrams and maps to show the meaning
 Use realia (plural of realis)
 Use pantomimes, gestures or actions
 Use lexical sets; e.g. cook, fry, boil, bake, grill, roast
 Translate and exemplify, esp. with technical or abstract words
 Use word formation rules and common affixes (pre-fixation & suffixation) e.g.
deduction, induction.
You need to choose your presentation technique according to the words you
teach, since not every new word can be presented using each technique. For
example, if the word is a small house hold object, like a needle, you can bring a
needle into class; if the word is a concept, such as cruelty, you can not use realia
to teach the word and so using a situation or a story would be more appropriate.
Task:
What are the different instructional methods used in presenting vocabulary?
Instructional Methods for Vocabulary:

Following is a simplified taxonomy of the methods used in vocabulary instruction.
The methods identified are: direct instruction, indirect instruction, multimedia
methods of instruction, capacity methods of instruction and association methods of
instruction. Each of the methods is further discussed in the following table.

CHAPTER 7 Page 83
Method Definition Example Use

Direct Instruction Students are given Pre-teaching of Before
definitions or other vocabulary prior to reading
attributes of words to reading a selection.
be learned
Indirect Instruction Students are exposed Students reading During

to words or given independently at reading
opportunities to read a home, during free
variety of texts. time, after
completing an
assignment, etc.
Multimedia Vocabulary is taught Use of ASL, During

Methods of through a number of capitalising on and After
Instruction modalities encoding in a tactile reading
medium. Semantic
maps, graphic
representations,
hypertext, computer
assisted instruction
Capacity Attempts to reduce the Flash cards, Daily Before

Methods of cognitive capacity vocabulary drills and After
Instruction devoted to reading reading
activities by practising
them to make them
more automatic –
Repeated exposure to
words for automatic
recognition and use
Association Students make Keyword method Before,

Methods of connections by during
Instruction associating a new word and after
with something they reading
know

CHAPTER 7 Page 84
Semantic Mapping:
Semantic Mapping involves a web-like graphic display. To begin instruction,
students are presented with a concept that is central to understanding a selection
or subject. They then brainstorm or freely associate words that are related to that
concept. As students brainstorm, the teacher writes their suggestions on the board,
adding words they need to learn.
Teaching Word Parts:

Teaching students to recognise and use information from word parts such as
prefixes, suffixes, and roots can be an especially effective word-learning strategy
for use with content area texts. These texts can contain many words that are
derived from the same word parts. Although words such as misread,
interdependent, and substandard can often be figured out from context,
decomposing such words into known parts like mis-, read, inter-, depend, and so
forth, not only makes the words themselves more memorable, but, in combination
with sentence context, may be a useful strategy in determining the meaning of
unknown words.

CHAPTER 7 Page 85
The Most Frequent Affixes in Printed School English:
Consolidating Vocabulary:
 Since learning is subject to forgetting, it is normal that we hear students complain
that they keep learning and forgetting, especially when they do not understand
the meaning of the vocabulary item.
 When students study vocabulary individually, very often it is rote learning.
 Group learning through various activities and under the teacher’s supervision can
be more fun and effective.

CHAPTER 7 Page 86
Some Vocabulary Consolidation Activities:

 Labelling. Use pictures. Write down the names.
 Spotting the Differences. Use pair work and pictures.
 Describing and Drawing. Use pair work. One describes while the other draws.
 Playing a Game. Show the students some words/objects, and then ask: “What
did you see just now?”
 Using Word Thermometers. For degrees in size, speed, age, distance, emotion,
etc.
 Using Word Series. E.g. cutlery: knife, fork, spoon
 Word Association. The teacher says “travelling”, and then the students write
some words connected with travelling.
 Odd One Out. E.g. cheese, eggs, oranges, bread, soap, meat
 Synonyms and Antonyms
 Using Word Categories
 Using Word Net-Work
 Word Bingo
How to Play Bingo?

 Suppose you have learned the following words that are related to shopping:
 shopper, customer, seller, sale, shop, store, market, supermarket, discount,
goods, price, sell, bargain, buy, pay, receipt.
 Make a table of nine blocks. Write nine words of shopping in the table, then
listen to me. When you hear the word that you have written, cross it out in your
table. e.g.:
 Now make a table of nine blocks. Write nine words of shopping in the table,
then listen to me. When you hear the word that you have written, cross it out in
your table. e.g.:
Seller Market Shop
Price Buy Receipt
Shopper Salary Supermarket
 If you have crossed out all the nine words in your table, say “Bingo!” If you are
the first one to say “Bingo!” in your group, you are the winner.

CHAPTER 7 Page 87
Look at the following task and decide which vocabulary consolidation activity is it?
A. ____________
Transport: , , ________ _
Vehicles: , , _______ _
Furniture: , , _________
Buildings: , , ______ ___
B. _____________
C. ____________
full jumper optimistic go on choose dirty
awake select wait a minute pullover pessimistic rude
clean continue hang on empty asleep lazy
Awful hard-working impolite terrible thin thick
D. ___________
Put the word in the suitable place.
toothpaste, TV, alarm clock, stove, video, towel, cupboard, sofa, dressing table,
wash-basin, slippers, mirror, shower.

CHAPTER 7 Page 88
E. ______________
Answers:
a. Using word series
b. Using word thermometers
c. Synonyms and antonyms
d. Using word net-work
e. Using word categories
References:
Tasks for teacher education: a reflective approach, Rosie Tanner and Catherine
Green, Longman, 2000
<http://www1.harenet.ne.jp/~waring/papers/eltnews.html>
<sfs.scnu.edu.cn/chendm1/PPT/Unit%207.ppt>

CHAPTER 8 Page 91
1. Selection and Use of Aids:

Task:
What are classroom aids?
Aids are the resources and equipment available to us in the classroom, as well as
the resources we can bring into the classroom. They include cassette recorders,
CD players, video recorders and overhead projectors (i.e. equipment with a light in
it that can make images appear larger on a screen), visual aids (pictures that can
help learners understand), realia and the teacher himself/herself. We select and
use aids by thinking carefully about the main aims and the subsidiary aims of a
lesson, and then choosing the most appropriate ones.
Task:
Look at the following list of classroom equipment. What other teaching purposes
can you think of for each item?
 blackboard/Whiteboard
 overhead projectors OHP
 cassette recorders/CD players
 video recorders
 computer
 language laboratory
Classroom Equipment Main Teaching Purpose
Blackboard/Whiteboard Writing up planned vocabulary, grammar

examples and explanations
Overhead projectors OHP Displaying prepared exercises on

transparencies (plastic sheets)
Cassette recorders/CD players Listening practice
Video recorders Listening practice with added visual infor-

mation
Computer Grammar exercises
Language laboratory Grammar drills

CHAPTER 8 Page 92
All these aids can be used for many different purposes. Some examples of these
purposes are;
Blackboard/ White Board Video Recorder

 Writing words and ideas that come up  For information gap tasks (with one learner viewing
during the lesson. and one just listening.)
 Drawing or displaying pictures.  Viewing without sound and guessing the language.
 Building up ideas in-diagrams, word  Pausing and predicting the language (i.e. saying
maps, etc. what you think is coming next.)
 For learners to write answers.  With a camera, filming learners’ performance.
 For whole-class compositions.
Overhead Projector Computer

 Displaying results of group work.  Narrative building with a word processor.
 Building up information by putting  Supplementary materials for course-books.
one.  Online language tests.
 Transparency on top of another  Using online dictionaries.
 Masking/ Unmasking techniques  Using CD-ROMs.
covering up or gradually uncovering  E-Mail exchanges.
parts of the transparency.  Online Communication (chatting).
 Displaying pictures and diagrams on  Online newspapers and magazines.
photocopiable transparencies.  Project work using the Internet.
Cassette Recorder Language Laboratory

 Presenting new language in dialogues  Pronunciation practice.
and stories.  Extensive listening.
 Giving models for pronunciation  Monitoring and giving feedback to individual.
practice. learners.
 Recording learners’ oral performance.  Developing speaking skills.
 Listening for pleasure.
Other aids are realia, flashcards (cards small enough to hold up one after another
with simple drawings or single words or phrases on them), puppets (models of
people or animals that you can move by putting your hand inside them), charts
(diagrams that show information) and the teacher.
Task:
What different uses can you think of for these aids?

CHAPTER 8 Page 93
Here Are Some of the Most Important Uses:

Flash Cards:
Like realia, flashcards can be used for teaching individual words or as prompts for
practising grammatical structures.
Puppets:
Puppets are an excellent resource for teaching young learners. For example, we
can introduce new language in dialogues between pairs of puppets (or between
one puppet and the teacher). Children can also make their own simple puppets.
Charts:
Posters and wall charts (drawings or graphs that can be put on the wall of a
classroom) can be used to display larger, more detailed pictures, or a series of
pictures telling a story or showing related objects in a lexical set. A phonemic chart
shows the phonemic symbols and the positions in the mouth where the different
sounds are made. The teacher can point at the symbols to prompt learners to
correct their pronunciation. We can also use charts to display diagrams, prepared
drawings and tables of irregular verbs, or to build up a class dictionary. Posters are
also invaluable in setting scenes and designing communicative tasks.
The Teacher:
The teacher can use hand gestures, facial expressions and mime (actions which
express meaning without words) to elicit vocabulary items, clarify meaning and
create context. We can also build up a set of signals, such as finger correction
which learners recognise as prompts to correct their own mistakes.
Videos:
Use of videos has sometimes been given less than a positive evaluation by teachers
and administrators in education. This is because it has been seen as an easy
alternative to teaching a class, and one with few discrete learning outcomes. This is
perhaps a superficial appraisal of a powerful, audio-visual resource as when video
materials are put to systematic and careful use, they can motivate students,
provide contextualised examples of language in use, and provide an effective
model of language.
If planned and resourced well, video is a powerful tool that brings the world into the
classroom, allows students extensive listening and speaking practice, is a source of
items of vocabulary and grammar in use, and provides a functional source of
practice for the language of procedures and persuasion.
Change of Focus:
Young learner teachers know that lessons have peaks and troughs in students'
attention levels. To overcome troughs for a lower primary class, the focus needs to
change every 5-10 minutes, while in secondary levels, the task should also vary
every 15-20 minutes in order to keep students engaged.
A lesson which incorporates use of video can provide a key change of focus from
the teacher's voice, or the use of audio tapes. Over the period of an academic
year, the video can be planned in as a break away from normal routines and as a
means to connect the students with the world outside the classroom.
<http://www.britishcouncil.org/hongkong-eltnetwork-article-december06-2.htm>

CHAPTER 8 Page 94
Organising the Board:

Task:
What is the best way of organising the board?
It is a good idea to divide the blackboard or whiteboard into different sections

for different purposes. Although there is one foolproof way to organise the
board, the following example is an effective way of using the board.
Reference Material Lesson Materials Vocabulary Notepad

(e.g. key lexis, model (e.g. pictures, key gram- for noting all new words
sentences, grammar matical structures. dia-
rules. etc.) logues, etc.) at different
stages of the lesson
You can include diagrams like this in your lesson plan for different stages of the lesson.
General Tips for Using Aids in Classrooms:
- Aids that you can prepare in advance like charts, flashcards and transparencies
for the overhead projector, will help you make sure that lesson procedures
match your aims. Another advantage is that you can save such aids and reuse
them in future lessons.
- Make sure that you check any equipment before the lesson. Use the counters
on cassette recorders and video recorders to make a note of where recordings
begin, so that you can find the place easily when you rewind.
- If you use computers or the language laboratory, advance preparation is
essential. You need to plan all your instructions very carefully as well as the
sequence of activities for the lesson.
Tips for Using the Board Effectively:
Using the blackboard effectively requires considerable practice. Unlike the
information we convey verbally in the classroom, information that is placed on the
blackboard will generally be copied verbatim into your students' notes. Therefore, it
is extremely important that you carefully monitor not only what you put on the
blackboard but also how you put it there. The following are just a few of the most
basic reminders to get you thinking about developing effective blackboard
techniques.
1. Begin by removing all the board work that is left over from a previous class.
2. When you solve problems on the blackboard, remember that students use what
you write as a model for their own problem-solving behaviour. Do not put work
on the blackboard that you would not like to find on a homework assignment or
test.
3. Always read aloud when you write. Otherwise your students will be copying
what is on the board after you have gone on to the next point.
4. Before elaborating on the information you have put on the board, turn around
and face the class. If they look lost or are scribbling furiously, wait a minute or
two before proceeding.

CHAPTER 8 Page 95
5. Periodically check your blackboard work by walking to the back of the room
after class. Can you reconstruct the points you were making easily from what is
left on the board? Is the writing large and heavy enough to read easily?
6. Do not erase new material until they have been displayed for several minutes.
7. If you naturally have very small handwriting or if your handwriting is difficult to
read, try printing when you write on the board.
8. After you have put new material on the board, underline or put boxes around
important points to emphasise them.
Applicable Ideas to Use Realia Effectively:

Using realia, i.e. objects in the class, adds interest and relates language to the real
world. Realia could be used in three main areas, for descriptions, as props in
drama and during creative thinking exercises. In this type of exercise, learners find
other uses for everyday objects; e.g., a ruler could be a weapon, musical
instrument and as a symbol of authority. Another creative way of using realia is to
utilise it to make a connection between objects and language. Here are some
ideas that manipulate realia to serve a specific grammar point, augment drills, and
spark free discussion.
1. Specific Grammar Points:
Scissors and the Present Perfect Tense:
Write three sentences representing different uses of the present perfect tense on
the board. Hold the scissors pointing up, so the class can see, with one hand on
each handle. Open the blades by moving the left hand up, keeping the right hand
still. Now say the first sentence, 'I have lived in London all my life', slowly closing the
blades with your right hand. Open the scissors as before, read the second
sentence: 'I have seen that film three times', but this time stop the blade three times
on the way, to represent the three times. For the last sentence,
'I have just had lunch', open the scissors slightly then snap them shut.
Note: The upright blade represents the present and the moving blade represents
time moving between the past and present. By moving the blades you can show
that all three sentences have the connection between past and present in
common, even though the last sentence is dealing with a very short time ago. As
you are facing the class, you should move your left hand, not right, so that the
students will see the 'past' blade moving toward the present, from their left to right.
A Corkscrew, A Bottle Opener, Action and State Verbs:
The different ways of opening wine and beer bottles can be related to state and
action verbs. Explain that when you open a beer bottle, the bottle is either opened
or closed, i.e. it is in one state or the other. Compare this to the opening of a wine
bottle. This is a process which you can see, as the screw is pushed in and pulled out.
Hold a corkscrew in one hand and a bottle opener in the other. Say a verb and
hold up the appropriate instrument (bottle opener for state verb, corkscrew for
action verb). Get volunteer students to do the same. (N.B. some verbs e.g. 'think'
can be both, so you may need a tool that does both.)

CHAPTER 8 Page 96
A Pencil Sharpener and Reduced Relative Clauses:

Again, metaphor can make the unfamiliar more familiar. Students may not be
familiar with reduced relatives such as; 'The man (who was) killed in the accident
was my neighbor' where the words in brackets can be omitted. Explain that by
taking out the two words, you make the sentence better, more economical, and
sharper, as a native speaker would. The metaphor of a pencil sharpener works like
this; you cut off something to make the pencil sharper and more efficient.
A Tie and Prepositions:
Show the students how to tie a tie. 'Put the tie round your neck. Cross the ends in
front of you, then pull the smaller end under, then over, then under again, over
again, then up, behind the knot, through the knot, then down. Pull the knot up.' Get
the students to tie the tie, (real or imaginary) with you, chanting the prepositions as
they do so.
A Stapler and Relative Clauses:
Write two sentences on the board, an object and a subject relative clause, as
follows; 'The man that I saw was crying.' 'The man that cried was taken to the police
station.' Point out that the first sentence has two pronouns (personal and relative),
'that' and 'I', and the second has one, 'that'. Now take two pieces of paper and
staple them together twice. This represents the first sentence. Staple two more
pieces of paper, just once. This represents the second sentence. Remove one
staple from the first two pieces of paper and they will still be joined
together. However, if you remove the staple from the second pair of pieces of
paper, they will come apart. The conclusion is that relative pronouns are
unnecessary in the first sentence.
2. Drills
A Whistle and a Pronunciation Drill:
Write the vocabulary that you want to practise on the board. Mark the stressed
syllable(s). Now use the whistle to demonstrate which word you want the students
to repeat by blowing the syllable pattern, e.g. blow 'long, short, short' to elicit
'confident' and 'short, short, long short' for 'population'. You need a variety of word
lengths and syllable patterns for this.

CHAPTER 8 Page 97
A Ruler and a Drill:

Use a ruler or any similar object to 'conduct' a drill as follows; write a sentence on
the board. Practise the sentence, marking the stressed syllables. When students can
remember it, go to the back of the class, and ask them to turn and face you. Now
conduct the drill, using the ruler as a baton. Looking at the board, beat the
stressed syllables with the ruler while students take their cue from you.
An Empty Bottle and a Drill:
Say a sentence into a bottle. Screw the lid on and tell the class that the sentence is
in the bottle. Now open the bottle and let the sentence out one word at a time,
that is, students repeat the sentence one word at a time. Put another sentence in
the bottle, and tell students to pass the bottle round the class, letting one word out
at a time, one word per student. Then let students fill the bottle in the same way.
The point here is to get students to listen and focus on word order.
3. Free Speaking Activities:
Discussion and a Microphone:
This is suggested by television programme hosts, who control conversations by the
use of the microphone. Put students in groups, and give one student the
microphone (imaginary, or a real microphone, disconnected, or something to
represent a microphone). Say a group of six students are talking about 'holidays',
the person with the microphone can move around the group giving different
people the chance to speak, ensuring everyone gets an equal chance to
contribute.
Tennis Balls and Conversation:
A tennis match can be a metaphor for a conversation. Put students in pairs facing
each other, as in doubles tennis. They should be about one meter apart. Give one
student a tennis ball. He starts talking about a subject then throws the ball to
someone on the other team, who should continue on the same subject, before
returning the ball to someone on the other team. They should keep the
conversation moving swiftly. You can have a referee to penalise slow turns, 'foul'
throws and dropped balls, and keep the score as in tennis.
Classroom aids are all around us, but sometimes we need to think about the best
ways to use an object. 'Mapping' the use of an object onto a language point, or
finding a language related use of an object are two ways of using realia in class.
Have a look around the staffroom, the teaching aids you need may be closer than
you think.

CHAPTER 8 Page 98
II. Identify, Select and Use of Supplementary Materials and Activities:

The materials for a specific lesson will fall into two categories: those that are
required, such as; authentic materials that the teacher incorporates into classroom
activities and course textbooks and lab materials that will be covered at a later
chapter.
For required materials, determine what information must be presented in class,
decide which exercise(s) to use in class and which for out-of-class work. For teacher
-provided materials, use materials that are genuinely related to realistic
communication activities. Teachers should not be tempted to try to create a
communication task around something just because it is a really cool video or a
beautiful brochure.
Task:
Define Supplementary Materials.
Supplementary materials are books and other materials we can use in addition to
the course-book. They include skills development materials; grammar, vocabulary
and phonology practice materials, collections of communicative activities and
teacher's resource materials. Supplementary materials may also come from
authentic sources (e.g. newspaper and magazine articles, video, etc.). Some
course-book packages include supplementary materials and activities specially
designed to fit the course book syllabus, and there are also many websites where
you can download supplementary materials. We select supplementary materials
and activities first by recognising that we need something more than (or different
from) the material in the course-book, and then by knowing where to find the most
appropriate kinds of material.
Task:
What are the features of authentic communication tasks?
Truly authentic communication tasks have several features:

 They involve solving a true problem or discussing a topic of interest.
 They require using language to accomplish a goal, not using language merely to
use language.
 They allow students to use all of the language skills they have, rather than
specific forms or vocabulary, and to self-correct when they realise they need to.
 The criterion of success is clear; completion of a defined task.
Task:
Make a list of all the reasons you can think of for using supplementary materials
and activities. What are the advantages and the disadvantages of using the
supplementary materials in the box below?

CHAPTER 8 Page 99
There are various reasons why we might want to use supplementary materials and
activities. Some of the main reasons are as follows:
 To replace unsuitable material in the course-book.
 To fill gaps in the course-book.
 To provide suitable material for learners' particular needs and interests.
 To give learners extra language or skills practice.
 To add variety to our teaching.
Course-books are organised according to a syllabus and they are often carefully
graded (i.e. grammatical structures, vocabulary, skills, etc., are presented in a
helpful sequence for learning; so that learners' knowledge of the language builds
up step by step through the book.) Supplementary materials and activities that can
provide variety in lessons and useful extra practice, but it is important to make sure
that they fit into the learners' programme, are suitable for the class and match the
aims for particular lessons. Here are some of the possible advantages and
disadvantages of different kinds of supplementary materials:
 a class library of graded readers (storybooks that use simple language)
 skills practice books
 teacher's resource books
 websites
 videos
 language practice books (grammar/vocabulary/phonology)
 electronic materials (CD-ROMs, computer programs)
 games
Tips for Selection of Supplementary Materials and Activities:
Supplementary Materials Possible Advantages Possible Disadvantages
Class Library of Readers. Encourage extensive reading Language sometimes too simple
Gives learners confidence May not be challenging
Skill-Practice Books Focus on individual skills May not suit lesson aims
Teacher’s Resource Books New ideas for lessons May not suit lesson aims
Websites Variety of lesson plans, teaching Sometimes difficult to find the

materials, other resources right material for the learners
Video Provides visual context Equipment may not always be

Source of cultural information available
Shows body language Language may not be graded
Language Practice Book Extra Practice Repetitive exercises

Learners can work alone without Little or no content
teacher’s help
Electronic Materials Motivation Difficult for teacher to control

Familiar technology for learners how learners are working
Little or no human feedback
Games Enjoyment May not be suitable for older

Language Practice learners

CHAPTER 8 Page 100
 Get to know what supplementary materials are available in your school. At the
beginning of the course try to find out what you will want to add to the
course-book when you are planning your scheme of work.
 Supplementary language practice materials are not always accompanied by
teacher's books, and the aims of activities may not be clear when selecting
material. Therefore, you need to think about exactly how it will replace or
improve the material in your course-book.
 It may be useful to use authentic material (which is not designed for a
particular level), in order to give learners the experience of working with more
challenging texts and tasks.
 The activities in materials designed to develop individual skills often include the
use of other skills, e.g. learners need to read a text before they carry out a
listening task, or to do some writing as a follow-up activity after a speaking
activity. When selecting materials and activities, think carefully about all the
skills that are required.
 Many publishers produce materials for practising separate language skills at
different levels. Teacher's resource books, too, usually list tasks and activities
according to the level. Before deciding to use these materials, however, you
should check how appropriate the level is for your learners. Think about the
language they will need to understand or to produce.
 Learners get used to the methodology in their course-book. If you are using
supplementary materials with very different procedures, you may need to give
special attention to instructions.
 You can adapt many supplementary materials for use with classes at different
levels. The texts used in these materials may not be graded, but you can grade
the activities by making the learners' tasks more or less challenging.
 Games and extra communicative activities can provide variety and make
learning fun. But you need to think about your reasons for using them so that
your lesson still has a clear purpose. Older learners may want to know why they
are doing these activities.

CHAPTER 9 Page 102
In recent years, language researchers and practitioners have shifted their focus
from developing individual linguistic skills to the use of language to achieve the
speaker's objectives. This new area of focus, known as communicative
competence, leads language teachers to seek task-oriented activities that
engage their students in creative language use. Games, which are task-based and
have a purpose beyond the production of correct speech, serve as excellent
communicative activities.
On the surface, the aim of all language games is for students to "use the language";
however, during game play learners also use the target language to persuade and
negotiate their way to desired results. This process involves the productive and
receptive skills simultaneously.
Games offer students a fun-filled and relaxing learning atmosphere. After learning
and practising new vocabulary, students have the opportunity to use language in
a non-stressful way (Uberman 1998). While playing games, the learners' attention is
on the message, not on the language. Rather than pay attention to the
correctness of linguistic forms, most participants will do all they can to win. This
eases the fear of negative evaluation, the concern of being negatively judged in
public, and which is one of the main factors inhibiting language learners from using
the target language in front of other people (Horwitz, Horwitz and Cope 1986). In a
game-oriented context, anxiety is reduced and speech fluency is generated--thus
communicative competence is achieved.
Games are also motivating. Games introduce an element of competition into

language-building activities. This provides valuable impetus to a purposeful use of
language (Prasad 2003). In other words, these activities create a meaningful
context for language use. The competitive ambiance also makes learners
concentrate and think intensively during the learning process, which enhances
unconscious acquisition of inputs. Most students who have experienced game-
oriented activities hold positive attitudes towards them (Uberman 1998). An action
research conducted by Huyen and Nga (2003), students said that they liked the
relaxed atmosphere, the competitiveness, and the motivation that games brought
to the classroom. On the effectiveness of games, teachers in Huyen & Nga's (2003)
reported that action research reported that their students seem to learn more
quickly and retain the learned materials better in a stress-free and comfortable
e n v i r o n m e n t .
The benefits of using games in language-learning can be summed up in nine
points. Games....
 Are learner-centred.
 Promote communicative competence.
 Create a meaningful context for language use.
 Increase learning motivation.
 Reduce learning anxiety.
 Integrate various linguistic skills.

CHAPTER 9 Page 103
 Encourage creative and spontaneous use of language.

 Construct a cooperative learning environment.
 Foster participatory attitudes of the students.
Some Fun Games:
Based on the advantages discussed above, English teachers use games to help
students experience the fun and usefulness of English. Here are some games shared
by other teachers. During the games, students break into teams of five members.
The team that finished first is the champion. The tasks are described as follow:
I. Mysterious Landmarks:
1. Competitors assemble a twenty-piece jigsaw puzzle of a world famous
landmark (such as the Eiffel Tower, Mt. Fuji the Great Wall, etc).
2. Then they describe puzzle image in five sentences to complete the task.
This game encourages students' productive skills and elicits their speech fluency.
Cross-culture concepts are also addressed. The number, the length, and the
patterns of sentence can vary depending on the students' language ability and
linguistic points the instructor would like to reinforce.
II. What is the Number?
1. Participants use the four basic operations (addition, subtraction, division and
multiplication) to compute a simple mathematical equation provided orally by
the instructor.
2. They call out the correct answer as soon as possible.
This game addresses students' listening skills and tests their understanding of
numbers, which is often an important part of language teaching materials.
III. Story Time:
1. Participants pick and listen to a tape randomly selected from a provided stack
of tapes (the recording contains a spoken excerpt of a well-known children's
story, such as the Snow White, the Ginger Bread Man, etc).
2. After listening to the entire excerpt, competitors correctly identify the title of
the story from a provided list.
The recorded stories are all classical bedtime stories for young children and have
been translated into most of the major languages worldwide. Students should be
familiar with those stories. This game focuses on gist-listening skills. Students only
need to catch the key terms to figure out what the story is.
IV. Art Master:

1. The instructor describes a picture orally.
2. Competitors simultaneously recreate the picture on a sheet of paper, correctly
including named objects in accurate positions.
This game reinforces the use of prepositions, such as to the right of, to the left of, in
the middle of, or under, etc. It also reinforces the vocabulary of concrete objects
students have already learned before. The complexity of the picture will depend
on the level of the students.

CHAPTER 9 Page 104
V. What is Cooking?
1. Participants read a recipe and make the dish.
2. The amount of ingredients and assembly process must follow exactly the
instructions laid out in the recipe.
3. The participants eat the dish they have prepared, all together and as fast as
possible, because whoever finishes the five tasks first wins the entire competition.
This game not only reinforces food vocabulary, but it also tests the ability of
students to comprehend written instructions. This is also good for introducing cross-
culture topics. Recipes may vary depending on what food terms and cultures the
teachers wishes to cover. Salads and sandwiches are easy-to-prepare recipes. The
eating part adds an additional element of fun to the game.
VI. BLIP (sometimes known as “Coffee Pot”) Guess the Verb:

Each student is given a VERB. (See that it is suitable for the level of the class). In pairs
or as a whole class, discover the VERB through QUESTIONS. The nonsense word
"BLIP" should be substituted for the target VERB.
Write Sample Questions on the Board:
 When / Where / Why / How do you blip?
 Can you blip someone / something / somewhere?
 Do you often blip?
 Did you blip yesterday?
 Are you blipping now?
 Are you going to blip this weekend?
 Have you blipped since you arrived in England?
 Do you like blipping?
 Do you blip with your hands?
 If I saw you blipping, would you be embarrassed?
The aim of the game is not to guess the meaning of the word "Blip" straight away.
When you think you know the meaning of the word "Blip", you could ask further
questions which make the meaning of the word "Blip" clear to the rest of the class or
which amuse the student who is answering the questions.

CHAPTER 9 Page 105
Sample Verbs:
cook live cry love dance
read draw run dream shout
drink sing drive sleep eat
swim fight talk fish think
fly undress jump worry kiss
argue paint bathe plan complain
rest diet scream explore sew
fidget smile translate hesitate understand
iron vacuum joke whisper knit
win move yell oversleep zigzag
VII. I Spy with /my Little Eye - Something Beginning with + Letter ABC:
The objects sighted must be in view of all the students in the classroom.
IX. Simon Says (Action Verbs + Parts of the Body):

Students should only obey the commands if you preface each one with “Simon
says”. If you omit the preface “Simon says” any student who obeys the command
can no longer participate in the game. The last student to remain in the game is
the winner.
Simon says: "Hands up", "hands down", "thumbs up", "thumbs down", "fingers up",
"fingers down"
Simon says: "Touch your eyes / ears / nose / mouth with the forefinger / middle
finger / ring finger / little finger / of your (right)(left) hand.
Simon says: "Put your right hand / left hand / both hands on your right / left knee."
Simon says: "Shut / open your eyes", "stand up / sit down", "stand on your right / left
leg".
Simon says: "Bend your knees / body", "straighten your knees / body".
Simon says: "Fold your arms", "put your arms by your side".
Simon says: "Wave your right hand", "STOP", "jump up and down", "STOP".
Simon says: "Point at the ceiling / floor with the forefinger/ middle finger / ring
finger / little finger / of your right / left hand.

CHAPTER 9 Page 106
X. Hangman:
This is a popular game. It is very useful at low levels and the words which students
have to guess can be restricted to areas of vocabulary (i.e. themes or semantic
sets) or new words introduced in a particular lesson.
These games are suitable for reinforcement of language skills and easily applied in
the classroom. One feature of these games is that students with lower language
ability in a team can still contribute if they are good at skills other than languages,
such as putting together jigsaw puzzles, calculating numbers, drawing, or eating
fast.
How to Choose Games (Tyson, 2000):
 A game must be more than just fun.
 A game should involve "friendly" competition.
 A game should keep all of the students involved and interested.
 A game should encourage students to focus on the use of language rather
than on the language itself.
 A game should give students a chance to learn, practise, or review specific
language material.
Useful Tips for Using Games in Classrooms:
Be Involved Yourself:
When playing games, be involved yourself. Keep an eye on things and "cheering"
at the appropriate places. If you put too much distance between yourself and the
game the students will feel that you are bored and uninterested and will therefore
become bored and uninterested themselves. The amount of teacher involvement
should also depend on what you are trying to achieve. If you are practising a new
language item you may want to take a more participative role then if you are
reviewing old material.
Time Limits:
Time limits are very important. They are what makes the game interesting or boring.
If a student is taking forever to answer a question then the other students become
bored and lose focus. There are no hard and fast rules to setting time limits. They
depend on the ability of the student and the difficulty of what you are trying to
teach. There are different ways of setting time limits.
Some teachers like to use an "egg timer" or similar device and other teachers just
'count to three' in their heads. Use what is called countdown: Hold your hand up
with your fingers splayed so the whole class can see it. Then count down from five
closing off your fingers as you do so. You should only have as many fingers showing
as the last number you said. e.g.
5 (showing five fingers)
4 (showing four fingers)
3 (showing three fingers)
2 (showing two fingers)
1 (showing one finger)

CHAPTER 9 Page 107
The huge advantage in this system is that it gives the teacher a lot of flexibility in the
amount of time actually given. The quicker students can have the challenge of a
quick countdown and the slower students can get a bit of extra time to answer the
question. This may seem a little unfair at first glance, but the students seem to
understand and appreciate the idea. If the game gets really exciting, you do not
have to count, the students will do it for you all you have to do is show the fingers.
Pace the Games:
Start off with a quite game and slowly build the excitement with each new
segment of the class. Always end the class with an exciting game. If the students
enjoy the last ten minutes they will forget about any boring bits that came before it.
There is also 'parent politics' to think of. If they see their children walk out of your
class happy and animated, they are happy. But if they see their children come out
of your class bored and listless they will start to question your abilities as a teacher.
Vary the Games:
You have your favourite games, but occasionally you like to play something new or
different. Your students are the same. You will have your mainstay games, the ever-
changing shortlist of games the students are always asking for. But it is always nice
to have a couple of extra games in your bag of tricks.
Name the Game:
You should always name the game. How can the students ask for a game if it does
not have a name? Make the names short and easy to remember. The game itself is
not the language lesson; it is what you are using to teach the language. For
example, if you want to play 'Snakes and Ladders' just call it “Snakes”.
Scoring:
Make a game of the scoring process itself. The more ways you can find of making
the game depend on the students themselves the better. It makes the game far
more interesting to know that the score depends solely on yourself.
Add a way to get zero in the scoring process. To know that you have won this
particular round and can still fail to score adds lots of suspense to the proceedings.
There are many different ways to score points for games. Here are a few ways that I
have used. This list is by no means exhaustive. The ways of scoring are limited only
by your own imagination.
The simplest way is to give a point for each correct answer the student gives. It is
sometimes useful when you want to quiet things down after a particularly rowdy
session.
Have the student throw a dice to get the score. It is easy to make your own dice. A
sheet of A4 sized light cardboard will give you a dice of 6cm to a side. This is a
good size. It is big enough to be seen easily by the whole class yet not too big to be
held in little hands. You can either use the traditional method of numbering by
using the numbers one to six consecutively, or you can add one or two zeros to
make it more exciting.

CHAPTER 9 Page 108
Have the student cut a deck of cards and chose a card to get the score. The
number cards give the score and the picture cards are zero. This is a good scoring
system when you want to practise numbers. Have the students add the total up, in
English, to find out the score.
Make up you own set of score cards. These can be as simple as cards with numbers
on them to as complex as you want to make them. You may even want to add
some negative numbers so that it is possible to end up with a negative total.
Games help students to be more engaged in and committed to using English than
they would be in a conventional task. They are attentive to instructions, which they
usually are not in regular class. In games, students find their own ways to express
themselves. Participants will go all out with their English to win the game. Thus,
motivation and desire to know more than just linguistic knowledge will be
inevitable.
Usage of Songs:
Songs have always been part of the human experience. They have become an
integral part of our language experience, and if used in coordination with a
language lesson they can be of great value. Fortunately, with the expanding
prevalence of the Internet and specifically the World Wide Web into both the
classrooms and lives of students, access to music and lyrics has been made easier.
Song-based tasks can be tailored for the two listening approaches the bottom-up
and the top-down. These are two processes involved in listening, and both can be
utilised when songs are used in the classroom. The activity which is selected for a
particular song will determine which of these processes is active. Cullen (1999)
states that the first is bottom-up processing where the listener builds up the sounds
into words, sentences and meaning. The second is top-down processing where the
listener uses background knowledge to understand the meaning of a message.
Practising both of these processes is essential for developing listening
comprehension. The affective, cognitive, and linguistic reasons for using songs
which follow, are all grounded in learning theory, and provide insights into the
benefits of songs in the classroom.
Affective Reasons:
The Affective Filter Hypothesis is one of five proposed hypotheses developed by
Steven Krashen. Basically, it is an explanation of how the affective factors relate to
language learning. It is particularly appealing to teachers because it provides an
explanation to why some learners learn and others do not.
Teachers have long recognised the need for students to have a positive attitude
with regard to learning. Krashen (1982) explains that for optimal learning to occur
the affective filter must be weak. A weak affective filter means that a positive
attitude towards learning is present. If the affective filter is strong the learner will not
seek language input, and in turn, not be open for language acquisition. The
practical application of the Affective Filter Hypothesis is that teachers must provide
a positive atmosphere conducive to language learning. Songs are one method for
achieving a weak affective filter and promoting language learning.

CHAPTER 9 Page 109
With the affective filter weak, Saricoban and Metin (2000) have found that songs
can develop the four skill areas of reading, writing, listening, and speaking. Eken
(1996, p.46) states that songs can be used:
 To present a topic, a language point, lexis, etc.

 To practise a language point, lexis, etc.
 To focus on common learner errors in a more direct way
 To encourage extensive and intensive listening
 To stimulate discussion of attitudes and feelings
 To encourage creativity and use of imagination
 To provide a relaxed classroom atmosphere
 To bring variety and fun to learning
Songs provide a break from classroom routine, and that learning English through
songs develops a non-threatening classroom atmosphere in which the four
language skills can be enhanced. The belief that songs provide enjoyment and
develop language skills is also noted by several other authors (Adamowski, 1997;
Bechtold, 1983; Domoney & Harris, 1993; Griffee, 1992; Guglielmino, 1986; Lems,
1984; Little, 1983; Monreal, 1982). The enjoyment aspect of learning language
through songs is directly related to affective factors.
Cognitive Reasons:
Songs also present opportunities for developing automaticity which is the main
cognitive reason for using songs in the classroom. Automaticity is defined as "a
component of language fluency which involves both knowing what to say and
producing language rapidly without pauses." Using songs can help automatise the
language development process. Traditionally, it was believed that automatisation
would occur through repetitive exercises in a non-communicative environment.
However, the major shift towards the communicative teaching methodology
requires that automatisation occur in a different manner. We must "place students
in an environment in which it is appropriate to use target utterances in a genuinely
communicative fashion." The nature of songs is fairly repetitive and consistent. For
example, a song such as "Sailing" by Rod Stewart provides ample opportunities for
students to focus on the present progressive tense. The repetitive style of the song
lends itself to an activity in which students create their own present progressive
sentences based upon their own interest. After listening to the song, students
create their own lyrics following the same tune as the song. Lyrics such as: “I am
writing, I am writing, in my notebook with my friends”, are common examples of the
type of language that students produce.

CHAPTER 9 Page 110
Linguistic Reasons:
Besides automatisation, there is also a linguistic reason for using songs in the
classroom. Some songs are excellent examples of colloquial English, that is, the
language of informal conversation. A song such as "My Best Was Never Good
Enough" by Bruce Springsteen is a prime example of a song that demonstrates
colloquial language use. This song is full of phrases like "Every cloud has a silver
lining." and "Every dog has his day." Of course, the majority of language most ESL
students will encounter is in fact informal. In this way using songs can prepare
students for the genuine language they will be faced with. Songs could also be
used to present and/or practise various grammar points. Those Were the Days, My
Friend by Mary Hopkins or Because You Love Me by Celine Dion could be perfect
lead-in to the Simple Past.
Finally, two studies, Domoney and Harris (1993) and Little (1983) investigated the
prevalence of pop music in the lives of EFL students. Both studies found that music is
often the major source of English outside of the classroom. The exposure to
authentic English is an important factor in promoting language learning. It relates
directly to both the affective filter and automaticity. If students are exposed to
songs which they enjoy, more learning is likely to occur since they may seek out the
music outside of the classroom. The repetitive style of songs then helps to promote
automatisation of colloquial language.
References:
 Playing Games in the EFL Classroom!
<http://www.geocities.com/Athens/Delphi/1979/games/articles/
eflgames.html?200717#playinggames#playinggames>
 Reasons for Using Songs in the ESL/EFL Classroom, Kevin Schoepp schoepp
sabanciuniv.edu Sabanci University, <http://iteslj.org/Articles/Schoepp-
Songs.html>
 <http://members.aol.com/randywoo/bsahis/r-k.htm>

CHAPTER 10 Page 112
Task:
Define Reading.
Reading is one of the four language skills: reading, writing, listening and speaking.
Being a receptive skill, it involves responding to text or making sense of it rather than
producing to the text. To attain this, we need to understand the language of the
text at word level, sentence level and whole-text level. We also need to connect
the message of the text to our knowledge of the world (schemata).
For example: “The boy was surprised because the girl was much faster at running
than he was.”
To understand this sentence, we need to understand what the letters are, how the
letters join together to make words, what the words mean and the grammar of the
words and the sentence. But we also make sense of this sentence by knowing that,
generally speaking, girls do not run as fast as boys. Our knowledge of the world
helps us understand why the boy was surprised.
Reading Sub Skills:
1. Basic reference and information finding skills [e.g. title, using contents page,
index, footnotes, bibliography, chapter headings and sub-headings, and
chapter summaries].
2. Deducing meaning and use of unfamiliar lexical items through understanding
word formation and contextual clues.
3. Understanding grammatical [syntactic and morphological] relationships at the
sentence level.
4. Understanding relationships between parts of text through cohesive devices
[especially grammatical cohesion such as noun-pronoun reference].
5. Understanding relationships between parts of text through discourse markers
[especially for introduction, development, transition and conclusion of ideas].
6. Understanding communicative functions of sentences with and without
specific markers [e.g. definition and exemplification].
7. Understanding conceptual meaning in text [e.g. comparison, cause & effect,
audience & purpose].
8. Understanding explicitly stated ideas and information in text.
9. Understanding ideas and information in a text which are not explicitly stated.
10.Separating essential and non-essential content in text: distinguishing main idea
from supporting detail [e.g. fact & opinion, statement & example, proposition
& argument].
11. Transferring information or knowledge from one context to another [e.g. from
science to engineering].

CHAPTER 10 Page 113
12. Skimming text [surveying to obtain gist].

13. Scanning text [reading for specific detail].
14. Note-taking from text.
 Extracting salient points for summary of specific idea or topic in text.
 Selectively extracting relevant and related points from text for summary.
 Reducing text by rejection of redundant or irrelevant items or information
How to Teach Different Reading Sub-Skills:

Our reasons for reading influence how we read, i.e. which reading sub-skill (a skill
that is part of a main skill) we use. For example, if we read a text just to find a
specific piece or pieces of information in it, we usually use a sub-skill called reading
for scanning. When we scan, we do not read the whole text. We hurry over most of
it until we find the information we are interested in, e.g. when we look for a number
in a telephone directory.
Scanning Eye to Idea…
The purpose of scanning is to be able to locate a specific detail such as a key idea,
word, date, name, or time in a piece of text. Like skimming, it involves rapid
movement of the eye across the page whilst skipping most of the text but keeping
the specific detail which is required at the conscious level.
Good Scanners:
• Repeat the required word or phrase verbally or non-verbally to themselves
whilst they are searching the text.
• Look for key information or indications, e.g.
- Capital letters to indicate names, etc.
- Look for numbers if they are searching for a date.
- Check sub-headings for clues.
• Recognise keywords in the task and look for where they are repeated.
• Colour match symbols, e.g. map reading where roads are red, rivers are blue.
Strategies:
Pupils only become good scanners if they are given regular or frequent practice.
A good ten-minute exercise for the start or end of a lesson might be to give the
pupils a text of approximately 250 words containing a mixture of statistics, facts
and opinions based on a given theme (it could be the theme of the lesson). Allow
them no more than two minutes reading time for pupils to highlight or underline in
colour:
 All the statistics (e.g. dates)
 All the keywords related to your chosen theme, e.g. Victorian London
 The answer to one specific question, e.g. what is photosynthesis?

CHAPTER 10 Page 114
Skimming: Getting the gist!

Another reading sub-skill is reading for gist or skimming, i.e. reading quickly through
a text to get a general idea of what it is about. Skimming is used to absorb the
overall theme, tone or general meaning of a text. It is often used as a precursor to a
more detailed search for specific information and is, therefore, mostly used for non-
fiction texts. Skimming means allowing the eye to move rapidly across each line of
the text, ignoring punctuation and small words, such as ‘in’,’ the’ etc., but allowing
the eye to linger over, and take in the larger words and phrases which are related
to the theme of the text.
For example, you skim when you look quickly through a book in a bookshop to
decide if you want to buy it, or when you go quickly through a reference book to
decide which part will help you write an essay.
Good Skimmers:
 Speak keywords and phrases aloud as they encounter them in the text.
 Develop a feel for the tone or atmosphere of a piece of writing.
 Recognise keywords when they are repeated in the text.
Strategies:
Give pupils a simple but respectable page of a tabloid newspaper. The page
should contain a variety of different articles. Ask pupils to find a specific topic
contained on the page. Point out that they can check headlines, sub-headings
and photos in order to help this process.
This could be followed up by giving them an unfamiliar book, and without reading
it, get pupils to find facts by:
 Checking the contents page for specific chapters which should contain the
information they are looking for.
 Reading the blurb on the inside flap/or the back cover summaries.
 Checking if a summary is given at the beginning or end of each chapter.

CHAPTER 10 Page 115
Most of us have and use skimming skills without realising it. However, it does need to
be pointed out to students.
Understanding Reference:
Understanding reference is relevant to reader's understanding of the text which are
anaphoric reference and cataphoric reference.
Anaphoric Reference:
This term is used to refer back in a stretch of language, as with 'it' in: ‘Although the
aircraft had been damaged, it could still fly.’ Here, the pronoun 'it' substitutes for its
antecedent 'the aircraft'. In the next example, the definite article 'the' in 'the
conference' is anaphoric, referring back to a conference: ‘The EC leaders agreed
to hold a conference on economic and monetary union, and have now fixed a
date for the conference.’
Cataphoric Reference:
It is a forward reference in a text. the pronoun she is cataphoric reference in ‘If she
wants to, Nora can be charming.’ Here, 'she' substitutes for its antecedent 'Nora'.
The sentence exhibits cataphoric ellipsis, since 'she wants to' is understood as 'she
wants to be charming'. Cataphoric reference is less common than the anaphoric
one.
Strategies:
 Whenever you find a pronoun in your writing, underline it and then draw an
arrow back to the specific one word that it renames.
 If you can not find the word or there seem to be two or more words that it could
refer to, you have a problem with reference.
 Remember: the antecedent must be in the preceding clause or phrase (the
one right before the pronoun) if you want to make sure the reference is clear.
A third reading sub-skill is Reading for Detail. If you read a letter from someone you
love who you have not heard from for a long time, you probably read like this,
getting the meaning out of every word.
Another way of reading is Extensive Reading. Extensive reading involves reading
long pieces of text, for example a story or an article. As you read, your attention
and interest vary, you may read some parts of the text in detail while you may skim
through others.
Sometimes, especially in language classrooms, we use texts to examine language.
For example, we might ask learners to look for all the words in a text related to a
particular topic, or work out the grammar of a particular sentence. The aim of
these activities is to make learners more aware of how language is used. These
activities are sometimes called intensive reading. They are not a reading skill, but a
language learning activity.

CHAPTER 10 Page 116
Task:
In what way is reading aloud relevant to students' reading abilities?
Reading Aloud:
A student's performance when reading aloud is not a reliable indicator of that
student's reading ability. A student who is perfectly capable of understanding a
given text when reading it silently may stumble when asked to combine
comprehension with word recognition and speaking ability in the way that reading
aloud requires.
In addition, reading aloud is a task that students will rarely, if ever, need to do
outside the classroom. As a method of assessment, therefore, it is not authentic; it
does not test a student's ability to use reading to accomplish a purpose or goal.
However, reading aloud can help a teacher assess whether a student is "seeing"
word endings and other grammatical features when reading. To use reading aloud
for this purpose, adopt the "read and look up" approach. Ask the student to read a
sentence silently one or more times, until comfortable with the content, then look
up and tell you what it says. This procedure allows the student to process the text,
and lets you see the results of that processing and know what elements, if any, the
student is missing.
Task:
How is applying the traditional approach in Teaching Reading different from
applying the communicative approach?
Traditional Approach Communicative Approach
Traditionally, the purpose of learning to read in a language has been to have

access to the literature written in that language. In language instruction, reading
materials have traditionally been chosen from literary texts that represent "higher"
forms of culture.
This approach assumes that students learn to read a language by studying its
vocabulary, grammar, and sentence structure, not by actually reading it. In this
approach, lower level learners read only sentences and paragraphs generated by
textbook writers and instructors. The reading of authentic materials is limited to the
works of great authors and reserved for upper level students who have developed
the language skills needed to read them.

CHAPTER 10 Page 117
The communicative approach to language teaching has given instructors a

different understanding of the role of reading in the language classroom and the
types of texts that can be used in instruction. When the goal of instruction is
communicative competence, everyday materials such as train schedules,
newspaper articles, travel and tourism Web sites become appropriate classroom
materials, because reading them is a way in which communicative competence is
developed. Instructions in reading and reading practice thus become essential
parts of language teaching at every level.
Reading Purpose and Reading Comprehension:

Task:
What do people read?
Reading is an activity with a purpose. A person may read in order to gain

information or verify existing knowledge, or in order to critique a writer's ideas or
writing style. A person may also read for enjoyment, or to enhance knowledge of
the language being read. The purpose(s) for reading guide the reader's selection
of texts.
The purpose for reading also determines the appropriate approach to reading
comprehension. A person who needs to know whether she can afford to eat at a
particular restaurant needs to comprehend the pricing information provided on the
menu, but does not need to recognise the name of every appetiser listed.
Task:
Mention the characteristics of a good reader.
 _______________________________________________________________________
 _______________________________________________________________________
 _______________________________________________________________________
 _______________________________________________________________________
 _______________________________________________________________________
Reading research shows that good readers:
1. Read extensively.
2. Integrate information in the text with existing knowledge.
3. Have a flexible reading style, depending on what they are reading.
4. Are motivated.
5. Rely on different skills interacting: perceptual processing, phonemic processing,
recall.
6. Read for a purpose; reading serves a function.

CHAPTER 10 Page 118
Strategies for Developing Reading Skills:

Following are strategies that can help students read more quickly and effectively:
 Previewing: reviewing titles, section headings, and photo captions to get a
sense of the structure and content of a reading selection.
 Predicting: using knowledge of the subject matter to make predictions about
content and vocabulary and check comprehension; using knowledge of the
text type and purpose to make predictions about discourse structure; using
knowledge about the author to make predictions about writing style,
vocabulary, and content.
 Skimming and Scanning: using a quick survey of the text to get the main idea,
identify text structure, confirm or question predictions.
 Guessing from Context: using prior knowledge of the subject and the ideas in
the text as clues to the meanings of unknown words, instead of stopping to look
them up.
 Paraphrasing: stopping at the end of a section to check comprehension by
restating the information and ideas in the text.
Task:
How can instructors help students learn when and how to use reading strategies?
 Instructors can help students learn when and how to use reading strategies in
several ways:
 By modeling the strategies aloud, talking through the processes of previewing,
predicting, skimming and scanning, and paraphrasing. This shows students how
the strategies work and how much they can know about a text before they
begin to read word by word.
 By allowing time in class for group and individual previewing and predicting
activities as preparation for in-class or out-of-class reading. Allocating class time
to these activities indicates their importance and value.
 By using cloze (fill in the blank) exercises to review vocabulary items. This helps
students learn to guess meaning from context.
 By encouraging students to talk about what strategies they think will help them
approach a reading assignment, and then talking after reading about what
strategies they actually used. This helps students develop flexibility in their
choice of strategies.
When language learners use reading strategies, they find that they can control the
reading experience, and they gain confidence in their ability to read the
language.

CHAPTER 10 Page 119
Task:
Why is teaching reading generally considered a main goal for educational
programmes?
Reading to Learn:
Reading is an essential part of language instruction at every level because it
supports learning in multiple ways.
 Reading to Learn the Language: Reading material is language input. By giving
students a variety of materials to read, instructors provide multiple
opportunities for students to absorb vocabulary, grammar, sentence structure,
and discourse structure as they occur in authentic contexts. Students thus gain
a more complete picture of the ways in which the elements of the language
work together to convey meaning.
 Reading for Content Information: Students' purpose for reading in their native
language is often to obtain information about a subject they are studying, and
this purpose can be useful in the language learning classroom as well. Reading
for content information in the language classroom gives students both
authentic reading material and an authentic purpose for reading.
 Reading for Cultural Knowledge and Awareness: Reading everyday materials
that are designed for native speakers can give students insight into the
lifestyles and worldviews of the people who use the language they are
studying. When students have access to newspapers, magazines, and Web
sites, they are exposed to culture in all its variety, and monolithic cultural
stereotypes begin to break down.
When Reading to Learn, Students Need to Follow Four Basic Steps:
1. Figure out the purpose for reading. Activate background knowledge of the
topic in order to predict or anticipate content and identify appropriate
reading strategies.
2. Attend to the parts of the text that are relevant to the identified purpose and
ignore the rest. This selectivity enables students to focus on specific items in the
input and reduces the amount of information they have to hold in short-term
memory.
3. Select strategies that are appropriate to the reading task and use them flexibly
and interactively. Students' comprehension improves and their confidence
increases when they use top-down and bottom-up skills simultaneously to
construct meaning.
4. Check comprehension while reading and when the reading task is completed.
Monitoring comprehension helps students detect inconsistencies and
comprehension failures, helping them learn to use alternate strategies.

CHAPTER 10 Page 120
Developing Reading Activities:

Task:
How to develop an effective reading lesson?
Developing reading activities involves more than identifying a text that is "at the
right level," writing a set of comprehension questions for students to answer after
reading, handing out the assignment and sending students away to do it. A fully-
developed reading lesson supports students as readers through pre-reading, while-
reading, and post-reading activities.
As you design reading tasks, keep in mind that complete recall of all the
information in a text is an unrealistic expectation even for native speakers. Reading
activities that are meant to increase communicative competence should be
success-oriented and build up students' confidence in their reading ability.
Check the Level of Difficulty of the Text:

The factors listed below can help you judge the relative ease or difficulty of a
reading text for a particular purpose and a particular group of students.
 How is the information organised? Does the story line, narrative, or instruction
conform to familiar expectations? Texts in which the events are presented in
natural chronological order, which have an informative title, and which present
the information following an obvious organisation (main ideas first, details and
examples second) are easier to follow.
 How familiar are the students with the topic? Remember that misapplication of
background knowledge due to cultural differences can create major
comprehension difficulties.
 Does the text contain redundancy? At the lower levels of proficiency, listeners
may find short, simple messages easier to process, but students with higher
proficiency benefit from the natural redundancy of authentic language.
 Does the text offer visual support to aid in reading comprehension? Visual aids
such as photographs, maps, and diagrams help students preview the content
of the text, guess the meanings of unknown words, and check comprehension
while reading.
Remember that the level of difficulty of a text is not the same as the level of
difficulty of a reading task. Students who lack the vocabulary to identify all of the
items on a menu can still determine whether the restaurant serves steak and
whether they can afford to order one.

CHAPTER 10 Page 121
Task:
Why do you think the following elements are important in designing any reading
activity?
 Construct the reading activity around a purpose that has significance for the
students.
 Define the activity's instructional goal and the appropriate type of response.
Construct the Reading Activity around a Purpose that has Significance for the
Students:
Make sure students understand what the purpose for reading is, to get the main
idea, obtain specific information, understand most or all-of-the message, enjoy a
story, or decide whether or not to read more. Recognising the purpose for reading
will help students select appropriate reading strategies.
Define the Activity's Instructional Goal and the Appropriate Type of Response:
In addition to the main purpose for reading, an activity can also have one or more
instructional purposes, such as practising or reviewing specific grammatical
constructions, introducing new vocabulary, or familiarising students with the typical
structure of a certain type of text.
Reading Lessons Should Be Divided into Three Main Parts;

 Pre-Reading
 While Reading
 Post Reading
Use Pre-Reading Activities to Prepare Students for Reading:

The activities you use during pre-reading may serve as preparation in several ways.
During pre-reading you may:
 Make predictions.
 Establish a purpose.
 Generate questions.
 Assess students' background knowledge of the topic and linguistic content of
the text (review the passage, vocabulary and structure of the text).
 Give students the background knowledge necessary for the comprehension of
the text, or activate the existing knowledge that the students possess.
 Clarify any cultural information which may be necessary to comprehend the
passage.
 Make students aware of the type of text they will be reading and the purpose(s)
for reading.
 Provide opportunities for group or collaborative work and for class discussion
activities.

CHAPTER 10 Page 122
Sample Pre-Reading Activities:

 Using titles, subtitles, and divisions within the text to predict content and
organisation or sequence of information.
 Looking at pictures, maps, diagrams, or graphs and their captions.
 Talking about the author's background, writing style, and usual topics.
 Skimming to find the theme or main idea and eliciting related prior knowledge.
 Reviewing vocabulary or grammatical structures.
 Reading over the comprehension questions to focus attention on finding that
information while reading.
 Constructing semantic webs (a graphic arrangement of concepts or words
showing how they are related).
 Doing guided practice with guessing meaning from context or checking
comprehension while reading.
Pre-reading activities are most important at lower levels of language proficiency
and at earlier stages of reading instruction. As students become more proficient at
using reading strategies, you will be able to reduce the amount of guided pre-
reading and allow students to do these activities themselves.
Some of the Pre-Reading Instructional Strategies Are:

1. Anticipation Guide:
To read more actively and think more critically, readers should prepare for what
they will be reading. An Anticipation Guide (Herber, 1978) motivates students to
read closely for specific information that will support their predictions.
Have students respond to a series of statements that support or challenge their
beliefs and experiences about the topic being studied. Include four to six
statements that focus on the most important concepts.
Classroom Ideas for Using Anticipation Guide:

 Have students (individually or in groups) respond to each statement and be
prepared to support their positions.
 Have students read the selection in order to gather evidence that confirms or
counters their responses on the guide.
 After they have finished reading, ask students (individually or in groups) to
review their guides to confirm, revise, or note any additional information that is
needed.
 Ask students to share what they learned from their reading.
2. Problematic Situation:
The Problematic Situation (Vacca and Vacca, 1993) challenges students to draw
upon prior knowledge, motivates them to read, and provides a clear focus for their
reading. A good problematic situation, then, engages students' interest and
requires them to gather specific information and use it to support their argument.

CHAPTER 10 Page 123
Classroom Ideas for Using a Problematic Situation:

 Have students work in cooperative groups to brainstorm and record possible
solutions. After brainstorming, ask members of the group to evaluate the
responses, discussing the merits of each solution.
 After reading the assigned text(s), ask students to revisit their solutions. How
would they refine or modify them using the new information they have learned?
 In closing, ask students to consider whether some of their own solutions might be
preferable to the one presented by the author.
PLAN - Predict/Locate/Add/Note:
This study-reading strategy consists of four steps that students use before, during,
and after reading. It was first developed for college students, but has been
modified to be used with younger students as well. Middle school students find this
strategy helpful as they transition from learning to read to reading for information.
Here are the steps:
Match While-Reading Activities to the Purpose for Reading:

In while-reading activities, students check their comprehension as they read. The
purpose for reading determines the appropriate type and level of comprehension.
 When reading for specific information, students need to ask themselves, "Have
I obtained the information I was looking for?"
 When reading for pleasure, students need to ask themselves, "Do I understand
the story line/sequence of ideas well enough to enjoy reading this?"
 When reading for thorough understanding (intensive reading), students need
to ask themselves, "Do I understand each main idea and how the author
supports it? Does what I'm reading agree with my predictions, and, if not, how
does it differ?" To check comprehension in this situation, students may;
1. Stop at the end of each section to review and check their predictions,
restate the main idea and summarise the section.
2. Use comprehension questions as guides to the text, stopping to answer
them as they read.

CHAPTER 10 Page 124
Post-Activities: activities which ask learners to talk about how a topic in the text
relates to their own lives or give their opinions on parts of the text. These activities
also require learners to use some of the language they have met in the text.
Task:
How to make better use of the text book reading activities?
Using Textbook Reading Activities:

Many language textbooks emphasise product (answers to comprehension
questions) over process (using reading skills and strategies to understand the text),
providing little or no contextual information about the reading selections or their
authors, and few, if any, pre-reading activities. Newer textbooks may provide pre-
reading activities and reading strategy guidance, but their one-size-fits-all
approach may or may not be appropriate for your students.
You can use the guidelines for developing reading activities given here as starting
points for evaluating and adapting textbook reading activities:
 Use existing, or add your own, pre-reading activities and reading strategy
practice.
 Do not make students do exercises simply because they are in the book; this
destroys motivation.
Another problem with textbook reading selections is that they have been adapted
to a predetermined reading level through adjustment of vocabulary, grammar,
and sentence length. This makes them more approachable, but it also means that
they are less authentic and do not encourage students to apply the reading
strategies they will need to use outside the class. When this is the case, use the
textbook reading selection as a starting point to introduce a writer or topic, and
then give students choices of more challenging authentic texts to read as a
follow-up.
Assessing Reading Proficiency:

Reading ability is very difficult to assess accurately. In the communicative
competence model, a student's reading level is the level at which that student is
able to use reading to accomplish communication goals. This means that
assessment of reading ability needs to be correlated with purposes for reading.
Comprehension Questions:
Instructors often use comprehension questions to test whether students have
understood what they have read. In order to test comprehension appropriately,
these questions need to be coordinated with the purpose for reading. If the
purpose is to find specific information, comprehension questions should focus on
that information. If the purpose is to understand an opinion and the arguments that
support it, comprehension questions should ask about those points.

CHAPTER 10 Page 125
In everyday reading situations, readers have a purpose for reading before they
start. That is, they know what comprehension questions they are going to need to
answer before they begin reading. To make reading assessment in the language
classroom more like reading outside of the classroom, therefore, allow students to
review the comprehension questions before they begin to read the test passage.
Finally, when the purpose for reading is enjoyment, comprehension questions are
beside the point. As a more authentic form of assessment, have students talk or
write about why they found the text enjoyable and interesting (or not).
Authentic Assessment:
In order to provide authentic assessment of students' reading proficiency, a post-
reading activity must reflect the real-life uses to which students might put the
information they have gained through reading.
It must have a purpose other than assessment. It must require students to
demonstrate their level of reading comprehension by completing some tasks.
To develop authentic assessment activities, consider the type of response that
reading a particular selection would elicit in a non-classroom situation. For
example, after reading a weather report, one might decide what to wear the next
day; after reading a set of instructions, one might repeat them to someone else;
after reading a short story, one might discuss the story line with friends.
Use this response type as a base for selecting appropriate post-reading tasks. You
can then develop a checklist or rubric that will allow you to evaluate each
student's comprehension of specific parts of the text.
Reading Activities:
Teachers can use different text types in the classroom and provide a wide range of
activities which use different reading skills. Grading the task to suit learners’ levels is
the most important element teachers should care about while manipulating the
text. As a result the one text could be used at different levels according to the task
difficulty.
Elementary Level Activities Can Include:

 Matching words with pictures; learners match the word to the image that
represents it. This activity helps learners to mentally associate the orthographic
symbols of the word to its real image.
 Jumbled sentences; words are written on cards and learners have to put these
jumbled cards in the correct order. This activity is helpful for sentence
construction.
 Reading for gist; simple headlines and titles can help learners to predict the
topic and vocabulary.
 Read and name the person; students read the description of people; and
based on these descriptions they write the name of the person under his/her
picture.

CHAPTER 10 Page 126
Intermediate Level Activities Can Include:

 Arranging paragraphs in a logical sequence. This activity helps learners to iden-
tify linkers and distinguish elements of coherence in a given text.
 Writing headlines and/or titles for stories and articles which trains learners on un-
derstanding the main idea.
 Identifying references; anaphoric and cataphoric.
 Guessing word in context.
 Inserting a sentence in a paragraph; can help learners identify functions of
each sentence in a paragraph.
 Integrating reading with other skills; listening, writing or speaking. Reading can
be the lead in to any of these skills or vice versa.
 Reading competitions; learners are given.
Advance Level Activities Can Include:

 Identifying writer’s rhetorical aims, is the text biased, neutral and sarcastic, etc.
 Intensive reading; looking for specific information.
 Reading a text and writing the summary.
 Identifying the main idea of each paragraph.
 Identifying the details that support these main ideas.

CHAPTER 11 Page 128
Task:
Define listening.
Listening is the ability to identify and understand what others are saying. This
involves understanding a speaker's accent or pronunciation, his grammar and
vocabulary, and grasping his meaning (Howatt and Dakin). An able listener is
capable of doing these four things simultaneously.
Task:
What are the micro skills of listening?
There are many micro-skills of listening, which are also called enabling skills. They
are:
 Predicting the gist; what people are going to talk about.
 Gathering specific information; identifying relevant points; rejecting irrelevant
information.
 Guessing the unknown words or phrases.
 Using one's own knowledge of the subject to help one understand schemata.
 Retaining relevant points and/ or details (note-taking, summarising).
 Recognising discourse markers, e. g., well, Oh, another thing is; now, finally; etc.
 Recognising cohesive devices, e. g., such as and which, including linking
words, pronouns, references, etc.
 Understanding different intonation patterns and uses of stress, etc. , which give
clues to meaning and social setting.
 Understanding inferred information, e. g., recognising the speaker’s attitude or
intentions.
Listening is one of the fundamental language skills. It is a medium through which
children, young people and adults gain a large portion of their education their
information, their understanding of the world and of human affairs, their ideals,
sense of values, and their appreciation. Thus, it is of vital importance that our
learners be taught to listen effectively and critically.

CHAPTER 11 Page 129
Task:
What problems do learners face in class with listening activities? Suggest possible
solutions to overcome the problems..
Problems Solutions
In order to teach listening skills, a teacher should firstly state the difficulties. For a
student of a foreign language, accurate and intelligent listening is a necessity, and
the teacher is responsible for helping his / her learners to acquire this skill which
provides the very foundation for learning and functioning in a language. That the
teacher can observe and isolate the errors in speaking but could not in listening is a
difficulty. In listening, the learner can exercise no controls over the structural and
lexical range of the speaker to whom he is listening. Nevertheless, any listener can
learn to focus on significant content items, to explain in another way he can learn
to listen selectively.
Helping the learners to distinguish sounds, teaching to isolate significant content
and informational items for concentration may be provided by controlled listening
exercises. One exercise is to give him certain performance objectives to give him
general informational questions that he should be able to answer after he listens to
the material for the first time. These questions should require only the isolation of
facts clearly revealed in the material. Questions that require application or
inference from the information contained in the listening exercise are best used at
later stages or more advanced students.
More controls are necessary at lower levels. Sheets containing sequentially
organised and significant questions on context and content, questions that call for
one-word answers serve as useful guides for the student. Such questions help him
filter out and listen for significant information. The questions themselves suggest the
content and provide the student with an organisational frame for selective
listening.
For listening comprehension exercises, we tend to read passages, record news or
broadcasts, or prepare lectures. All of them have value, but they are extremely
difficult sources for early practice in selective listening. This type of listening
exercises does not present the redundancies, the colloquialisms, the hesitations, the
gestures and the facial expressions that are an inseparable part of the spoken
language. They emphasise informational content and fail to provide the signals
used to communicate information and meaning.
Listening to and understanding speech involves a number of basic processes, some
depending upon linguistic competence, some depending upon previous
knowledge that is not necessarily of a purely linguistic nature, and some depending
upon psychological variables that affect the mobilization of these competence
and knowledge in the particular task situation.

CHAPTER 11 Page 130
The listener must have a continuous set to listen and understand, and as he hears
the utterance, he may be helped by some kind of set to process and remember
the information transmitted. His linguistic competence enables him, presumably, to
recognise the formatives of the heard utterance, i. e. , to dissect out of the wave
form of the morphemes, words, and other meaning-bearing elements of the
utterance.
Task:
Why should teachers integrate language skills?
Listening is a receptive skill, and receptive skills give way to productive skills. If we
have our students produce something, the teaching will be more communicative.
This brings us to the must of integrating language skills. There are two reasons for
using integrating activities in language classrooms:
1. To practise and extend the learners' use of a certain language structure or
function.
2. To develop the learners' ability in the use of two or more of the skills within real
contexts and communicative frame work.
Integrated activities, on the other hand, provide a variety in the classroom and thus
maintain motivation and allow the recycling and revision of language which has
already been taught separately in each skill.
Task:
How can the teacher be certain that listening experiences will become more
productive?
There are four distinguished levels existing in listening to radio or recordings:

Level 1. This mood is listening. Here, the sound remains in the background, there is
usually limited comprehension, and, indeed, limited attention. One
becomes directly aware of sounds only when they stop. Nevertheless, a
certain amount of learning may take place.
Level 2. Here the purpose is relaxation, escape, getting your mind off something
rather than on it. The material is comprehended but usually not analysed
for its value. This listening may result in useful ideas, but they are usually
peripheral and/or accidental.
Level 3. On this level, answers are sought as a key to action. One listens to
weather reports, traffic information from a plane-temporarily useful but
what we might call forgettable transient information. This form of listening
does not require long, sustained concentration.

CHAPTER 11 Page 131
Level 4. This is the stage of analytical and critical listening. The listener not only
seeks a serious answer to a serious question but evaluates the quality of
the answer. Round-table discussions, serious listening to talks, spirited
conversation and symphonic music are at the fourth level. At this stage,
listening to music is in the foreground of attention not in the background
as on previous levels (Wittich and Schuller, 1962).
It is listening on the fourth level that primarily concerns us in our teaching. Such
listening may add an emotional and dramatic quality. Radio and recordings
highlight the importance of listening. Listening is as active as speaking, and in some
ways even more difficult. It requires attention, thought, interpretation, and
imagination.
Task:
How to improve our learners' listening skills?
To improve our learners' listening skills we should let them (Austin Shrope, 1970):
1. Adopt a positive attitude.
2. Be responsive.
3. Shut out distractions.
4. Listen for the speaker's purpose.
5. Look for the signals of what is to come.
6. Look for summaries of what has gone before.
7. Evaluate the supporting materials.
8. Look for non-verbal clues.
We can call listening a decoding-making sense of the message process. Each short
stretch of meaningful material which is read or heard has to be;
 Recognised as meaningful and understood on perception.
 Held in the short-term memory long enough to be decoded.
 Related to what has gone before and /or what follows.
Out of this process come pieces of information which can be stored in the long
term memory for recall later. We can show the whole process in the form of a
model perception of sounds, letter shapes, etc.
1. Initial recognition of meaning of short stretches.
2. Material held in short-term memory.
3. Related to material already held in short-term memory.
4. Related to material arriving in short-term memory.
5. Meaning extracted from message and retained in long-term memory
6. Gist recalled later.

CHAPTER 11 Page 132
We can divide the listening process into three stages:

1. Pre-listening (purpose must be given at this stage). This stage acts as an
introduction to the topic of the listening activity.
2. During (in-while) listening. In this stage, a series of comprehension activities
developing different listening sub-skills.
3. Post-listening (speaking). At this stage, learners are asked to comment on the
topic and say how it relates to their own lives. Learners are also asked to use
some of the language they have met in the lesson.
In listening activities, we listen for a purpose. We make an immediate response to
what we hear. There are some visual or environmental clues as to the meaning of
what is heard. Stretches of heard discourse come in short chunks, and most heard
discourse is spontaneous, therefore differs from formal spoken prose in the amount
of redundancy 'noise' and colloquialisms, and its auditory character.
Task:
Why should teachers give a purpose to listening activities?
There is an association between expectation, purpose, and comprehension;

therefore a purpose should be given to our learners. We should train students to
understand what is being said in conversations to get them to disregard
redundancy, hesitation, and ungrammaticality. The major problem is the actual
way listening material is presented to the students. We should give a clear lead in
what they are going to hear; use some kind of visual back up for them to
understand; give questions and tasks in order to clarify the things in their minds; and
be sure that these tasks help in learning, not confusing. Students should learn how
use the environmental clues; the speaker's facial expression, posture, eye direction,
proximity, gesture, tone of voice, and that general surroundings contribute
information.
This brings us to the thought that, while planning exercises, listening materials, task
and visual materials should be taken into consideration. The teacher should
produce a suitable discourse while using recordings. A preset purpose, ongoing
learner response, motivation, success, simplicity, and feedback should be the things
considered while preparing the task. Visual materials are useful for
contextualisation. We can also categorise the goals of listening as listening for
enjoyment, for information, for persuasion, for perception for comprehension and
lastly for solving problems.

CHAPTER 11 Page 133
In listening to English as a foreign language, the most important features can be

defined as:
1. Coping with the sounds,
2. Understanding intonation and stress,
3. Coping with redundancy and noise,
4. Predicting,
5. Understanding colloquial vocabulary,
6. Fatigue,
7. Understanding different accents,
8. Using visual and environmental clues.
We can divide listening for comprehension into three stages:
1. Listening and making no response (following a written text, informal teacher
talk).
2. Listening and making short responses (obeying instructions, physical
movement, building models, picture dictation. etc.), true/false exercises,
noting specific information, etc.
3. Listening and making longer response (repetition and dictation, paraphrasing,
answering questions, answering comprehension questions on texts, predictions,
filling gaps, summarising, etc).
Task:
Mention the different purposes that could be given to a listening activity.
The purposes that should be in a listening activity are giving/ providing:

1. General information (understanding of the main points).
2. Specific information (understanding of the particular items).
3. Cultural interest (generally informing about the target language culture).
4. Information about people's attitudes and opinions.
5. The organisation of ideas.
6. Sequence of events.
7. Lexical items (words expressing noise / movement).
8. Structural items (their use and meaning).
9. Functional items (their form and use).
Conclusion:
Since most of the actual listening the student will be exposed to outside of the class
is likely to be real-life conversation, it seems wisest to use materials cast in real-life
situations for listening comprehension exercises, at least at the beginning level. If
the oral instruction of the course is contextualised, set into "a situation", it should be
easy enough to contextualise the aural practice as well. The teacher can easily
adapt to listening exercises those situations through which the text presents oral
drills and communicative activities, just by giving them a slightly different twist.
Listening exercises should be as natural as situations from which they grow.

CHAPTER 11 Page 134
In other words, an exercise in listening comprehension must be as close as possible

to a "slice of life" neither a contrived situation nor an artificially delivered discourse.
By means of this, a teacher has a great work to do, and has to be a very creative
person in order to teach listening communicatively.
Lesson Plan:
Topic: Beauty Contest
Duration: Twenty minutes
Level: Upper-Intermediate
Materials: Pictures, blackboard, tape, tape-recorder
Goals: Students are asked to understand when they listen to a speech. This lesson
will at least make the students take one step to get accustomed to hearing
and understanding what they hear.
Objectives: By the end of the lesson the students will understand the significance of
listening.
Activities:
Pre-Listening Activities: The teacher asks the students what they are going to listen
to. A discussion atmosphere is tried to be created. At this stage pictures are used
effectively.
During Listening Activities: While students are listening to the tape the teacher asks
them to take some notes.
Post-Listening Activities: The teacher writes some questions on the board and asks
them to answer the questions. They are also stimulated to talk and participate in
the activity dominantly.
1. Pre-Listening Activities:
The teacher hangs the pictures on the board and tries to make the students talk
about the subjects.
T: Do you think that they are beautiful?
S: . . .
T: Can you guess the name of the first competitor?
S: . . .
T: Can you guess the height of the second competitor?
S: . . .
T: What nationality does the third girl belong to? What is your opinion?
S: . . .
2. During-Listening Activities:
The teacher asks the students to listen to the tape very carefully. And he gives
information lists to the students. While they are listening to the tape they try to fill the
blanks with appropriate information. If no information appears for any blank on the
list, students are asked to put a cross on the blank provided for the required
information.

CHAPTER 11 Page 135
3. Post- Listening Activities:

The teacher writes on the board some questions. Students answer these questions
to test whether they understood what they have listened or not.
1. Whose name is the best? Why do you think so?
2. Who is the tallest one of all?
3. Who is the oldest one of all?
4. Who is the heaviest one of all?
5. What nationality is the first one?
6. What nationality is the second one?
7. What nationality is the third one?
8. Who can speak two languages?
9. What are those languages?
10.Whose favourite film star is Leonardo Di Caprio?
11.What does Suzanne Kerrigan mean by saying "I hope the political situation of
my country will not affect this kind of a contest?"
4. Assignment:
At home listen to the information about the people whose names are in the chart
below and complete the missing information.
Elizabeth Mccornick Alexandra Suzanne Kerrigan

Bellomonti
Nationality: Nationality: Nationality:

Canadian Italian
Weight: Weight: Weight:

53 51 56
Age: Age: Age:

21 20 years old 22
Languages: Languages: Languages:
Hobbies: Hobbies: Hobbies:
Profession: Profession: Profession:
Height: Height: Height:

1. 73
Her Mother's Name:

CHAPTER 11 Page 136
Transcript:
 “I'm Elizabeth Mccornick. I'm participating from Canada. I'm 21 years old and I
weigh 53 kilos. I am a girl of 90-60-90. I am a bilingual person; that means I can
speak two languages fluently and accurately: English and French. I prefer going
to movies than enjoying theatrical acts. My favourite film star is Leonardo Di
Caprio. My friends say that I am a good cook as well. I admit I like cooking
traditional dishes in my spare time. I wish my best wishes to the other
contestants. Thanks.”
 “Good evening! I would like to greet all the people watching and participating
in this contest. My name is Alexandra Bellomonti and I'm from Italy. I am 20 years
old and 51 kilos I weigh. I like going out with my friends at the weekends. I can
also say that I'm studying really hard and I am expecting to be accepted to the
Massachusetts Institute of Technology. I really have a great desire for being a
genetic engineer in the future. Thank you!”
 “Hello everybody! I am Suzanne Kerrigan from the USA. I was born in 1976, in LA,
California. I confess I weigh 56 kilos but I'm 1. 73 cm tall and that subdues my
weight I think. I like skating on ice and I'm an amateur figure skater. I also like
foreign and strange meals if they prove to be delicious, of course. Finally, I hope
the political situation of my country will not effect this kind of a contest.”
References:
1. Abbott, G. & P. Wingard. (1985). The Teaching of English as an International
Language: A Practical Guide. Great Britain.
2. Austin S. (1970). Speaking & Listening: A Contemporary Approach. Harcourt,
Brace & World, Inc. USA
3. Carroll E. R. (1969). The Learning of Language. National Council of Teachers of
English Publication. New York.
4. Celce ÅMurcia, M. & L. mcIntosh. (1979). Teaching English as a Second or
Foreign Language. Newbury House Publishers, Inc. Massachusetts.
5. Fox J. W. (1974). Teaching Listening Skills. English Teaching Forum. October -
December, 12, pp. 42-45
6. Joiner, E. (1977). Communicative Activities for Beginning Language Students.
English Teaching Forum, April, 15, pp. 8-9.
7. Yagang, F. (1993). Listening: Problems and Solutions, English Teaching Forum,
January 31, pp. 16-19.
8. Arif Saricoban, Hacettepe University (Beytepe-Ankara, Turkey), arifs [at] hun.
edu. tr

CHAPTER 12 Page 138
Task:
Define Speaking.
Speaking is "the process of building and sharing meaning through the use of verbal
and non-verbal symbols, in a variety of contexts" (Chaney, 1998, p. 13).
Task:
What is meant by “Teaching Speaking"? Mention at least four points.
_________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________
What is "Teaching Speaking"?
"Teaching speaking" is to teach ESL learners to:
 Produce the English speech sounds and sound patterns.
 Use words and sentence stress, intonation patterns and the rhythm of the
second language.
 Select appropriate words and sentences according to the proper social
setting, audience, situation and subject matter.
 Organise their thoughts in a meaningful and logical sequence.
 Use language as a means of expressing values and judgments.
 Use the language quickly and confidently with few unnatural pauses, which
is called fluency. (Nunan, 2003)
Task:
Mention the following:
 Role and characteristics of the teacher during the activity.
 Elements of a successful speaking activity.
The characteristics and roles of the teacher in the speaking skill are:
 Motivator
 Friendly (establisher of a good rapport)
 Humorous
 Active
 Communicator
 Facilitator
 Prompter

CHAPTER 12 Page 139
Elements of a successful speaking activity:

 Providing appropriate input
 Integrating skills
 Varity of aids
 Creating a purpose for speaking
 Based on real life situation
 Tailored to the needs
 Increase the learners’ role and responsibility
- Learner-centred activity
- Focus on the learner talk time
- Constant change in the mode of interaction
 Adjust feedback/error correction
- Choose the right time to correct students
- Choose the right way to correct
Task:
What are the types of speaking activities?
Types of Activities:
 Fluency-based
 Accuracy-based
 Communicative-based
According to William Littlewood, there is a continuum of classroom activities to
promote communicative competence:
Accuracy-based Activities Are Controlled Activities

They focus on the correct form of using the language; guidance from the teacher
on vocabulary, pronunciation, and grammar (linguistic competence); appropriate
things to say in specific contexts (discourse competence); expectations for rate of
speech, pause length, turn-taking, and other social aspects of language use
(sociolinguistic competence); and explicit instruction in phrases used to ask for
clarification and repair miscommunication (strategic competence).
Students may have options for responses, but all of the options require them to use
the specific form or structure that the teacher has just introduced. Although
Instructors often use accuracy-based exercises as a transition between the
presentation stage and the practice stage of a lesson plan. Textbook exercises also
often make good structured output practice activities.

CHAPTER 12 Page 140
Fluency-based Activities:
They focus on information and conveying the message, whether it is a simple
weather report or an extended lecture on an academic topic.
In Communicative-based Activities, the learners' main purpose is to complete a

task, such as obtaining information, developing a travel plan, or creating a video.
To complete the task, they may use the language that the instructor has just
presented, but they also may draw on any other vocabulary, grammar, and
communication strategies that they know. In communicative output activities, the
criterion of success is whether the learner gets the message across. Accuracy is not
a consideration unless the lack of it interferes with the message.
In everyday communication, spoken exchanges take place because there is some
sort of information gap between the participants. Communicative output activities
involve a similar real information gap. In order to complete the task, students must
reduce or eliminate the information gap. In these activities, language is a tool, not
an end in itself.
In balanced activities approach, the teacher uses a variety of activities from these
different categories. Learners at all proficiency levels, including beginners, benefit
from this variety; it is more motivating, and it is also more likely to result in effective
language learning.
Types of Accuracy-based Activities:

1. Using Minimal Responses:
Language learners who lack confidence in their ability to participate successfully in
oral interaction often listen in silence while others do the talking. One way to
encourage such learners to begin to participate is to help them build up a stock of
minimal responses that they can use in different types of exchanges. Such
responses can be especially useful for beginners.
Minimal responses are predictable, often idiomatic phrases that conversation
participants use to indicate understanding, agreement, doubt, and other responses
to what another speaker is saying. Having a stock of such responses enables a
learner to focus on what the other participant is saying, without having to
simultaneously plan a response.
Sample Minimal Responses:

Agreeing with what was said: absolutely, yes, that's right, of course.
Politely disagreeing: well, not really, perhaps not quite that bad, maybe not.
Indicating possible doubt: really?, are you sure?
Agreeing to cooperate or not: yes, of course, okay, sorry, I can't, I'm afraid not.
Expressing an opinion: that's nice, how lucky!, that's too bad.
Expressing interest, encouraging the speaker to continue: what happened next?,
that's really interesting, what did you do?

CHAPTER 12 Page 141
2. Recognisng Scripts:
Some communication situations are associated with a predictable set of spoken
exchanges, a script. Greetings, apologies, compliments, invitations, and other
functions that are influenced by social and cultural norms often follow patterns or
scripts. So do the transactional exchanges involved in activities such as obtaining
information and making a purchase. In these scripts, the relationship between a
speaker's turn and the one that follows it can often be anticipated.
Instructors can help students develop speaking ability by making them aware of the
scripts for different situations so that they can predict what they will hear and what
they will need to say in response. Through interactive activities, instructors can give
students practice in managing and varying the language that different scripts
contain.
Sample Scripts
Scripted Transactional Exchange:
A: May I help you?
B: I'd like to buy two movie tickets, please.
A: Which film? "Attack of the Nightmare Monsters" or "World's Stupidest Love
Story"?
B: Nightmare Monsters.
A: That will be $20.
B: Here you go. Thanks.
Scripted Interaction Exchange:

A: Hey! How have you been? I haven't seen you in a long time.
B: Yeah, I had the flu, so I was out for a while.
A: Oh, that's too bad. I hope you're feeling better.
B: Getting there. It takes a long time.
Gambits:
In the early stages of conversational development, students can be taught to take
part by responding to what somebody else has said, by producing an appropriate
response or "gambit".
Here's a list of what we might teach:
1. Language to Indicate the Speaker's Agreement with What Has Been Said:
- Yes, it is.
- Yes, that's right.
- Of course, it is.
- Quite, absolutely true.
- Yes, I do / Yes, he was / Yes, they were….

CHAPTER 12 Page 142
2. Language Which Indicates Polite Disagreement:

- Well, not really.
- Not quite, no.
- Perhaps not quite as bad/good/difficult as that.
- Em, I don't know.
3. Language to Indicate Possible Doubt:
- I'm not quite sure.
- Really?
- Is that right?
- Is that so?
- Are you sure?
4. Language to Provide Positive and Negative Feedback:
- Great!
- That's nice.
- Very nice indeed (good, clear, pretty)…
- Really nice.
- Sounds lovely! (informal)
- Not very nice.
- No at all nice/clear …
- Very nasty indeed (disagreeable, bad, noisy) …
- Sounds awful. (informal)
5. Language to Encourage Confirmation and More Information:
- Is that right?
- Really?
- No kidding? (informal)
- You're not!
One way of getting students used to the function of short responses is to build them
into drills. Although such practice is semi-mechanical, students enjoy the challenge
of getting the stress and intonation of the short response right. The important thing is
not to use drills too extensively.
Usage of Clarification Phrases:
When unsure of the speaker’s meaning, repeat what you think the speaker said in
the form of a question:
Ex: Excuse me; did you say that the sun rises in the west?
When you have missed most of the meaning, ask the speaker to repeat:
Ex: Could you say that again, please?
When you do not know the word for something, describe it and ask its name.
Ex: What do you call the stuff that falls out of the sky that is rain but frozen?
When you think the other person has misunderstood you, repeat what you said
then say it in another way:
Ex: I’m sorry, I didn’t express myself clearly. I said the plane leaves at three-thirty.
Half past three.

CHAPTER 12 Page 143
Developing Communicative-based Activities:

As we have seen, accuracy-based speaking often takes the form of drills in which
one person asks a question and another gives an answer. The question and the
answer are structured and predictable, and often there is only one correct,
predetermined answer. The purpose of asking and answering the question is to
demonstrate the ability to ask and answer the question.
In contrast, the purpose of real communication is to accomplish a task, such as
conveying a telephone message, obtaining information, or expressing an opinion.
In real communication, participants must manage uncertainty about what the
other person will say. Authentic communication involves an information gap; each
participant has information that the other does not have. In addition, to achieve
their purpose, participants may have to clarify their meaning or ask for confirmation
of their own understanding.
To create classroom speaking activities that will develop communicative
competence, instructors need to incorporate a purpose and an information gap
and allow for multiple forms of expression. However, quantity alone will not
necessarily produce competent speakers. Instructors need to combine structured
output activities, which allow for error correction and increased accuracy, with
communicative output activities that give students opportunities to practise
language use more freely.
Task:
Write a list of activities that could be used to promote fluency.
A. Structured Output Activities:

Information Gap:
In this activity, students are supposed to be working in pairs. One student will have
the information that other partner does not have and partners will share their
information. Information gap activities serve many purposes such as solving a
problem or collecting information. Also, each partner plays an important role
because the task cannot be completed if partners do not provide the information
the others need. These activities are effective because everybody has the
opportunity to talk extensively in the target language.

CHAPTER 12 Page 144
Jigsaw Activities:
Jigsaw activities are more elaborate information gap activities that can be done
with several partners. In a jigsaw activity, each partner has one or a few pieces of
the "puzzle," and the partners must cooperate to fit all the pieces into a whole
picture. The puzzle piece may take one of several forms. It may be one panel from,
a comic strip or one photo from a set that tells a story. It may be one sentence from
a written narrative. It may be a tape recording of a conversation, in which case no
two partners hear exactly the same conversation.
In one fairly simple jigsaw activity, students work in groups of four. Each student in
the group receives one panel from a comic strip. Partners may not show each
other their panels. Together the four panels present this narrative: a man takes a
container of ice cream from the freezer; he serves himself several scoops of ice
cream; he sits in front of the TV eating his ice cream; he returns with the empty bowl
to the kitchen and finds that he left the container of ice cream, now melting, on
the kitchen counter. These pictures have a clear narrative line and the partners are
not likely to disagree about the appropriate sequencing. You can make the task
more demanding, however, by using pictures that lend themselves to alternative
sequences, so that partners have to negotiate among themselves to agree on a
satisfactory sequence.
More elaborate jigsaws may proceed in two stages. Students first work in input
groups (groups A, B, C, and D) to receive information. Each group receives a
different part of the total information for the task. Students then reorganise into
groups of four with one student each from A, B, C, and D, and use the information
they received to complete the task. Such an organisation could be used, for
example, when the input is given in the form of a tape recording. Groups A, B, C,
and D each hear a different recording of a short news bulletin. The four recordings
all contain the same general information, but each has one or more details that
the others do not. In the second stage, students reconstruct the complete story by
comparing the four versions.
Find the Difference:
For this activity students can work in pairs and each couple is given two different
pictures, for example, picture of boys playing football and another picture of girls
playing tennis. Students in pairs discuss the similarities and/or differences in the
pictures.
B. Communicative Output Activities:
Interviews:
Students can conduct interviews on selected topics with various people. It is a
good idea that the teacher provides a rubric to students so that they know what
type of questions they can ask or what path to follow, but students should prepare
their own interview questions. Conducting interviews with people gives students a
chance to practise their speaking ability not only in class but also outside and helps
them becoming socialised. After interviews, each student can present his or her
study to the class. Moreover, students can interview each other and "introduce" his
or her partner to the class.

CHAPTER 12 Page 145
Reporting:
Before coming to class, students are asked to read a newspaper or magazine and,
in class, they report to their friends what they find as the most interesting news.
Students can also talk about whether they have experienced anything worth telling
their friends in their daily lives before class.
Discussions:
After a content-based lesson, a discussion can be held for various reasons. The
students may aim to arrive at a conclusion, share ideas about an event, or find
solutions in their discussion groups. Before the discussion, it is essential that the
purpose of the discussion activity is set by the teacher. In this way, the discussion
points are relevant to this purpose, so that students do not spend their time chatting
with each other about irrelevant things. For example, students can become
involved in agree/disagree discussions. In this type of discussions, the teacher can
form groups of students, preferably four or five in each group, and provide
controversial sentences like “people learn best when they read vs. people learn
best when they travel”. Then each group works on their topic for a given time
period, and presents their opinions to the class. It is essential that the speaking
should be equally divided among group members. At the end, the class decides
on the winning group who defended the idea in the best way. This activity fosters
critical thinking and quick decision making, and students learn how to express and
justify themselves in polite ways while disagreeing with the others. For efficient
group discussions, it is always better not to form large groups, because quiet
students may avoid contributing in large groups. The group members can be either
assigned by the teacher or the students may determine it by themselves, but
groups should be rearranged in every discussion activity so that students can work
with various people and learn to be open to different ideas. Lastly, in class or group
discussions, whatever the aim is, the students should always be encouraged to ask
questions, paraphrase ideas, express support, check for clarification, and so on.
Discussions, interviews and reporting succeed when the instructor prepares students
first, and then gets out of the way. To succeed with discussions:
 Prepare the Students: Give them input (both topical information and language
forms) so that they will have something to say and the language with which to
say it.
 Offer Choices: Let students suggest the topic for discussion or choose from
several options. Discussion does not always have to be about serious issues.
Students are likely to be more motivated to participate if the topic is television
programmes, plans for a vacation, or news about mutual friends. Weighty
topics like how to combat pollution are not as engaging and place heavy
demands on students' linguistic competence.
 Set a Goal or Outcome: This can be a group product, such as a letter to the
editor, or individual reports on the views of others in the group.
 Use Small Groups Instead of Whole-Class Discussion: Large groups can make
participation difficult.

CHAPTER 12 Page 146
 Keep it Short: Give students a defined period of time, not more than 8-10
minutes, for discussion. Allow them to stop sooner if they run out of things to say.
 Allow Students to Participate in Their Own Way: Not every student will feel
comfortable talking about every topic. Do not expect all of them to contribute
equally to the conversation.
 Do Topical Follow-Up: Have students report to the class on the results of their
discussion.
 Do Linguistic Follow-Up: After the discussion is over, give feedback on grammar
or pronunciation problems you have heard. This can wait until another class
period when you plan to review pronunciation or grammar anyway.
Storytelling:
Students can briefly summarise a tale or story they heard from somebody
beforehand, or they may create their own stories to tell their classmates. Story
telling fosters creative thinking. It also helps students express ideas in the format of
beginning, development, and ending, including the characters and setting a story
has to have. Students also can tell riddles or jokes. For instance, at the very
beginning of each class session, the teacher may call few students to tell short
riddles or jokes as an opening. In this way, not only will the teacher address
students’ speaking ability, but also get the attention of the class.
Story Completion:
This is a very enjoyable, whole-class, free-speaking activity for which students sits in
a circle. For this activity, a teacher starts to tell a story, but after a few sentences he
or she stops narrating. Then, each student starts to narrate from the point where the
previous one stopped. Each student is supposed to add from four to ten sentences.
Students can add new characters, events, descriptions and so on.
Picture Narrating:
This activity is based on several sequential pictures. Students are asked to tell the
story taking place in the sequential pictures by paying attention to the criteria
provided by the teacher as a rubric. Rubrics can include the vocabulary or
structures they need to use while narrating.
Picture Describing:
Another way to make use of pictures in a speaking activity is to give students just
one picture and having them describe what it is in the picture. For this activity
students can form groups and each group is given a different picture. Students
discuss the picture with their groups, then a spokesperson for each group describes
the picture to the whole class. This activity fosters the creativity and imagination of
the learners as well as their public speaking skills.

CHAPTER 12 Page 147
Simulations:
Simulations are very similar to role-plays but what makes simulations different than
role plays is that they are more elaborate. In simulations, students can bring items to
the class to create a realistic environment. For instance, if a student is acting as a
singer, she brings a microphone to sing and so on.
Role-plays and simulations have many advantages. First, since they are
entertaining, they motivate the students. Second, as Harmer (1984) suggests, they
increase the self-confidence of hesitant students, because in role-play and
simulation activities, they will have a different role and do not have to speak for
themselves, which means they do not have to take the same responsibility.
Role-Play:
One other way of getting students to speak is role-playing. Students pretend they
are in various social contexts and have a variety of social roles. In role-play
activities, the teacher gives information to the learners such as who they are and
what they think or feel. Thus, the teacher can tell the student that "You are David,
you go to the doctor and tell him what happened last night, and…" (Harmer, 1984)
Students usually find role playing and simulation enjoyable, but students who lack
self-confidence or have lower proficiency levels may find them intimidating at first.
To succeed with role-plays:
 Prepare Carefully: introduce the activity by describing the situation and
making sure that all of the students understand it.
 Set a Goal or Outcome: be sure that students understand what the product of
the role-play should be, whether a plan, a schedule, a group opinion, or
some other product.
 Use Role Cards: give each student a card that describes the person or role to
be played. For lower-level students, the cards can include words or
expressions that that person might use.
 Brainstorm: before you start the role-play, have students brainstorm as a class
to predict what vocabulary, grammar, and idiomatic expressions they might
use.
 Keep Groups Small: less-confident students will feel more able to participate if
they do not have to compete with many voices.
 Give Students Time to Prepare: let them work individually to outline their ideas
and the language they will need to express them.
 Be Present As a Resource, Not a Monitor: stay in communicative mode to
answer students' questions. Do not correct their pronunciation or grammar
unless they specifically ask you about it.
 Allow Students to Work at Their Own Levels: each student has individual
language skills, an individual approach to working in groups, and a specific
role to play in the activity. Do not expect all students to contribute equally to
the discussion, or to use every grammar point you have taught.

CHAPTER 12 Page 148
 Do Topical Follow-Up: have students report to the class on the outcome of

their role-plays.
 Do Linguistic Follow-Up: after the role-play is over, give feedback on grammar
or pronunciation problems you have heard. This can wait until another class
period when you plan to review pronunciation or grammar anyway.
Brainstorming:
On a given topic, students can produce ideas in a limited time. Depending on the
context, either individual or group brainstorming is effective and learners generate
ideas quickly and freely. The good characteristics of brainstorming are that the
students are not criticised for their ideas so students will be open to sharing new
ideas.
Dialogue Building:
The use of cues or prompts to build up dialogues is a commonly-used technique.
Cues or prompts determine the content of what is said, and dialogue building
activities can range from being highly controlled to very free. Dialogue building is
not a substitute for fluency work, but used sparingly to allow the possibility of giving
weaker students a chance to say something.
Playing Cards:
In this game, students should form groups of four. Each suit will represent a topic. For
instance:
 Diamonds: Earning money
 Hearts: Love and relationships
 Spades: An unforgettable memory
 Clubs: Best teacher
Each student in a group will choose a card. Then, each student will write 4-5
questions about that topic to ask the other people in the group. For example:
If the topic "Diamonds: Earning Money" is selected, here are some possible
questions:
 Is money important in your life? Why?
 What is the easiest way of earning money?
 What do you think about lottery? Etc.
However, the teacher should state at the very beginning of the activity that
students are not allowed to prepare yes-no questions, because by saying yes or no
students get little practice in spoken language production. Rather, students ask
open-ended questions to each other so that they reply in complete sentences.
Through well-prepared communicative output activities, such as role plays and
discussions, you can encourage students to experiment and innovate with the
language, and create a supportive atmosphere that allows them to make mistakes
without fear of embarrassment. This will contribute to their self-confidence as
speakers and to their motivation to learn more.

CHAPTER 12 Page 149
Feedback:
Evaluation of the success or failure of conversational performance is not an easy
job. In conversation, a variety of factors, including the speaker's accent, control of
grammar and vocabulary, as well as overall fluency, all contribute to any
impression of the performance. The objective of feedback is to give students the
information they need to improve on their performance. Areas for feedback in
activities aiming at the development of communicative skills include:
- Grammar
- Appropriacy of vocabulary and expressions
- Fluency
- Pronunciation
- Non-linguistic factors affecting communication
Feedback needs to be staged and selective if it is to avoid demoralising the
students. To achieve this, teachers need to decide on the areas of communicative
performance most relevant to their students. Once the decision is made, it is a
question of focusing on the chosen areas in turn until students reach the required
performance level. To assist this process, teachers need to be continually aware of
students' performance and progress. One way of doing this might be keeping a
record card for each student similar to the one below:
Name Date Nature of Task Grammatical Appropriacy Fluency & Overall

(short talk etc.) Correctness of Vocabulary Pronunciation Performance
Another way might be to use a tape recorder during speaking activities. In this way,
it gets easier for the teacher to identify areas of weakness which can form the basis
of subsequent lessons focusing on accuracy, the presentation of new language,
etc. Other advantages of using tape recordings of students at work include:
 The opportunity for students to hear again their own performance
 The opportunity to look objectively at how students develop over a period of time
It is important for teachers to correct mistakes made during speaking activities in a

different way from the mistakes made during a study exercise. When students are
repeating sentences trying to get their pronunciation right, the teacher will often
correct (appropriately) every time there is a problem. But if students are involved in
a passionate discussion about whether smoking should be banned anywhere, the
effect of constant interruption from the teacher will destroy the conversational flow,
thus mining the purpose of the speaking activity.
It is a good idea to watch and listen while speaking activities are taking place,
noting down things that seemed to go well and times when students could not
make themselves understood or made important mistakes. At the end of the
speaking activity the teacher can write the mistakes on the board or on an OHP
asking students to correct them. As with any kind of correction, it is important not to
correct single students out for particular criticism.
<http://www.nclrc.org/essentials/index.htm>

CHAPTER 12 Page 150
Appendix A:
Suggestions for Teachers in Teaching Speaking:
Here are some suggestions for English language teachers while teaching oral
language:
 Provide maximum opportunity to students to speak the target language by
providing a rich environment that contains collaborative work, authentic
materials and tasks, and shared knowledge.
 Try to involve each student in every speaking activity; for this aim, practise
different ways of student participation.
 Reduce teacher speaking time in class while increasing student speaking time.
 Step back and observe students.
 Indicate positive signs when commenting on a student's response.
 Ask eliciting questions such as "What do you mean? How did you reach that
conclusion?" in order to prompt students to speak more.
 Provide written feedback like "Your presentation was really great. It was a good
job. I really appreciated your efforts in preparing the materials and efficient use
of your voice…"
 Do not correct students' pronunciation mistakes very often while they are
speaking. Correction should not distract student from his or her speech.
 Involve speaking activities not only in class but also out of class; contact
parents and other people who can help.
 Circulate around classroom to ensure that students are on the right track and
see whether they need your help while they work in groups or pairs.
 Provide the vocabulary beforehand that students need in speaking activities.
 Diagnose problems faced by students who have difficulty in expressing
themselves in the target language and provide more opportunities to practise
the spoken language.
To achieve this you need to ask yourself the following questions;
 Empathise with Your Students: if you were one of them, how would you feel? Why
would you rather sit quietly in the back row hoping your teacher takes no notice
of you than engage in a passionate attack against ethnic cleansing?
 Pause and Consider: when you were a student, did you take part in any lesson
which dealt with discussing a specific issue? Did you talk a lot? Who talked the
most?
 As a teacher, have you ever favoured discussion in class (obviously using L2)?
Were your lessons successful or were you not satisfied with them? In either case,
which were the issues you discussed?
Some Simple Techniques Which Can Be Used to Prepare Students for a Particular
Topic are the Following:
- The use of audio/visual aids to arouse interest.
- A general orientation to the topic; a short text, questionnaire, a video extract.
(This pre-speaking task must never be too long but it is recommended)
- Exercises focusing on key words needed for a task.

CHAPTER 12 Page 151
Many students have to overcome a psychological barrier before they are

prepared to speak in the foreign language. Some students feel uneasy when they
have to speak in the classroom situation because there is always an audience;
others contribute in the sheltered environment of the classroom but are at a loss
when they have to use the language outside. Few prefer not to speak at all and
are then denied opportunities for practice.
Appendix B:
Following are sample lesson plans that build up personal security through the use of
getting-to-know-you activities which promote trust as well as articulation activities
which give the opportunity to use English sounds in a safe environment.
Following are samples of getting-to-know-you activities. They are meant to build a
positive atmosphere of trust within a group.
Chain Names
Level Any level (including beginners) (from A1)
5 – 10 minutes
Time
Aim Introducing students to each other
Preparation None
Procedure 1. Ask the students to sit in a semi-circle and nominate one student to
introduce himself / herself.
2. The person next to him/her must then repeat his/her name, and then
introduce himself/herself.
3. Ask your students to repeat this procedure around the semi-circle,
each one repeating the name of the person before them and
then saying their own name. for example:
a. I'm Roberto.
b. Roberto, I'm Paola.
c. Roberto, Paola. I'm Francesco.
d. Roberto, Paola, Francesco. I'm Giulia.
More advanced students might tackle the following:
a. I'm Francesco. I'm from Mestre.
b. He's Francesco. Hje's from Mestre. I'm Bianca, and I'm from
Marcon.
c. He's Francesco. He's from Mestre. She's Bianca. She's from
Marcon. I'm Piero, and I'm from Mirano.
1. Twelve represents a maximum number for this activity. (Split the class
Remarks
into semi-circles if the students are more.)
2. You should always take a turn to show you are learning too.

CHAPTER 12 Page 152
The names for the different kinds of activities within communicative competence
and the examples are taken from Rob Nolasco, Lois Arthur, Conversation, Oxford
University Press, 1987, which has offered plenty of ideas for the writing of this
module.
Guess who
Level Elementary to intermediate (A2 to B2)
Time 15 – 20 minutes
Aim Students are given statements of personal information about other

students and they have to ask questions in order to establish the
person's identity.
Preparation Have available enough small pieces of paper for the whole class.
1. Give each of your students a piece of paper and ask them to

Procedure write four facts about themselves. These can be anything they
choose, e.g. I was born in February, I own a bicycle, I like Limp
Bizkit etc. as long as the statement is true.
2. Tell the students to fold their pieces of paper and pass them
anonymously to the front of the class.
3. Collect them together and then redistribute them so that each
student has personal information about another student.
4. Once students have had a chance to look at the personal in-
formation, tell them that they will have to find out whose infor-
mation they have by turning the statements into questions, and
then asking other students those questions. You can exercise
control over the activity in a variety of ways:
 By deciding on the form of the question which is allowable,
such as Who was born in February?
 By deciding whether to nominate students to speak or to
allow them free choice.
 By deciding whether or not to allow students to move about.
5. Once you have decided on the rules for the activity, you can
set it in motion. The activity ends when everybody has found
out whose personal information they have.
Remarks If the initial statements were collected in the previous lesson, or

copied out two or three times, you could distribute more than one
set of information to each student. This would be needed to make
a mingling activity more successful.

CHAPTER 12 Page 153
Articulation Activities:
When students come to speak in a foreign language they often find themselves
inhibited by the prospects of having to make what to them are strange and even
comic sounds. One way to tackle this problem is to give students the opportunity to
experiment with sounds.
Listen and Record
Level Elementary and above (from A2)
Aim For students: making a recording after listening carefully to a taped

model.
Preparation Select a natural model for students to imitate.
Ask the students to listen to the tape and to repeat any of the utter-
Procedure ances they have heard, until they are ready to be recorded. The activ-
ity is self-directed, but you should be available for consultation. The fin-
ished product can be a subject of feedback and evaluation.
Remarks The activity is self-regulatory. This is important because students are not
to be threatened by having to repeat something they feel uncertain
about. This activity also fosters the notion of rehearsing what we are
about to say, something many people do in their own language, any-
way.
Following are a List of Sample Lessons Used for Multi Purposes:

Awareness Activities:
Students need to become aware of what native speakers do in conversation if they
are themselves to achieve communicative competence in the target language.
The focus of the awareness activities will be then on promoting the following issues:
- The ability to "sound" English by drawing attention to critical elements which can
be usefully imitated (weak forms).
- Development of the ability to interpret what is being said.
- A feeling for what is appropriate in conversation.
- Awareness of strategies used to further conversation.
- Awareness of the target culture.
- Awareness of activities that can be used from the earliest stages of learning.
Observation Tasks:
They are used to encourage students to become sensitive to particular features of
conversation. Observation should always be directed through the use of task sheets
and these can be used to focus on:
- Audio recordings of people talking.

CHAPTER 12 Page 154
- Video recordings of people talking.

- Conversations as they occur in real time.
The simplest observation tasks require the observer to mark the presence or
absence of a particular feature.
Encouraging Noises
Aim Making students sensitive to expressions which encourage the other

speaker to continue.
Preparation Select an audio or video tape that contains examples of this type of ex-
pressions. Hand out the task sheet below to the students.
Task Sheet Listen to the extract of people talking. Make a tick (√ ) next to each of the
expressions in the list whenever you hear one of the speakers using it:
- Ready? - Uh huh.
- Does he? - Is it?
- Is that right? - Yes.
- That’s nice. - I see.
- How interesting. - Mmmm.
Procedure 1. Introduce the task so that the students get some idea of what they are
looking for.
2. Give out a copy of the task sheet to each student.
3. Play the tape two or three times before focusing on the specific expres-
sions in context.
Cross-cultural awareness
If we accept the fact that language is embedded in culture, then some elements
of cross-cultural training are inevitable and the inclusion of some cross-cultural work
in the teaching of communicative skills would seem to offer the following
advantages:
- Cross-cultural issue can generate discussion in their own right.
- Knowledge of why people in the English culture behave in certain ways should
make native speakers easier to interpret.
- Sensitivity to the ways social norms operate in other languages should make the
learning of certain areas of language (such as politeness formulae) easier.
- If students become aware of issues such as social taboos, they are less likely to
cause offence by breaking them. Besides, they would begin to fall into the
category of foreigner that native speakers find easy to talk to.

CHAPTER 12 Page 155
Culture Shock!
Level Pre-intermediate and above (from A2 / B1)
Aim For students: discussing the problems people encounter when they have
to live in a new country for a period of time.
Preparation Make photocopies of the task sheet below.
Procedure 1. Introduce the topic and give out a task sheet to each student.
2. Divide the students into small groups after they have had the chance
to complete the task individually.
3. Chair a feedback session to see what generalisations emerge.
Remain as neutral as possible throughout.
4. If students have not had experience of living in a foreign country, you
can ask them to imagine how strangers might feel.
Remarks If students going to an English-speaking country to study English realise

that settling-in problems occur anywhere, learning should be promoted.
Task Sheet Here are some difficulties people encounter when living in a new coun-
try. Please indicate with a tick (√ ) how important each one has been or
would be for you.
Of Very Of Great Of Some Of No

Great Im- Impor- Impor- Impor-
portance tance tance tance
1– Differences in the weather

2- Being away from the family
3- Differences in the food
4- Differences in the way people make
friends
5- Transportation problems
6- Getting used to new ways of
learning
7- Adjusting to new ways of doing
things, e.g. shopping
8- Difficulties in communicating one's
own ideas
9- Different living conditions
10- Different social customs
11- Getting newspapers and maga-
zines from home
12- Meeting people from the same
country
13- Knowing what to do in everyday
situations
14- Other (please specify)

CHAPTER 12 Page 156
The activity that follows is a very simple one aimed at introducing students to
fluency activities.
I Hated Math – Did You?
Aim Introducing students to fluency activities
Preparation Prepare a task sheet along the following lines, and make photocopies.
Task Sheet Look at this list of subjects we study in school:

- English
- Geography
- Physical Education
- Chemistry
- Italian Literature
- Mathematics
- Physics
- History
- Art
Work individually for five minutes. Choose one of the subjects you particu-
larly like and list three reasons for liking it. Choose one of the subjects you
particularly dislike and list three reasons for disliking it.
Now go around the class and find out if anyone likes or dislikes the same
subjects as you. Find out the reasons people gave for liking or disliking a
subject and make a list under the headings below:
Reasons for Liking a Subject Reasons for Disliking a Subject
Procedure 1. Warm your students up for the task by getting them to list the subjects
they did in school. This will check that they know the name of the sub-
jects in English.
2. Give each student a task sheet and explain that they have a maximum
of 15 minutes to go round the class. When they have finished, run a
feedback session for the whole class and ask questions such as:
- Who likes / dislikes the same subjects?
- What are the most common reasons for liking / disliking particular sub-
jects?
3. Get the students to expand and comment on the reasons given.

CHAPTER 12 Page 157
Ranking Activities:
In ranking activities students are required to put the items from a given list into an
order of importance or preference. This rearranging phase is usually followed by a
period of discussion when students explain or defend their choice. One of the best
known of these activities is "Castaway" in which students have to choose the most
essential items to survive on a desert island for three months.
A standard procedure for ranking activities is as follows:
 Familiarise the students with the task through oral presentation.
 Arouse their interest and go through key words.
 The students work individually and write down their solutions. Set a time limit.
Eureka!
Level Pre-intermediate and above (from B1)
Aim Promoting discussion about inventions
Preparation
Put the following list of inventions in random order on a handout or
OHT. Do not include the dates.
- Gunpowder 1000
- Atomic bomb 1945
- Wheel 3000 BC
- Screw 200 BC
- Paper 105
- Printing 1440
- Microscope 1608
- Telephone 1876
- Motor car 1885
- Aero plane 1903
Procedure 1. Ask the students to work in pairs to decide on the approximate

date for each of the inventions. When they have done this, ask
them to put the inventions in the order of their appearance, with
the earliest inventions first. Allow them to check the answers with
you.
2. Now ask each pair to choose from the list three inventions that
have had the most positive effect on civilisation, as well as the
three that had the most negative effect. They should discuss their
choice with another pair and agree on a joint list.
3. Finally, chair a feedback session in which each group presents its
list. See if the class can come to a consensus.
Remarks Students are likely to have different interpretations of the words

"positive" and "negative". This is worth exploiting, so allow them to
settle the argument themselves.

CHAPTER 13 Page 159
Task:
What is writing?
Writing is one of the four language skills: reading, writing, listening and speaking.
Writing and speaking are productive skills. That means they involve producing
language rather than receiving it. Very simply, we can say that writing involves
communicating a message (something to say) by making signs on a page. To write
we need a message and someone to communicate it to. We also need to be able
to form letters and words, and to join these together to make words, sentences or a
series of sentences that link together to communicate that message.
Task:
What do we write in our real life?
Examples of written text types are;

 shopping list
 a postcard/a birthday card
 emails
 diary
 A story
 an essay
These text types involve different kinds of writing, e.g. single words only, short
sentences or long sentences. Some are written in note form, others need addresses
or special layouts. They also require different ways of ordering information. When
students learn to write, they need to learn how to deal with these different features.
Writing involves several sub-skills; some of these are related to accuracy:
 using the correct form of the language.
 using correct spelling and layouts.
 using grammar and punctuation marks correctly.
 writing legibly and choosing the right vocabulary.
 joining sentences and using paragraph correctly.
 Other sub-skills are related to fluency; they involve having a message and
communicating it successfully to other people. To do this, students need to;
- have enough ideas,
- organise them well,
- express them in an appropriate style.

CHAPTER 13 Page 160
The table below is from a writing syllabus for primary-school children. The column on
the left focuses on accuracy, and the column on the right focuses on
communication.
- Showing an understanding that - Completing simple poems and rhymes
letters can be combined to form with some language support and
words, and producing letter shapes, based on models.
including capital letters, correctly. - Expressing your own experience by
- Employing a range of connectives to supplying labels for your own drawings.
express sequence (e.g. next, then). - Making simple greetings cards and
invitations based on models.
- Responding to greetings and invitations
in short notes based on models.
(adapted from Syllabuses for primary Schools, English Language, Primary1-6 the Education Department Hong-Kong
1997)
The Nature of the Writing Process:

Writing is a complex process that allows writers to explore thoughts and ideas, and
make them visible and concrete. Writing encourages thinking and learning for it
motivates communication and makes thought available for reflection. When
thought is written down, ideas can be examined, reconsidered, added to,
rearranged, and changed.
Writing is most likely to encourage thinking and learning when students view writing
as a process. By recognising that writing is a recursive process, and that every writer
uses the process in a different way, students experience less pressure to "get it right
the first time" and are more willing to experiment, explore, revise, and edit. Yet,
novice writers need to practise “writing” or exercises that involve copying or
reproduction of learned material in order to learn the conventions of spelling,
punctuation, grammatical agreement, and the like. Furthermore, students need to
“write in the language” through engaging in a variety of grammar practice
activities of controlled nature. Finally, they need to begin to write within a
framework “flexibility measures” that include: transformation exercises, sentence
combining, expansion, embellishments, idea frames, and similar activities).
Task:
What are the different stages that writers pass through?
Obviously, not all students of the same age or grade level write in the same way;
students pass through several developmental writing stages:

CHAPTER 13 Page 161
Stage 1:
Novice Writer (unskilled, unaware, teacher-dependent writer)
- Has little, if any, individual style.
- Has little awareness of writing process.
- Has undeveloped skills and techniques.
- Seeks approval from teacher.
- Is reluctant to revise any writing.
- Believes good writing comes easily.
Stage 2:
Transitional Writer (transitional, self-involved, self-delineating writer)
- Needs support and coaching in order to develop.
- Learns from modeled behaviours.
- Is developing a degree of comfort with the craft.
- Is anxious to stand alone, yet is uncomfortable with peer collaboration.
- Is developing an awareness of personal needs, interests, and preoccupations.
Stage 3:
Willing Writer (peer-involved, willing writer)
- Is able to collaborate well with others.
- Requires external feedback to shape progress.
- Is able to profit from criticism.
- Is developing objectivity concerning work.
- Enjoys practising craft.
- is developing a sensitivity to audience.
Stage 4:
Independent Writer (independent, autonomous writer)
- Makes highly objective self-assessments.
- Has developed a sophisticated personal style.
- Has developed a writer's voice.
- Takes risks and experiments.
- Is self-motivating and self-aware as a writer.
- Is a craftsperson.
The most popular approach in writing involves going through a number of stages.
When we write outside the classroom we often go through these stages:
 Brainstorming (thinking of everything we can know about the topic)
 Making notes
 Planning (organising our ideas)
 Writing a draft (a piece of writing that is not yet finished. and may be changed)
 Editing (correcting and improving the text)
 Producing another draft.
 Proof-reading (checking for mistakes in accuracy) or editing again.
These are the stages of the Witting Process. However the writing process is not the
only writing approach.

CHAPTER 13 Page 162
Task:
Can you think of other writing approaches?
Approaches to Teaching Writing:

There are several approaches to teaching writing that are presented by (Raimes,
1983) as follows:
A. The Controlled-to-Free Approach:
In the 1950s and early 1960, the audio-lingual method dominated second-
language learning. This method emphasised speech and writing served to achieve
mastery of grammatical and syntactic forms. Hence teachers developed and used
techniques to enable student to achieve this mastery. The controlled-to-free
approach is sequential: students are first given sentence exercises, then
paragraphs to copy or manipulate grammatically by changing questions to
statements, present to past, or plural to singular. They might also change words to
clauses or combine sentences. With these controlled compositions, it is relatively
easy for students to write and yet avoid errors, which makes error correction easy.
Students are allowed to try some free composition after they have reached an
intermediate level of proficiency. As such, this approach stress on grammar, syntax,
and mechanics. It emphasises accuracy rather than fluency or originality.
B. The Free-Writing Approach:
This approach stresses writing quantity rather than quality. Teachers who use this
approach assign vast amounts of free writing on given topics with only minimal
correction. The emphasis in this approach is on content and fluency rather than on
accuracy and form. Once ideas are down on the page, grammatical accuracy
and organisation follow. Thus, teachers may begin their classes by asking students
to write freely on any topic without worrying about grammar and spelling for five or
ten minutes. The teachers do not correct these pieces of free writing. They simply
read them and may comment on the ideas the writer expressed. Alternatively,
some students may volunteer to read their own writing aloud to the class. Concern
for “audience” and “content” are seen as important in this approach.
C. The Paragraph-Pattern Approach:
Instead of accuracy of grammar or fluency of content, the Paragraph-Pattern-
Approach stresses on organisation. Students copy paragraphs and imitate model
passages. They put scrambled sentences into paragraph order. They identify
general and specific statements and choose to invent an appropriate topic
sentence or insert or delete sentences. This approach is based on the principle that
in different cultures people construct and organise communication with each other
in different ways.

CHAPTER 13 Page 163
D. The Grammar-Syntax-Organisation Approach:

This approach stresses on simultaneous work more than on composition features.
Teachers who follow this approach maintain that writing cannot be seen as
composed of separate skills which are learned sequentially. Therefore, students
should be trained to pay attention to organisation while they also work on the
necessary grammar and syntax. This approach links the purpose of writing to the
forms that are needed to convey message.
E. The Communicative Approach:
This approach stresses on the purpose and the audience of writing. Students are
encouraged to behave like writers in real life and ask themselves the crucial
questions about purpose and audience:
- Why am I writing this?
- Who will read it?
Traditionally, teachers alone are the students’ audience. However, it is
recommended to give students real readers. This will make them do their best. By
extending readership to classmate and pen pals, writing becomes truly a
communicative act, with a writer writing for a real reader.
F. The Process Approach:
Recently, the teaching of writing has moved away from a concentration on written
product to an emphasis on the process of writing. Thus, writers ask themselves:
- How do I write this?
- How do I get started?
In this approach, students are trained to generate ideas for writing, think of the
purpose and audience, write multiple drafts in order to present written products
that communicate their own ideas. Teachers who use this approach give students
time to try ideas and feedback on the content of what they write in their drafts. As
such, writing becomes a process of discovery for the students as they discover new
ideas and new language forms to express them. Furthermore, learning to write is
seen as a developmental process that helps students to write professionally. By
choosing their own topics and genres, and writing from their own experiences or
observations, students’ creativity is unleashed. A writing process approach requires
that teachers give students greater responsibility and ownership of their own
learning. Students make decisions about genre and choice of topics, and
collaborate as they write.
During the writing process, students engage in pre-writing, planning, drafting, and
post-writing activities. However, as the writing process is recursive in nature, they do
not necessarily engage in these activities in that order.
Task:
The production of a clear and communicative piece of writing requires attention to
the elements of writing tabulated below. Put check mark in the appropriate
columns to indicate whether the different approaches address the elements of
writing based on what you have read.

CHAPTER 13 Page 164
Model Activities:
Word Grammar/
Content Process Audience Organisation Mechanics
choice Syntax
Controlled-to
. . . . . . .
Free
Free-Writing . . . . . . .
Paragraph-
. . . . . . .
Pattern
Grammar-
Syntax- . . . . . . .
Organisation
Communicative . . . . . . .
Activity 1: Simple Description with Visuals:

Have students examine a picture and ask them to name the objects in it. Then ask
students to write a paragraph to describe the picture. The procedure for the
activity may be as follows:
Provide the class with a picture of a room. Ask students to label the objects in the
picture and have them write a paragraph to describe the picture. Provide students
with expressions and language structure if needed such as: "In the classroom there
is" and have students complete the paragraph.
Activity 2: Completing a Descriptive Paragraph:
Have students examine a picture and complete a description paragraph. The
procedure for this activity may be as follows:
Examine the picture in Activity 1 and complete the following paragraph:
Paragraph:
Mary lives in a very nice room. In her room, there is a ———, ———, and a ———.
There are also several———. There are no ———, but Mary does have some ———.
She wants to get a ——— for her wall and a ——— for the desk this afternoon when
she goes shopping.
Activity 3: Completing a Descriptive Paragraph: (Function Words)
Give students a picture and have them complete a description by supplying the
prepositions and expressions required by the context.
The procedure for this activity may be as follows:
Have students examine the picture in Activity 1 and complete the following
paragraph:
This is a picture of Mary’s room. Her bed is ——— the window. ——— the bed and
the window is a small chest of drawers. There is a bookcase ——— her bed on the
———. She has a radio that is ——— the book case, and she puts her books ———
the book case ——— three shelves. ——— the room. She has a very nice desk
where she prepares her work for school.

CHAPTER 13 Page 165
Activity 4: Writing a Description from Questions:

Have students examine a picture and use a set of questions as a guide to write a
short description of the picture.
Examine the picture in Activity 1 and write a description of it, using the questions
below as guide lines.
Questions:
1. Does Mary have a nice room?
2. What kind of things does she have in the room?
3. What do you like in Mary’s room?
4. Do you have a room like Mary’s room? Describe your room in a few sentences.
Activity 5: Slash Sentences:
Give students a set of sentence cues and have them write a short narrative
paragraph.
Make complete sentences according to the model.
Model: The Smiths / Summer / in the country/ spend
The Smiths spend Summer in the country.
1. all / family / In the morning / to get up / around / 8’oclock.
2. Mr. Smith / the kitchen / coffee / to prepare / to go down stairs.
3. his / wife / then / breakfast / to go outside / in / the garden.
Activity 6: Sentence Combining:
Give students a set of propositions and have them combine them into complete
sentences:
Provide students with set of propositions such as the ones below:
1. The man is tall.
2. The man has dark hair.
3. The man is standing by the door.
4. The man looks suspicious
Have students combine the propositions in one sentence.
Activity 7: Composition Based on Oral Interview:
Have students interview a partner and a write composition telling what they
learned about the person they interviewed.
Have students interview a partner on certain topics and then have them write a
composition to tell what they had learned about this partner.
Sample Topics Would Include:
1. Talk about yourself and your family (i.e., where are you from, where your family
lives, your hobbies, etc…).
2. Talk about what you like and dislike about your school.
3. Describe a memorable event.
4. Describe your goals and future plans.
5. Describe a recent vacation.

CHAPTER 13 Page 166
Process Writing Activities:

The following process writing activities can be used in cycle I & II of Basic
Education.
Pre-writing: A Place to Start:
Pre-writing, the first stage in the writing process, begins long before the writer puts
thoughts into writing. The experiences, observations, and interactions that students
have prior to entering the classroom have an impact upon what they will write and
how they will write it. Within the classroom, pre-writing prompts and activities can
be integrated into the writing process as scaffolds by teachers to help students
generate ideas for their writing and to practise the thinking skills inherent in the
activity.
To initiate thinking and generate possible writing topics, it is important for students
to explore ideas for writing topics using a variety of pre-writing strategies, such as
the following:
 Brainstorming.
 Constructing thought webs and graphic organisers.
 Interviewing a person knowledgeable about the topic.
 Engaging in peer or teacher-student discussions and conferences.
 Listening to music.
 Reading about and researching the topic.
 Free writing or timed free writing about the topic.
 Viewing media such as pictures, movies, and television.
 Listing and categorising information.
 Reflecting upon personal experience.
 Examining writing models.
 Responding to literature.
 Role-playing and other drama techniques.
 Asking the fiver Ws--who, what, where, when and why.
To explore topics about which to write, the teacher may post suggestions on the
bulletin board for student reference. He/she may invite students to add their own
pre-writing strategies to ideas such as the following:
1. Brainstorming about People, Places, and Feelings:
Write down or tell a partner the names of people you could describe, then quickly
and briefly describe each one. Name several places you have visited and list
descriptive words for each place. List and describe some memorable feelings you
have had, and explain the situation in which they occurred.
2. Talking and Listening in Pairs or Groups:
Take turns telling about an interesting person, thing, incident, or object. Encourage
the listeners to ask questions and add ideas. Record possible writing topics or ideas
as they arise during the discussion.

CHAPTER 13 Page 167
3. Looking at Art:
Study paintings, photographs, drawings, or sculpture in magazines or art books. It
may even be useful to take a trip to a local museum or art gallery. Jot down notes
and questions about the artwork, the artist and the subject, and any topic ideas
that come to mind during the observation. It may help to talk over your information
and ideas with a partner or small group. Explain to a partner the stories in the art
works.
4. Listening to Music:
Listen to music you like best or a variety of new and unfamiliar music. Listen to tape
recordings or to the radio, closing your eyes and letting the music paint pictures in
your mind. Record these images as you listen, or turn off the music and quickly
record your ideas. It may be helpful to tell the story you have imagined to a partner
or group.
5. Role-Playing:
Pretend to be any character, ask peers to act as other characters, and dramatize
an event or incident, and what happened as a result of that incident or event.
6. Observing with All Senses:
Be aware of all that is happening around you, in the classroom, at home, in
restaurants, in malls, and wherever you go. Listen closely to conversations of the
people you observe, and try to capture the details of their manners and dress.
Observe for issues, problems, or achievements in your community. Jot down ideas
and notes as you observe them or as soon as possible after your observations.
7. Listing Ideas and Information:
List such things as the activities that interest you, the sports you play, the clubs that
you belong to, and the community and world issues that you know about from the
media.
8. Reading:
Read such things as non-fiction books, novels, magazines, stories, newspapers, and
poems. Jot down ideas that occur to you as you read and list questions you might
investigate further. Keep track of interesting vocabulary, story plots, and
characters.
9. Newspaper Searches:
Read the stories and captions that catch your interest. Jot down ideas for writing a
newspaper article or ideas that can be developed into other kinds of writing.
10. Author Visits:
As the authors share their writing and discuss the craft of writing, students gain
further understanding of the writing process and possibly get ideas for their own
writing.

CHAPTER 13 Page 168
Pre-writing prompts or activities planned by the teacher can serve as writing

scaffolds for inexperienced writers who have difficulty accessing their own feelings,
ideas, experiences, and knowledge. Teacher-planned pre-writing activities, such as
the samples that follow, give students a place to start and make them become
aware of places from which to get ideas in the future. Students who have a place
to start with will be more motivated to continue developing their ideas and their
own writing voices.
Sample Pre-writing Activity 1:
Time allotment (5-10 minutes)
Give each student any book or magazine to use (e.g., Readers' Digest,
anthologies). The teacher should have a selection also, in order to model the
process.
Have students open their books or magazines at any page and choose a word at
random—the first word that jumps off the page at them--and record this as Word 1;
close the book.
Continue this until each student has four words recorded. Students then focus for
about one minute on each word separately, and list all their thoughts, ideas and
associations that the word generates. Students then begin to make connections
among the four words and their lists of personal associations by writing phrases,
sentences, and ideas that demonstrate a relationship among the words. Students
now have had a writing warm-up and may continue developing the ideas
generated or bank these ideas for another day's writing.
Teachers may request that students bring pictures of people, or the teacher may
supply them (photographs or pictures clipped from magazines). Each picture
should show several people in sufficient detail to reveal size, facial expression, dress,
and other facets of character.
Quickly walk the students through this activity, question by question, so they record
the first thoughts and reactions that the pictures generate, rather than dwelling too
long on one question. The teacher should ask students to examine their pictures
closely, and explain that they will need to use their imagination for the activity.
Some Questions the Teacher Might Ask Are:
- Who is the main character in the picture?
- What is an appropriate name for this character?
- How old is this character?
- What emotions is this character showing in the picture?
- Describe the evidence that you have for this (e.g., facial expression, gestures).
- What kind of work might the character do for a living? Give reasons to support
your decision.
- What might the person be thinking or saying? What makes you imagine this?

CHAPTER 13 Page 169
- What other characteristics are revealed by the character's dress and stance?
- What might have happened before the picture was taken? What might
happen next?
- How are the other characters in the picture related to the main character?
- What evidence makes you think so?
- What is the attitude of the main character to the other characters?
- What is the attitude of the other characters to the main character?
- What are some possible reasons for these attitudes?
- What might it be like to be the main character or one of the other characters?
Instruct students to record ideas briefly, using phrases and words rather than
sentences. Students then may take the opportunity to develop their ideas further,
or save their notes and ideas for use at a later date.
Prepare the students for free writing by explaining that they should write whatever
thoughts enter their head from the moment that the teacher says "go" to the
moment he/she says "stop", even if it means writing and rewriting, “I don’t know
what to write. I don’t know what to write”. When the pen or pencil hits the paper it
does not stop for pauses, erasures, or corrections. Eventually, most students begin
to focus and the writing flows. Students then have the opportunity to develop these
pre-writing ideas further or save them for another day.
Planning: Organising for Drafting:
After students have generated some ideas, they must decide what they will say
about their chosen topic. Students develop an initial plan for the product they will
compose. As they do so, they must consider the purpose, audience, point of view,
and format because these elements have implications for both the planning and
the drafting of the written product.
To develop an initial plan for drafting, students organise the information they have
generated during pre-writing by using such structures as outlines, story frames,
maps, diagrams, charts, and concept webs.
To Consider Purpose:
Students write to express ideas, feelings, emotions, and opinions, and they must ask
themselves, "What is my purpose for writing this piece?" Some purposes for students’
writings are:
1. To express personal feelings or viewpoints.
2. To imagine "What if ...?"
3. To narrate.
4. To entertain and/or amuse.
5. To describe.
6. To inform or explain.
7. To persuade or convince.
9. To inquire or question.
10. To explore and experiment with ideas and formats.

CHAPTER 13 Page 170
To Consider Audience, students must consider who they are writing for and students
must ask themselves, "Who is my intended audience?" Some possible audiences
are:
1.Familiar, known audiences: self, friends, peers, family and teachers.
2.Extended, known audiences: community, student body and local media.
3.Extended, unknown audiences: wider range of media and other publications.
To Consider Point of View, students must determine from which point of view their
ideas or story / describing the events? Some points of view for students’
consideration are:
1. Physical point of view: where is the narrator in relation to the action?
2. Objective and subjective point of view: what emotional involvement does the
narrator have in relation to the situation?
3. Personal point of view: who is the narrator of the story? (The narrator may take
a first person, third person, or an all-knowing omniscient point of view.)
To Decide What Information Will Be Gathered and How It Will Most Effectively Be
Gathered, students who decide that they need to conduct interviews or go on field
trips to gather information will need to brainstorm and construct a list of
questions. Students who require library research will need to decide the types of
resources and references to consult.
To Consider Format, students will use audience and purpose to determine format
and genre. They will have the opportunity to write in a variety of narrative,
descriptive, expository, and poetic formats. Their writings may include formats and
genres such as: advertisement, advice column, autobiography/biography, comic
strip, letter of complaint/request/inquiry, diary/journal, readers theater/role-play/
monologue, book review, report, fable/fairy tale, greeting card, game rules,
directions, interview, news story, poem/song, anecdote/personal experience story,
sports column, short story, etc.
Drafting: A Time to Indulge:
At this point in the process, the emphasis is on content and meaning rather than on
mechanics and conventions. This is the time for writers to get down their ideas and
thoughts, composing rough drafts based upon pre-writing and planning activities
and considerations. As they compose, writers begin to determine what to include
and exclude, and make initial decisions about how these ideas will be organised.
During the drafting stage of the writing process, meaning begins to evolve.
To Produce a First, Rough Draft, students record their ideas rapidly in order to
capture the essence of what they have to say. They do not have to make any
attempt to revise or edit at this point. They focus on talking to the reader and begin
to develop a personal style as their voices emerge.
To Write Subsequent Drafts, students often accomplish their work by crossing out,
adding, and rearranging ideas directly on the page. The students’ redrafting does
not necessarily require an entire rewrite at this time.

CHAPTER 13 Page 171
To Reflect upon Their Own Writing, students can conference with self, peers and the
teacher. Through conferencing, students can get constructive feedback and
support that may help them to shape their writings. A set of questions or a checklist
can be used to assist writers and conference partners as they strive to help the
writer make meaning clear.
Sample 1: Self-Conference Checklist:
As you write ... Ask yourself some of these questions:
- How do I feel about what I have written so far?
- What is good that I can enhance?
- Is there anything about it that concerns me, does not fit, or seems wrong?
- What am I discovering as I write this piece?
- What surprises me? Where is it leading?
- What is my purpose?
- What is the one most important thing that I am trying to convey?
- How can I build this idea? Are there places that I wander away from my key idea?
- Who is my audience?
Sample 2: Teacher-Student Checklist:
During the teacher-student conference the teacher may ask questions such as:
- What is the part that you like best?
- Does it say what you want it to say?
- What do you mean by...?
- Where/when does your story take place?
- Are you satisfied with the beginning/ending? Why or why not?
- Does this sentence/word/phrase make sense to you?
- What reaction do you want your reader to have?
- How do you see your ideas being rearranged or changed? Why?
Sample 3: Steps For A Peer Writing Conference:
When peers are conferencing:
1. The writer decides how the written work will be shared. Will it be:
- read silently by the conference partner(s)?
- read aloud by the writer?
- read aloud by the conference partner(s)?
- a combination of the above?
2. The writer identifies what aspects of the written work will be the focus of the
conference (e.g., the beginning paragraph, figurative language).
3. The conference partner states at least:
- one thing he/she considers that the writer has done well.
- one thing he/she especially likes.
- one suggestion which addresses the focus of the conference as identified by
the writer. (It is useful to have students complete a written conference sheet to
guide their responses, especially when the process is new to them.)
4. The writer retains the right to the written work and is responsible for making the
final decision about any changes.

CHAPTER 13 Page 172
To Revise the Draft for Content and Clarity of Meaning, students will reorganise and
sequence relevant ideas, and add or delete details as they strive to make their
meaning clear. Revisions can take place to words, sentences, paragraphs, or the
whole piece (e.g., the writer may decide that the ideas would have more impact
as poetry instead of prose).
To Edit the Draft for Mechanical and Conventional Concerns that detract from and
obscure meaning, students will proofread for accuracy and correctness in spelling,
punctuation, capitalisation, grammar, and usage. Peer editing and editing
partnerships or groups can be established to assist students who are at this stage in
the process. The use of self and peer-editing checklists can be useful tools.
To Focus Purpose, Audience, and Point of View, and Confirm Appropriateness of
Format, students have to reconsider and confirm the use of the variables, which
were pondered during the planning stage.
Sample 4: Revising Checklist of a Descriptive Paragraph (Self- & Peer-Assessment,
Primary Level)
Writer's Checklist Partner’s Checklist
Yes No Did I include an introduction, a body, and a conclusion? Yes No
Yes No Did I write a good topic sentence for each paragraph? Yes No
Yes No Did I include details that support each topic sentence? Yes No
Yes No Did I avoid repeating the same words over and over again? Yes No
Yes No Did I use my senses to describe my topic? Yes No
Yes No Did I use descriptive nouns, adjectives, verbs, and adverbs? Yes No
Sample 5: Editing Checklist of a Descriptive Paragraph (Self- & Peer-Assessment,

Primary Level)
Writer's Checklist Partner’s Checklist
Yes No Did I spell all words correctly? Yes No
Yes No Did I indent the first line of every paragraph? Yes No
Yes No Did I capitalise the first word of every sentence? Yes No
Yes No Did I punctuate the end of each sentence correctly? Yes No
Yes No Did I avoid using run-on sentences? Yes No
Yes No Is my handwriting neat? Yes No
Yes No Is my title capitalised correctly? Yes No
Yes No (Add your question here?) Yes No
Some Suggestions for Scaffolds at the Drafting Stage Include the Following:
- Post the major stages of a writing process (pre-writing, planning, drafting, post-
writing) and brief information about each so that students can determine where
they are at any time in the process.
- Help students develop criteria or tips for writing a particular genre or format (e.g.,
haiku, short story, and letter), then post these on a bulletin board or have
students record them in their notebooks for reference as they write.

CHAPTER 13 Page 173
- Set up a section of the classroom as a writing reference area and make

available language resources such as dictionaries, thesauri, and grammar and
usage texts. Encourage students to use these as needed individually or with
peers and the teacher.
- Encourage students to use word-processing programmes. This may be done in co
-operation with teachers of Computer Science, Information Processing, or other
areas of study where computers are used.
Post-Writing: Preparing To Go Public:
When students have an authentic audience and purpose, they want to rework
their written drafts, polishing them for presentation or publication. Going public
means taking a huge risk; the student's self-esteem is on the line, so the decision
about how and with whom to share their writing must be up to the student writer.
Teachers may encourage students to share certain pieces or determine the
number of pieces that students are required to share or publish within a set time
period, but ultimately the decision about which pieces to share, and with whom,
should be left up to the writer.
To prepare a final, polished draft, students may write in legible handwriting or use a
word-processing programme to prepare a polished written work. Then their writings
go to public through:
1. Sharing
2. Publishing
3. Using a portfolio
Sharing:
Students may share their written work. Sharing is a useful post-writing activity since it
provides students with an immediate audience. Some examples of sharing
students’ writings include:
1. The author's chair, which provides opportunity for students to share their writing
aloud with the whole class.
2. Sharing in small groups or with a partner.
3. Using bulletin board space assigned to a specific genre or to a class of
students.
At times, students should be provided with opportunities to decide if they wish to
share their written work, and whether they will share in pairs, in small groups, or with
the whole class.
Publishing:
Students may choose to publish their writing. Some examples of publishing formats
include:
- Class booklets
- School or local newspapers
- Yearbook
- Writing contests
- Magazines

CHAPTER 13 Page 174
Using a Portfolio:
To decide if the written work will be placed in the student's assessment portfolio,
teachers can negotiate with students to generate guidelines about the number
and variety of pieces that they are required to place in their portfolio for
assessment and evaluation purposes. Contracts may be useful to address individual
student needs and abilities. Students should be involved in making choices about
which of their written pieces will become part of their portfolios.
Some Suggestions for Post-Writing Scaffolds Include the Following:
 Discuss or develop with students the criteria for polished pieces. Post these or
provide them as handouts for students to refer to as needed.
 Provide opportunities for students to use computer word-processing
programmes to create final drafts.
 Have students share their final compositions with classmates or with others in
the community, such as younger children or elderly people.
 Post or publish students' work in the classroom and provide opportunities,
when appropriate, for students to submit to publishers outside the classroom.
Mini-Lessons:
At some point during most writing classes, in a 5-10 minute mini-lesson (length
depends upon the procedure, concept, skill, or convention to be taught), the
teacher provides students with information necessary for their writing. Mini-lessons
about language usage and conventions such as spelling, sentence structure, and
punctuation are necessary; however, they should emerge from the students' writing
or the curriculum objectives, rather than being arbitrarily determined by the
teacher. It is important to allow time for students to practise concepts introduced in
mini-lessons within the context of their own writing.
The decision about what to teach in a mini-lesson depends upon the selected
objectives as well as upon the students' needs and interests. The following lists
provide examples of topics that may require mini-lessons.
Writing Process Procedures:
1. Pre-writing activities
2. Writing rough drafts
3. Self-reflection
4. Participating in writing groups
5. Peer and teacher conferences
6. Writing folders and assessment portfolios
7. Revising and editing final drafts
8. Sharing and publishing.

CHAPTER 13 Page 175
Literary Elements and Devices:

1. Plot
2. Characters
3. Main idea/theme
4. Setting
5. Narrative hook
6. Point of view
7. Flashbacks
8. Foreshadowing
9. Comparisons (e.g., analogies, metaphors, similes)
10.Personification
11.Alliteration
12.Rhyme and repetition
Language Conventions and Mechanics:
1. Writing sentences
2. Varying sentence structure (adding, deleting, substituting, moving, and
combining)
3. Writing opening and concluding paragraphs
4. Writing descriptive paragraphs
5. Punctuating items in a series
6. Using the apostrophe
7. Choosing titles
8. Punctuating dialogue
9. Selecting appropriate words (e.g., to show fear, suspense, bravery, or other
characteristics)
Writing Formats and Genre:
1. Friendly or business letter
2. News article
3. Short story
4. Haiku poetry
5. Personal experience narrative
6. Science fiction
Some mini-lessons may be planned for the whole class because the teacher has
determined the need for students to have specific information that supports their
learning or the unit of study. Other mini-lessons may be provided to individuals or
small groups as the need arises. If the concept to be taught is complex, the
teacher should provide instruction in steps, allowing students the opportunity to
practise each step before putting them all together.
Teachers should keep records (e.g., lesson plan sheets, anecdotal notes, checklists)
of mini-lesson topics and to whom they were presented. Students may also be
required to keep records of mini-lessons received (e.g., handouts, notes, checklists),
for future reference.

CHAPTER 13 Page 176
Supporting and Managing the Writing Process:

To support and manage a writing process workshop, teachers should take time to
ensure that students understand how the classroom structure and instructional
activities work together. It is important to create an atmosphere that allows and
encourages students to feel safe taking risks in order to develop a community of
writers who support each other and share with each other (the teacher is a part of
this community).
 The teacher should be sure that:
 Desks are arranged in clusters or tables are used to accommodate four to six
students.
 Resources which will assist students as they write (e.g., dictionaries, language
study texts, literature as models, and samples of student writing) are provided on
a specified shelf.
 The writing process information is displayed on bulletin boards.
 The areas designated for specific activities (e.g., peer conferences, writing and
publishing tasks) are set in the classroom.
Of course, the teacher plays an interactive role and builds scaffolds as needed.
He/she should model the various writing formats and conventions of the writing
process, and provide the needed help as each student is writing. As a member of
the community of writers, the teacher also writes and shares his/her writing with the
students. For instance, while the students are engaged in pre-writing, the teacher
may do her/his writing on a chart for the students to observe. This models the
process, as well as the specific format or conventions being used.
http://www.nadasisland.com/ghaith-writing.html#nature

CHAPTER 14 Page 178
Task:
Define the terms “Young Learners”.
The term 'young learners' covers a wide age range; 4-18 years of age, and most
problems encountered by teachers are due to a lack of understanding of the
developmental differences between children and teenagers, and of the
appropriate classroom management skills to deal with these. Differences include
conceptual and cognitive variations, variations in attention spans and motor skills
such as drawing and cutting, as well as social and emotional differences. An
understanding of these differences can help develop the flexibility that teachers of
young learners require.
How Do Children Learn Languages?

Children learn by:
- Having more opportunities to be exposed to the second language.
- Making associations between words, languages, or sentence patterns and
putting things into clear, relatable contexts.
- Using all their senses and getting fully involved; by observing and copying, doing
things, watching and listening.
- Exploring, experimenting, making mistakes and checking their understanding.
- Repetition and feeling a sense of confidence when they have established
routines.
- Being motivated, particularly when their peers are also speaking/learning other
languages.
What Stops Children from Learning?

 Feeling uncomfortable, distracted or under pressure.
 Feeling confused by abstract concepts of grammar rules and their application
which they cannot easily understand.
 Activities which require them to focus attention for a long time.
 Boredom.
 Being over-corrected.
Reading the list above, you may be surprised at the number of items that remind
you of traditional educational practices. In fact, research does suggest that
traditional classroom teaching may have the effect of preventing rather than
helping children to learn better. You cannot force a child to learn. You can only
provide a conducive environment.

CHAPTER 14 Page 179
Classroom Management and Discipline:

When children arrive, they put their coats on pegs, bags on the floor at their table
places and then join you round the board. Only books and pencil cases on the
tables. Avoid clutter, very young learner classrooms need to be very organised.
Use the two areas of the classroom. For presentation of new language, practise
activities using individual children, storytelling and opening and closing of lesson,
the teacher sits on a stool next to the board and half-faces the children. Children
should sit on the floor at their teacher's feet, with a further row of children behind on
chairs to form a closed circle. This avoids sitting on the floor and makes you feel
more in charge.
For activities, three or four children should sit at each table. Color-code the tables.
When children move from the board to the tables, get them to move group by
group, not all at once. Children keep to the same places.
Expect children to do what they are told, but be nice to them - even when you are
feeling impatient.
Using the Board:

Present new language at the board. Use lots of flashcards. Involve all pupils , ask
individuals to perform a small task; pointing to something, choosing a picture or
sticking it on the board. Children like to be picked, so make it fair. Ask the whole
class a question, get them to repeat or drill.
Explain and demonstrate tasks you want children to do at the tables at the board.
If using a worksheet, stick it on the board and demonstrate.
Routines and Activities:

Establish routines: always sit round the board to begin, play a game touching
heads when taking the register, sing 'hello' to characters or sing a song they know.
Everyone starts the lesson feeling confident and attentive.
Surprise activities can help to settle a class if the children become too excited. Try a
series of movements in sequence e.g. touch your head three times, then shoulders,
then knees. Vary the count and see if they can follow.
When changing activity, try using a rattle (e.g. rice in a box) rather than raising your
voice to attract attention. This becomes a signal that children recognise. Start the
activity, even if not all children are attentive. They will eventually join in with the
others.
Preventing Discipline Problems: (characteristics of teenagers)
- Discovering what impact they can have on the world
- Motivate and enthuse for topics they are interested in
- Focus on specific things relevant to themselves
- They need clear organised tasks that take their interest into account
- They are very demanding
- The are easily bored and thus need extrinsic motivation
- They lack discipline sometimes

CHAPTER 14 Page 180
If a Problem Occurs:
1. Know what you are going to do before the trouble really starts. This will give you
the confidence to deal effectively with difficult situations and will prevent them
from getting any worse. It will help you remain calm, because you know where
the situation is heading. React quickly and firmly.
2. Do not issue empty threats. If you threaten a student with disciplinary action,
you must follow through exactly what you promised. If not, you will lose their
respect and create more problems for later.
3. Remain calm and avoid personal confrontation. It is extremely difficult at times
to maintain calmness in the face of aggression or rudeness. Remember though
you need to take the heat out of the situation. Losing your temper or shouting
at a student will simply make you weaker. You cannot win a battle with a
student face-to-face in the class you will lose your authority in front of the
students. Talking to a student in one-to-one situation after the lesson will put you
in control again and will leave them with something to think about during the
lesson.
4. Be friendly but firm. Always start by being firm, you can relax later.
5. Establish the rules and stick to them. From the first lesson make it clear to the
students what is and is not permissible. This can be done either as a negotiated
classroom contract or as a list of rules laid down by you and the school. The
latter is more effective if you think a contract will not be taken seriously by the
students. Remember to treat the students consistently and fairly.
6. Know the disciplinary procedure. Find out what steps can be taken if you have
a problem and make it clear to the students as well. If you do not have a
discipline procedure at your school, suggest one. It will give you confidence to
deal with problems effectively.
7. Put in the time to prepare motivating, fun lessons. Take into account the
students' likes and dislikes. Ensure that you provide the right level of challenge.
Too easy and they will become bored and disruptive, too difficult and they will
feel de-motivated, switch off and become disruptive.
8. Keep a snappy pace in your lessons. Allowing activities to drag on for too long
will result in boredom. Change the focus and pace of the lesson regularly. Also,
be aware of what is happening in your classroom. Keep your eyes and your
ears open to all parts of the room. Personal contact will encourage the
students to participate in the lesson and will give you an idea of how the lesson
is going. Look out for signs of lost interest or distraction.
9. Treat them like adults (do not patronise them), but do not forget that they are
still children. Teenagers often respond well to being treated as older than they
are. It is often how they wish to be perceived. Remember though that they can
still get carried away very easily.
10. Do not forget to highlight good work and praise the positive things in your
students. All too often most of the attention is given to the students who
misbehave.

CHAPTER 14 Page 181
A Few Things to Remember:

If anything does occur in the classroom, do not take it personally. Remember that
most of the time it is not directed at you. Like the disgruntled guest shouting at the
receptionist in the hotel, you represent not only the school but also the teaching
establishment. The students may have had bad experiences in the past and you
are the nearest target.
I have always found teaching teenagers the most rewarding part of my job. The
enthusiasm and energy that can be harnessed from a class of teenagers can make
for a wonderful experience.
Project:
Ask trainees to draw a word net for the components of project on newspaper
sheets. It may include: the advantages, the teachers' role, the students' role.
Advantages:
 A context is established which balances the need for fluency and accuracy.
 Increases motivation (learners are personally involved).
 The four skills are integrated.
 Autonomous learning is promoted (Learners are responsible).
 Learning outcome (Learners have an end product).
 Authentic tasks and therefore language input is more authentic.
 Development of interpersonal relations.
 Learner-centred (Learners decide on the content and methodology).
 Break from routine and a chance to do something different.

CHAPTER 15 Page 183
Focusing on Literature:
Language, both spoken and written, comes in a variety of discourse types and, as
teachers of language; we attempt to introduce our learners to as many of these as
possible. The variety and types of discourse are perhaps best represented by
Kinneavy’s communication triangle (1983). This classification of discourse types
includes expressive, which focuses on personal expression (letters, diaries, etc.);
transactional, which focuses on both the reader and the message (advertising,
business letters, editorials, instructions, etc.); and poetic, which focuses on form and
language (drama, poetry, novels, short stories, etc.). Indeed, all these discourse
types already play a significant role in teaching various aspects of language such
as vocabulary and structure, or testing learners’ comprehension.
However, there is often reluctance by teachers, course designers and examiners to
introduce unabridged and authentic texts to the EFL syllabus. There is a general
perception that literature is particularly complex and inaccessible for the foreign
language learner and can even be detrimental to the process of language
learning (Or, 1995). Indeed, it is difficult to imagine teaching the stylistic features of
literary discourse to learners who have a less than sophisticated grasp of the basic
mechanics of English language. This perception is also borne out by research (Akyel
and Yalçin, 1990) which shows that the desire to broaden learners’ horizons through
exposure to classic literature usually has disappointing results. The reasons why
teachers often consider literature inappropriate to the classroom language may
be found in the common beliefs held about literature and literary language. Firstly,
the creative use of language in poetry and prose often deviates from the
conventions and rules which govern standard, non-literary discourse, as in the case
of poetry where grammar and lexis may be manipulated to serve orthographic or
phonological features of the language. Secondly, the reader requires greater
effort to interpret literary texts since meaning is detached from the reader’s
immediate social context; one example is that the “I” in literary discourse may not
be the same person as the writer.
The result is that the reader’s “interpretative procedures” (Widdowson, 1975) may
become confused and overloaded. What this means is that the reader has to infer,
anticipate and negotiate meaning from within the text to a degree that is not
required in non-literary discourse. Thus, in our efforts to teach our learners’
communicative competence there is a tendency to make use of texts which focus
on the transactional and expressive forms of writing with the exclusion or restriction
of poetic forms of language – i.e. literature. There is a perception that the use of
literary discourse deflects from the straightforward business of language learning,
i.e. knowledge of language structure, functions and general communication.
Why Use Literature?
There are many good reasons for using literature in the classroom. Here are a few:
1. Literature is authentic material. It is good to expose learners to this source of
unmodified language in the classroom because the skills they acquire in dealing
with difficult or unknown language can be used outside the class.

CHAPTER 15 Page 184
2. Literature encourages interaction. Literary texts are often rich is multiple layers
of meaning, and can be effectively mined for discussions and sharing feelings
or opinions.
3.Literature expands language awareness. Asking learners to examine
sophisticated or non-standard examples of language (which can occur in
literary texts) makes them more aware of the norms of language use
(Widdowson, 1975 quoted by Lazar 1993).
4. Literature educates the whole person. By examining values in literary texts,
teachers encourage learners to develop attitudes towards them. These values
and attitudes relate to the world outside the classroom.
5. Literature is motivating. Literature holds high status in many cultures and
countries. For this reason, students can feel a real sense of achievement at
understanding a piece of highly respected literature. Also, literature is often
more interesting than the texts found in course-books.
Approaches to Teaching Literature:
Having decided that integrating literature into the EFL syllabus is beneficial to the
learners’ linguistic development, we need to select an approach which best serves
the needs of EFL learners and the syllabus. Carter and Long (1991) describe the
rationale for the use of the three main approaches to the teaching of literature:
The Cultural Model:
This model represents the traditional approach to teaching literature. Such a model
requires learners to explore and interpret the social, political, literary and historical
context of a specific text. By using such a model to teach literature we not only
reveal the universality of such thoughts and ideas but encourage learners to
understand different cultures and ideologies in relation to their own. This model is
largely rejected by those in TEFL since not only does it tend to be teacher-centred
but there is little opportunity for extended language work.
The Language Model:
The most common approach to literature in the EFL classroom is what Carter and
Long (1991) refer to as the ‘language-based approach’. Such an approach
enables learners to access a text in a systematic and methodical way in order to
exemplify specific linguistic features e.g. literal and figurative language, direct and
indirect speech. This approach lends itself well to the repertoire of strategies used in
language teaching - cloze procedure, prediction exercises, jumbled sentences,
summary writing, creative writing and role play - which all form part of the
repertoire of EFL activities used by teachers to deconstruct literary texts in order to
serve specific linguistic goals. Carter and McRae (1996) describe this model as
taking a ‘reductive’ approach to literature. These activities are disconnected from
the literary goals of the specific text in that they can be applied to any text. There is
little engagement of the learner with the text other than for purely linguistic
practice; literature is used in a rather purposeless and mechanistic way in order to
provide for a series of language activities orchestrated by the teacher.

CHAPTER 15 Page 185
The Personal Growth Model:

This model attempts to bridge the cultural model and the language model by
focusing on the particular use of language in a text, as well as placing it in a
specific cultural context. Learners are encouraged to express their opinions, and
feelings and make connections between their own personal and cultural
experiences and those expressed in the text. Another aspect of this model is that it
helps learners develop knowledge of ideas and language – content and formal
schemata – through different themes and topics. This function relates to theories of
reading (Goodman, 1970) which emphasise the interaction of the reader with the
text. As Cadorath and Harris point out (1998:188) "text itself has no meaning, it only
provides direction for the reader to construct meaning from the reader's own
experience". Thus, learning is said to take place when readers are able to interpret
text and construct meaning on the basis of their own experience.
These three approaches to teaching literature differ in terms of their focus on the
text: firstly, the text is seen as a cultural artifact; secondly, the text is used as a focus
for grammatical and structural analysis; and thirdly, the text is the stimulus for
personal growth activities. What is needed is an approach to teaching literature in
the EFL classroom which attempts to integrate these elements in a way that makes
literature accessible to learners and beneficial for their linguistic development.
Rationale for an Integrated Model for Teaching Literature:
According to Duff and Maley (1990), the main reasons for integrating these
elements are linguistic, methodological and motivational. Linguistically, by using a
wide range of authentic texts we introduce learners to a variety of types and
difficulties of English language. Methodologically, literary discourse sensitises
readers to the processes of reading e.g. the use of schema, strategies for intensive
and extensive reading etc. And, lastly, motivationally, literary texts prioritise the
enjoyment of reading since, as Short and Candlin assert (1986), ‘if literature is worth
teaching...then it seems obvious that it is the response to literature itself which is
important’. Interpretation of texts by learners can bring about personal responses
from readers by touching on significant and engaging themes.
An integrated model is a linguistic approach which utilises some of the strategies
used in stylistic analysis, which explores texts, literary and non-literary, from the
perspective of style and its relationship to content and form. This involves the
systematic and detailed analysis of the stylistic features of a text – vocabulary,
structure, register etc. in order to find out ‘not just what a text means, but also how
it comes to mean what it does’ (Short, 1996).
This suggested model (O’Brien, 1999) integrates linguistic description with
interpretation of the text although for the benefit of the foreign language learners it
is not as technical, rigorous or analytical as the stylistics approach. With the careful
selection of the text, it can be adapted for all levels.
Focus is on analysis of the text at a deeper level and exploring how the message is
conveyed through overall structure and any special uses of language - rhythm,
imagery, word choice etc.

CHAPTER 15 Page 186
Stage 1: Preparation and Anticipation

This stage elicits learners’ real or literary experience of the main themes and context
of text.
Stage 2: Focusing
Learners experience the text by listening and/ or reading and focusing on specific
content in the text.
Stage 3: Preliminary Response
Learners give their initial response to the text - spoken or written.
Stage 4: Working at It - I
Focus is on comprehending the first level of meaning through intensive reading.
Stage 5: Working at It - II
Stage 6: Interpretation and Personal Response
The focus of this final step is on increasing understanding, enhancing enjoyment of
the text and enabling learners to come to their own personal interpretation of the
text. This is based on the rationale for the personal growth model.
Literature Lesson Plan:

A lesson plan format is outlined below, based on an excerpt of a short story. This sort
of lesson plan, works well for extracts from stories, poems or extracts from plays.
Stage One: Warmer

There are two different possible routes you can take for this stage:
1. Devise a warmer that gets students thinking about the topic of the extract or
poem. This could take several forms: a short discussion that students do in
pairs, a whole class discussion, a guessing game between you and the class or
a brainstorming of vocabulary around that topic.
2. Devise a warmer that looks at the source of the literature that will be studied.
Find out what the students already know about the author or the times he/she
was writing in. Give the students some background information to read (be
careful not to make this too long or it will detract from the rest of the lesson;
avoid text overload!). Explain in what way this piece of literature is well-known
(maybe it is often quoted in modern films or by politicians). This sort of warmer
fits more into the cultural model of teaching literature (see Literature in the
Classroom 1.)
Stage Two: Before Reading
This stage could be optional, or it may be a part of the warmer. Preparing to read
activities include:
- Pre-teaching very difficult words (note: pre-teaching vocabulary should be
approached with caution. Often teachers “kill” a text by spending too much
time on the pre-teaching stage. Limit the amount of words you cover in this
stage. If you have to teach more than seven or eight there is a good chance
the text will be too difficult.)

CHAPTER 15 Page 187
- Predicting. Give students some words from the extract and ask them to predict
what happens next. If it is a play, give them a couple of lines of dialogue and
ask them to make predictions about the play.
- Giving students a “taste”. Read the first bit of the extract (with their books
closed, or papers turned over) at normal speed, even quickly. Ask students to
compare what they have understood in pairs. Then ask them to report back to
you. Repeat the first bit again. Then ask them to open the book (or turn over the
page) and read it for them.
Stage Three: Understanding the Text, General Comprehension
Often with extracts or poems, I like to read the whole thing to my students so that
they can get more of a “feel” for the text. With very evocative pieces of literature
or poetry this can be quite powerful. Then I let students read it to themselves. It is
important to let students approach a piece of literature the first time without giving
them any specific task other than to simply read it. One of the aims of teaching
literature is to evoke interest and pleasure from the language. If students have to
do a task at every stage of a literature lesson, the pleasure can be lost.
Once students have read it once, you can set comprehension questions or ask
them to explain the significance of certain key words of the text. Another way of
checking comprehension is to ask students to explain to each other (in pairs) what
they have understood. This could be followed up by more subjective questions (e.g.
Why do you think X said this? How do you think the woman feels? What made him
do this?)
Stage Four: Understanding the Language
At this stage, get to grip with the more difficult words in the text. See how many of
the unfamiliar words students can get from context. Give them clues.
You could also look at certain elements of style that the author has used.
Remember that there is some use in looking at non-standard forms of language to
understand the standard.
If appropriate to the text, look at the connotation of words which the author has
chosen. For example, if the text says “She had long skinny arms,” what does that
say about the author’s impression of the woman? Would it be different if the author
had written “She had long slender arms”?
Stage Five: Follow-Up Activities
Once you have read and worked with your piece of literature it might naturally
lead on to one or more follow-up activities. Here are some ideas:
Using Poems:
1. Have students read each other the poem aloud at the same time, checking for
each other’s pronunciation and rhythm. Do a whole class choral reading at the
end.
2. Ask students to rewrite the poem, changing the meaning but not the structure.
3. Ask students to write or discuss the possible story behind the poem. Who was it
for? What led to the writing of this poem?
4. Have a discussion on issues the poem raised and how they relate to the students’
lives.

CHAPTER 15 Page 188
Using Extracts from Stories or Short Stories:

 Ask students to write what they think will happen next, or what they think
happened just before.
 Ask students to write a background character description of one of the
characters which explains why they are the way they are.
 Ask students to imagine they are working for a big Hollywood studio who wants
to make a movie from the book. They must decide the location and casting of
the movie.
 Ask students to personalise the text by talking about if anything similar has
happened to them.
 Ask students to improvise a role-play between two characters in the book.
Using Extracts from Plays:

Most of the ideas from stories (above) could be applied here, but obviously, this
medium gives plenty of opportunity for students to do some drama in the
classroom. Here are some possibilities:
 Ask students to act out a part of the scene in groups.
 Ask students to make a radio play recording of the scene. They must record this
onto cassette. Listen to the different recordings in the last five minutes of future
classes. Whose was the best?
 Ask students to read out the dialogue but to give the characters special
accents (very “foreign” or very “American” or “British”). This works on different
aspects of pronunciation (individual sounds and sentence rhythm).
 Ask students to write stage directions, including how to deliver lines (e.g. angrily,
breathlessly etc) next to each character’s line of dialogue. Then they read it out
loud.
 Ask students to re-write the scene. They could either modernise it (this has been
often done with Shakespeare), or imagine that it is set in a completely different
location (in space for example). Then they read out the new version.
Potential Problems:
Problem 1: How Do I Choose Material?

Think about the following factors when you choose a piece of literature to use with
learners:
 Do you understand enough about the text to feel comfortable using it?
 Is there enough time to work on the text in class?
 Does it fit with the rest of your syllabus?
 Is it something that could be relevant to the learners?
 Will it be motivating for them?
 How much cultural or literary background do the learners need to be able to
deal with the tasks?
 Is the level of language in the text too difficult?

CHAPTER 15 Page 189
Problem 2: Is the Text Too Difficult?

Obviously a teacher would not want to use a text that is completely beyond their
learners. This would ultimately be frustrating for everyone involved. However, the
immediate difficulty with vocabulary in a text might not be an obstacle to its
comprehension. Learners can be trained to infer meaning of difficult words from
context. The selection of a text must be given careful thought, but also the
treatment of the text by the teacher (this means think about the tasks you set for a
reading of a piece of literature, not just the text).
Teaching Literature to Young Learners:

Using children's literature can be an effective and enjoyable way to teach
language. Students who are enthralled by a story forget their worries and anxieties
about the new language. In an interview with Tova Ackerman (1994, para. 2),
storyteller Dvora Shurman says that, "The best way to teach is not to impose
teaching, but to allow the listener to become so involved in hearing a story that his
'defenses' are no longer active." It is our sense of enjoyment, excitement, and
emotional involvement that is a necessary condition for learning, and using
literature in the classroom can provide the content base for the magic.
Teaching Ideas:
Sequencing Activities:
Young learners in particular need a very active classroom and variety throughout
the lesson. Ten minutes is probably the maximum length of time you can expect
students of this age to focus their attention before you need to change gears. One
guideline that works well with young learners is to assure that, in any given lesson,
there is always a little enthusiastic singing, a little quiet listening, a little enthusiastic
dancing, and a little quiet artwork.
The following approach is one that works very well:
 Sing. Students sing, recite, or read a passage from the story in teams.
 Listen. Students listen to the story from beginning to end.
 Dance. Students get out of their chairs for some physical activity. Often, this
can be acting out the actions from the story, but there are unlimited
possibilities.
 Draw. Students sit back down and illustrate new vocabulary.
While considering how you will allocate class time, do not underestimate the
students' enthusiasm for listening to a story again and again. In fact, according to
Anne Burns (2003, p. 22), a surprising result from her study of second-language
learner attitudes toward literacy learning included the insight that "students were
almost unanimous in their desire for teachers to read aloud to them." She credited
the value of hearing fluent reading in English, listening to the written words, hearing
correct stress and intonation patterns, as well as providing a model for imitation as
possible reasons.

CHAPTER 15 Page 190
Types of Activities:
 Listen to the story on tape/as read by the teacher without looking at the text.
 Listen to the story and read along.
 Listen to the story and put illustrations depicting parts of the story in order.
 Read the book silently.
 Read the book to a partner, then switch.
 Write your favourite words/new words starting with A from the story in your
notebook.
 Write a portion of the story in the workbook.
 Answer (or practise asking) simple who, what, when, where, and why
questions about the story.
 Play pictionary. Divide students into teams. One member of the team draws a
picture on the board while team members try to guess what it is within a
limited time period.
 Speed reading game. Call out a word from the text, then let students race to
find it. The first one to find it reads the sentence aloud. A word of caution: this
game is rather hard on books.
 Have students display the flashcards they made, let them be the teacher and
ask the class, "What is this?"
 Make up a dance or do actions to the words of the story. A good example of
this kind of story is The Foot Book. The text repeats, "Left Foot/Left Foot/Right
Foot/Right." Students can get out of their chairs and jump from left to right as
suggested by the text.
 Do the opposite of dancing. Have students "freeze" a moment of the text by
acting out exactly what is described in the text at some specific moment,
and holding perfectly still. You could photograph these moments if you have
a digital camera.
 Do a verbal fill-in-the-blank exercise. As you read, stop at random and have
students shout out what word comes next.
 Check comprehension of key concepts by asking students to draw pictures.
For example, students could demonstrate understanding of the difference
between "I like kimchi."/"I don't like kimchi." by drawing two different pictures.
 A note about memorisation. A lot of students really do enjoy memorising the
books. Allow them to recite what they've memorised in teams. Many students
love to show off their English, and feel very proud of being able to produce a
minute or so of non-stop English.

CHAPTER 16 Page 192
Task:
What is Cooperative learning?
Cooperative Learning:
Cooperative learning is a generic term for various small group interactive
instructional procedures. Students work together on academic tasks in small groups
to help themselves and their teammates learn together. In general, cooperative
learning methods share the following five characteristics.
Five Basic Elements of Cooperative Learning:
 Positive Interdependence
 Face-to-Face Interaction
 Individual & Group Accountability
 Interpersonal & Small-Group Skills
 Group Processing
Task:
Write a list of what each element means or entails.
Positive Interdependence:
 Each group member's efforts are required and indispensable for group
success.
 Each group member has a unique contribution to make to the joint effort
because of his or her resources and/or role and task responsibilities.
Face-to-Face Interaction:
 Orally explaining how to solve problems
 Teaching one's knowledge to other
 Checking for understanding
 Discussing concepts being learned
 Connecting present with past learning
Individual & Group Accountability:

 The smaller the size of the group, the greater the individual accountability.
 Giving an individual test to each student.
 Randomly examining students orally by calling on one student to present the
group's work to the teacher (in the presence of the class.)
 Having students teach what they learned to someone else.

CHAPTER 16 Page 193
Interpersonal & Small-Group Skills:

 Social skills must be taught
 Leadership
 Decision-making
 Trust-building
 Communication
 Conflict-management skills
Group Processing:
 Group members discuss how well they are achieving their goals and
maintaining effective working relationships.
 Describe what member actions are helpful and not helpful.
 Make decisions about what behaviours to continue or change.
Benefits:
Cooperative Learning Enhances Student Learning by:
 Providing a shared cognitive set of information between students.
 Motivating students to learn the material.
 Ensuring that students construct their own knowledge.
 Providing formative feedback.
 Developing social and group skills necessary for success outside the classroom.
 Promoting positive interaction between members of different cultural and socio
-economic groups.
Students Should Share These Set of Values:
 Gain from each other's efforts. (Your success benefits me and my success
benefits you.)
 Recognise that all group members share a common fate. (We all sink or swim
together here.)
 Know that one's performance is mutually caused by oneself and one's team
members. (We cannot do it without you.)
 Feel proud and jointly celebrate when a group member is recognised for
achievement. (We all congratulate you on your accomplishment!).
Guidelines for Team Formation:
 Each team should consist of one high student, two average students, and one
low-ability student.
 Teams include both boys and girls. Each team should reflect the ethnic diversity
of your classroom.
 Cooperative Learning teams generally stay together for about six weeks.
 After forming your teams, provide opportunities for them to get to know each
other.
 Assign: a Recorder, a Timer, Organiser and a Checker.

CHAPTER 16 Page 194
Flip-Flop Book:
This is a great activity to use just before you create new cooperative learning
teams. The old teams need some type of closure activity to express appreciation to
each other. Give each student one Flip-Flop Book (figure 1) and have them fold it
in half the long way (like a hotdog). Ask them to write their name in the large
rectangle. Then have them cut on the solid lines between each of the four small
sections. They pass the Flip-Flop Book around the team and open a flap. Under the
flap they write an appreciation statement. Finally, they sign the top of the flap and
pass it to the next person. No one may read another team member's statement
except the person named on the Flip-Flop Book.
(Figure 1)
Being on your team I’ll always I just wanted to I thank you for…
was fun because… remember… say…
From: From: From: From:
Team Management Ideas:

 Activity management
 Team Tubs
 Team Captains
 Behaviour management
 Quiet Signal
 Marble Jar
 Team Incentive Stickers
 Team Stop Signs
 Erase a Letter
Quiet Signal:
Be sure to have a signal for getting students’ attention during an activity. When
you use the signal, make sure everyone is quiet before you begin giving instructions.
Marble Jar:
Reward good behaviour by dropping marbles in a small jar each time the class (or
a team) behaves in a desired manner. Be sure to announce the specific behaviour
you are rewarding. (“Class, you did a super job of praising each other!”) When the
jar is full, let students vote on a simple reward.

CHAPTER 16 Page 195
2. Classifying Foods on the Food Pyramid:

Introduce the Food Pyramid to students and review the types of food that belong in
each category. Place students in teams of four and assign each student a number
from one to four. Give each team of students one Food Pyramid along with a sheet
of the foods to sort. Have students cut the foods apart and place them face down
in a stack next to the pyramid. Ask Student #1 on each team to turn over the top
card and name its food group. If the other team members agree, they give a
thumbs up sign and Student #1 places the card in the appropriate spot on the
pyramid. If they do not agree, they discuss it and come to a consensus about its
placement. Allow them to use their health books or other sources of information in
the event of a disagreement. For the next card, Student #2 leads the discussion.
Have students continue taking turns as they flip over a food card and place it on
the pyramid. When all teams have classified all their foods, choose a Reporter from
each team to share the answers from one food group.
(figure 11)

CHAPTER 16 Page 196
3. Grammar Activities:
1. Daily Grammar Practice:
Daily Grammar Practice is a system similar to Daily Oral Language. One sentence
or quotation is written on the overhead, make sure that it includes a variety of
grammatical errors (depending on what you are studying at the moment). The
students attempt to write the sentence correctly on their Grammar Practice
Worksheet. Teacher circulates through the room holding a mini-stamper or sticker. If
a student finds all the errors in the sentence and corrects them without help, a
stamp is placed next to that sentence. This helps assigning a grade later. After all
papers are checked, call on one student to make the corrections on the overhead.
All students are expected to correct the errors on their paper at that time. At the
end of the week, collect the papers and assign a letter grade based on the
number they wrote correctly without help (as indicated by my stamp or sticker) and
the number they wrote correctly after seeing the sentence on the overhead.
Famous quotations could be used as the basis for my Daily Grammar Practice. After
discussing grammatical errors, have students put their heads together in teams to
discuss the meaning of the quotation. Then call on one student in each team to
explain their team's interpretation. Clarify the meaning for the class and discuss
examples in everyday life. This activity is suitable to start the day! Then at the end of
the week, choose one of the quotations and the kids have to write a short synopsis
of what the quotation means on the back of their Grammar Practice Worksheet.
(Figure 12)
Sample Famous Quotations Used for Grammar Practice:
Grammar Practice
Famous Quotations
1. Joseph addison said, Reading is too the mind what exersize is two the
bodie.
2. We hasn’t failed. we now no a thousand things that wont work, so we are

much closer too finding out what will. (Thomas Edison)
3. Theres a chinese proverb that says, Give a man a fish and you feed him
for a day. Teech a man to fish and you feeds him for a livetime.
4. If we were ment to talk more then listen, we wood have too mouths and
won ear. Said famous author Mark Twain.

CHAPTER 16 Page 197
Team Stop Sign:

Prepare several Team Stop Signs for the class. Use the stop signs to manage noise
level during team activities. When a team becomes too noisy, place a Team Stop
Sign in the middle of the group. That team must be silent for one minute. You will
be amazed at how other teams immediately become quiet to avoid receiving a
stop sign!
Erase a Letter:
Write the word “STOP” on the board. Each time the class is too noisy or off task,
erase one letter. When all four letters have been erased, stop the cooperative
activity and assign individual seatwork. Try the cooperative activity the next day
and you will be amazed at the improvement!
(Figure 2)
Weekly Lesson Plan Form:

Use the Cooperative Learning Weekly Plans form to remind yourself to plan at least
one cooperative learning activity a day. After completing your regular plans,
review them and use this form to jot down the cooperative activities you are doing
each day. If you find that you have not planned a cooperative activity for some
days, think about the content you are teaching on those days. Be sure you are
including at least one Teambuilder and one Classbuilder structure each week. After
using this form for several weeks, you will find yourself automatically including
cooperative learning activities in your lessons.

CHAPTER 16 Page 198
(Figure 3)
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Seating Arrangement Options:

There are various ways of placing your students in a cooperative learning lesson. It is
recommended that teachers change the seating pattern every few weeks.
 T-Table
 Face-to-Face L-desks
 L-desks star arrangement
 Face-to-Face desks
 Lab table team
 Traditional rows
(Figure 4)

CHAPTER 16 Page 199
Cooperative Learning Strategies Used with Kids and Young Learners:

Various strategies exist for Cooperative learning. Listed below are some of the more
common strategies.
Class Activities That Use Cooperative Learning:
1. Jigsaw - Groups with five students are set up. Each group member is assigned
some unique material to learn and then to teach to his group members. To
help in the learning students across the class working on the same sub-section
get together to decide what is important and how to teach it. After practice in
these "expert" groups the original groups reform and students teach each
other. (Wood, p. 17) Tests or assessment follows.
2. Think-Pair-Share - Involves a three-step cooperative structure. During the first

step individuals think silently about a question posed by the instructor. Individu-
als pair up during the second step and exchange thoughts. In the third step,
the pairs share their responses with other pairs, other teams, or the entire group.
3. Three-Step Interview - Each member of a team chooses another member to

be a partner. During the first step individuals interview their partners by asking
clarifying questions. During the second step partners reverse the roles. For the
final step, members share their partner's response with the team. Three-step
interviews can also be used as an ice-breaker for team members to get to
know one another or can be used to get to know concepts in depth, by as-
signing roles to students.
 Teacher assigns roles or students can "play" themselves. Teacher may also
give interview questions or information that should be "found."
 A interviews B for the specified number of minutes, listening attentively and
asking probing questions.
 At a signal, students reverse roles and B interviews A for the same number of
minutes.
 At another signal, each pair turns to another pair, forming
a group of four. Each member of the group introduces
his or her partner, highlighting the most interesting points.
4. Numbered Heads - A team of four is established. Each member is given num-

bers of 1, 2, 3, 4. Questions are asked of the group. Groups work together to
answer the question so that all can verbally answer the question. Teacher calls
out a number (two) and each two is asked to give the answer.

CHAPTER 16 Page 200

CHAPTER 16 Page 201
Cooperative Learning Structures and Techniques Used with Teenagers and Adults:
Focused Listing:
Focused listing can be used as a brainstorming technique or as a technique to
generate descriptions and definitions for concepts. Focused listing asks the students
to generate words to define or describe something. Once students have
completed this activity, you can use these lists to facilitate group and class
discussion.
Example: Ask students to list five to seven words or phrases that describe or define
what a motivated student does. From there, you might ask students to get together
in small groups to discuss the lists, or to select the one that they can all agree on.
Combine this technique with a number of the other techniques and you can have
a powerful cooperative learning structure.
Structured Problem-Solving:
Structured problem-solving can be used in conjunction with several other
cooperative learning structures.
 Have the participants brainstorm or select a problem for them to consider.
 Assign numbers to members of each group (or use playing cards). Have each
member of the group be a different number or suit.
 Discuss task as group.
 Each participant should be prepared to respond. Each member of the group
needs to understand the response well enough to give the response with no
help from the other members of the group.
 Ask an individual from each group to respond. Call on the individual by
number (or suit).
One Minute Papers:
Ask students to comment on the following questions. Give them one minute and
time them. This activity focuses them on the content and can also provide
feedback to you as a teacher.
 What was the most important or useful thing you learned today?
 What two important questions do you still have; what remains unclear?
 What would you like to know more about?
You can use these one-minute papers to begin the next day's discussion, to
facilitate discussion within a group, or to provide you with feedback on where the
student is in his or her understanding of the material.
Paired Annotations:
Students pair up to review/learn a specific article, chapter or content area and
exchange double-entry journals for reading and reflection.
Students discuss key points and look for divergent and convergent thinking and
ideas. Together students prepare a composite annotation that summarises the
article, chapter, or concept.

CHAPTER 16 Page 202
Structured Learning Team Group Roles:

When putting groups together, you may want to consider assigning (or having
students select) their roles for the group. Students may also rotate group roles
depending on the activity.
Potential group roles and their functions include:
 Leader - The leader is responsible for keeping the group on the assigned task
at hand. She/he also makes sure that all members of the group have an
opportunity to participate, learn and have the respect of their team members.
The leader may also want to check to make sure that all of the group
members have mastered the learning points of a group exercise.
 Recorder - The recorder picks and maintains the group files and folders on a
daily basis and keeps records of all group activities including the material
contributed by each group member. The recorder writes out the solutions to
problems for the group to use as notes or to submit to the instructor. The
recorder may also prepare presentation materials when the group makes oral
presentations to the class.
 Reporter - The reporter gives oral responses to the class about the group's
activities or conclusions.
 Monitor - The monitor is responsible for making sure that the group's work area
is left the way it was found and acts as a timekeeper for timed activities.
 Wildcard (in groups of five) - The wildcard acts as an assistant to the group
leader and assumes the role of any member that may be missing.
Send-A-Problem:
Send-A-Problem can be used as a way to get groups to discuss and review
material, or potential solutions to problems related to content information.
 Each member of a group generates a problem and writes it down on a card.
Each member of the group then asks the question to other members.
 If the question can be answered and all members of the group agree on the
answer, then that answer is written on the back of the card. If there is no
consensus on the answer, the question is revised so that an answer can be
agreed upon.
 The group puts a Q on the side of the card with the question on it, and an A on
the side of the card with an answer on it.
 Each group sends its question cards to another group.
 Each group member takes question cards from the stack of questions and
reads one question at a time to the group. After reading the first question, the
group discusses it.
 If the group agrees on the answer, they turn the card over to see if they agree
with the first group's answer.
 If there is again consensus, they proceed to the next question.
 If they do not agree with the first group's answer, the second group write their
answer on the back of the card as an alternative answer.

CHAPTER 16 Page 203
 The second group reviews and answers each question in the stack of cards,
repeating the procedure outlined above.
 The question cards can be sent to a third, fourth, or fifth group, if desired.
 Stacks of cards are then sent back to the originating group. The sending group
can then discuss and clarify any question.
 Variation: A variation on the Send-A-Problem is to use the process to get
groups to discuss a real problem for which there may be no one set answer.
 Groups decide on one problem they will consider. It is best if each group
considers a different problem.
 The same process is used, with the first group brainstorming solutions to a single
problem. The problem is written on a piece of paper and attached to the
outside of a folder. The solutions are listed and enclosed inside the folder.
 The folder is then passed to the next group. Each group brainstorms for three
to five minutes on the problems they receive without reading the previous
group's work and then place their solutions inside the folders.
 This process may continue to one or more groups. The last group reviews all the
solutions posed by all of the previous groups and develops a prioritised list of
possible solutions. This list is then presented to the group.
Value Line:
One way to form heterogeneous groups, is to use a value line.
 Present an issue or topic to the group and ask each member to determine
how they feel about the issue (could use a 1-10 scale; 1 being strong
agreement, 10 being strong disagreement).
 Form a rank-ordered line and number the participants from 1 up (from strong
agreement to strong disagreement, for example).
 Form your groups of four by pulling one person from each end of the value line
and two people from the middle of the group (for example, if you had 20
people, one group might consist of persons 1, 10, 11, 20).
Uncommon Commonalities:
Uncommon Commonalities can be used to foster a more cohesive group.
(Figure 5)
Uncommon Commonalities
1 2 3 4
Team Name

CHAPTER 16 Page 204
 Groups get together and first list individual things about themselves that define
them as people).
 Groups then discussed each item, finding things that 1, 2, 3, or 4 of them have
in common.
 When the group finds an item that all of them have in common, they list that
item under 4; when they find something that 3 of them have in common, the list
that item under 3, etc.
Team Expectations:
Some of the common fears about working with groups include student fears that
each member will not pull their weight as a part of the group. Students are scared
that their grade will be lower as a result of the group learning vs. learning they do
individually. One way to address this issue is to use a group activity to allow the
group to outline acceptable group behaviour. Put together a form and ask groups
to first list behaviours (expectations) they expect from each individual, each pair
and as a group as a whole. Groups then can use this as a way to monitor individual
contributions to the group and as a way to evaluate group participation.
Double Entry Journal:
The Double Entry Journal can be used as a way for students to take notes on
articles and other resources they read in preparation for class discussion.
 Students read and reflect on the assigned reading(s).
 Students prepare the double entry journal, listing critical points of the readings
(as they see them) and any responses to the readings, in general, or specific
critical points.
 Students bring their journal notes to class.
Once in class, students may use their double entry journal to begin discussion, to do
a paired annotation, or for other classroom and group activity.
(Figure 6)
Double Entry Journal
Critical Points Response
Guided Reciprocal Peer Questioning:

The goal of this activity is to generate discussion among student groups about a
specific topic or content area.
 Faculty conducts a brief (10-15 minutes) lecture on a topic or content area.
 Faculty may assign a reading or written assignment as well.
 Instructor then gives the students a set of generic question stems.

CHAPTER 16 Page 205
 Students work individually to write their own questions based on the material
being covered.
 Students do not have to be able to answer the questions they pose. This
activity is designed to force students to think about ideas relevant to the
content area.
 Students should use as many question stems as possible.
 Grouped into learning teams, each student offers a question for discussion,
using the different stems.
Sample Question Stems:
 What is the main idea of...?
 What if...?
 How does...affect...?
 What is a new example of...?
 Explain why...?
 Explain how...?
 How does this relate to what I have learned before?
 What conclusions can I draw about...?
 What is the difference between... and...?
 How are...and...similar?
 How would I use...to...?
 What are the strengths and weaknesses of...?
 What is the best...and why?
<http://www.utc.edu/Administration/WalkerTeachingResourceCenter/
FacultyDevelopment/CooperativeLearning/>
Cooperative Learning Teaching Implication:
 Vocabulary
 Grammar
 Reading
 Writing
 Speaking
Following are activities that could be applicable in classrooms. These activities
could be implemented using cooperative learning techniques.
A. Speaking Application:
1. Your group is to make a neat and clear chart that lists the ten most important
items you would need in your survival kit if you were to find yourself alone in the
following life and death situation. You must be able to explain how these items
are essential in helping you to secure food, fresh water and shelter for an
indefinite amount of time.
2. It is early spring and you are hiking with friends in the remote wilderness of the
Rocky Mountains. Suddenly there is an avalanche and you are swept far away
and separated from the group. Your clothes are torn, you are missing one of your
hiking boots and you do not have any means of electronically signaling for help.
Luckily, you still have your back pack attached to your back with the survival kit
you packed specially for a situation like this. Describe what is in your kit and how
you will use it.

CHAPTER 16 Page 206
3. You are on a cruise ship sailing through the South Pacific when a hurricane
suddenly engulfs the ship. The ship cannot withstand the fierceness of the storm
and it sinks. When the seas calm you miraculously find yourself alone in a small
rubber raft drifting towards a small island. Your clothes, t-shirt, shorts and sandals
are wet and torn. Luckily, there is a small survival pack in the raft. Describe what
is in your kit and how you will use it.
4. You are travelling across the Sahara Desert on foot with a group of local
villagers when suddenly a severe sand storm takes your troop by surprise. For
several hours it assaults you. When it finally subsides, you find you have been
separated from the group and the only thing in sight are huge sand dunes and
a small oasis with a few trees, shrubs and pool of fresh water about½ a kilometer
away. You are wearing light clothing with a veil and your survival kit around
your waist. Describe what is in your kit and how you will use it.
5. You are on a canoe trip in the remote wilderness of Northern Saskatchewan
with a friend when you happen upon a set of rapids that lead to a waterfall.
You try to navigate your canoe to shore but the current is too fast and strong
and you go over the falls. You are wearing your life jacket and you manage to
stay afloat but you are separated from your friend and the canoe. The river
takes you several kilometers downstream before you are able to swim ashore.
Within a few hours you see some remains of your canoe floating by and you
retrieve it from the river. There is no sign of your friend, nor of any of the
equipment you had packed, but luck is with you and you find your survival kit
still lashed to the broken thwart of what was once your canoe. Describe what is
in your kit and how you will use it.
6. Fast Food Analysis: obtain a nutrition chart from a local fast food restaurant. You
will need at least one chart per team. Before you let the students see the chart,
give them a copy of the Fast Food Analysis worksheet and ask them to write
down their favourite meal from that
restaurant. Then give each team one
chart and have them look up the
amount of salt, fat, and calories in their
Food Fat Salt Calories
favourite meal. Discuss the optimum
Item
amounts for their age group, and have
them compare their favourite meal to
those amounts. Then ask them to use
the nutrition chart to plan a nutritious
meal at the same restaurant. Allow Totals
them time to pair up with a partner and
A Nutritious Meal
discuss their meal choices.
(Figure 7) Food Fat Salt Calories
Item
Totals

CHAPTER 16 Page 207
B. Writing Applications:
1. Daily Nutrition Log and Evaluation:
After teaching students about the Food Pyramid, give each person a Daily Nutrition
Log and have them write down all the foods they eat in a day. In class the next
day, work with the students to help them classify their foods into the correct
categories. Have them figure the total number of servings in each group. Then give
each student a copy of the Nutrition Log Evaluation and ask them to compare the
number of servings they had in each group with the Recommended Daily Servings.
Ask them to write an evaluation of their diet for that day. An easy way to do this is
to have them write a topic sentence and one sentence explaining how they did in
each food group. For example, "I realise that I need to improve my diet. In the
Bread and Cereal group I was supposed to have six to eleven servings, but I only
had threes . . etc."
As an assessment of their understanding and awareness of good nutrition,
challenge your students to eat a balanced diet for one whole day. Have them
complete another Nutrition Log for that day and analyse it to see if they met their
goals.
(Figure 8)
Name: __________________________________
Parent Signature:
______________________________________
Meal Food MP BC F V MD FS
Breakfast
Lunch
Dinner
Snacks
Total Servings
MP (Meat/Protein) BC (Bread/Cereal) F (Fats) V (Vegetable) MD (Milk/Diary)

FS (Fats/Sugar)

CHAPTER 16 Page 208
Nutrition Log Evaluation

Look at the totals in each of the food groups. Compare them to the recommended servings
given below. Tell whether you need to eat more of some food groups or less of others. Per-
haps you have a balanced diet and have just the right amount in all categories. If so, name
each food group and describe how you meet the guidelines.
Recommended Daily Servings

Milk/Diary 2 to 3 Meat/Protein 2 to 3 Bread/Cereal 6 to 11
Fruits 2 to 4 Vegetables 3 to 5 Fats/Sweets Like sparingly
_________________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Climate Comparisons:
When studying weather and climate, an easy way to integrate technology is to
have students research weather and climate data for two locations and create
comparison graphs. Use the Climate Comparison Charts as a place for recording
the data. This data is readily available at the World climate website located at
www.worldclimate.com. Students simply type in the name of almost any city in the
world, and they can easily find the temperature and precipitation data. After they
record the data, have them write a paragraph comparing the weather in two
different locations. Ask them to illustrate their writing by using a spreadsheet
programme (like Microsoft Excel) to create comparison graphs.
(Figure 9)
Climate Comparison Charts Climate Comparison Charts
Average Monthly Temperatures Average Monthly Precipitation

Months Months
January January
February February
March March
April April
May May
June June
July July
August August
September September
October October
November November
December December

CHAPTER 16 Page 209
Activities for Vocabulary:

1. Dictionary Word Sort:
This activity is a simple cooperative learning strategy for practising the skill of
using guide words and entry words. You will need the Dictionary Word Sort Game-
Board for each team as well as a set of Rain Forest Word Cards. The students cut
apart the word cards and place them face down in the place provided on the
game-board. They place the Guide Word strip at the top of the game-board. The
first person on the team turns over the first entry word and tells whether it should go
on the page with those guide words, before the page, or after the page. The rest
of the team either agrees with the statement or they discuss it as a team. When all
are in agreement, the entry word is placed face up on the game-board in the
correct location. Continue with team members taking turns and the teacher
moving about the room to monitor answers.
(Figure 10 )
Rain Forest Word Card

CHAPTER 16 Page 210

CHAPTER 16 Page 211
Grammar Practice Worksheet:
Name: ____________________
Grammar Practice
Copy the sentences from the overhead and make your corrections. You may use a
dictionary or any other resource, When you discuss the sentences in class, be sure to
correct any errors that you did not find on your own.
 Correct without Help:  Correct with Help:  Incorrect:

____________________________ ____________________________ ____________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.Buddy Venn Diagram:

For this activity, you need one Buddy Venn Diagram for every pair of students.
Assign partners and distribute the worksheets. Ask the students to write one name
above each circle. Then they pass the sheet back and forth as they write words
and phrases that describe themselves. For example, if Sara and Billy are doing the
activity together, they would each write their name above one circle. Sara might
begin by saying, "I like chocolate ice-cream." If Billy agrees that he likes it too, then
Sara writes "chocolate ice-cream" in the middle. If Billy did not like chocolate ice-
cream, she would write the words in her circle only. Then Sara passes the paper to
Billy who names something about himself. He might say, "I have one brother."
Together they decide where to place the statement. They continue passing the
paper back and forth, taking turns as they write statements in the appropriate
places on the Venn Diagram.

CHAPTER 16 Page 212
(Figure13)
3. Noun Showdown:
Showdown is a cooperative learning structure that directly involves all team
members in a structured learning situation. For this activity, you will need to print
one copy of the Plural or Possessive Showdown task cards. In the Plural Noun
Showdown, you will have to fix up the cards a bit since the apostrophes seem to
have been lost. Take a black pen and add the apostrophes to the nouns which
have a noticeable space before the "s". Then make one copy of the task cards per
team and have the students cut the cards apart. The cards are placed face down
in the centre of the team. Everyone needs a piece of paper or a small chalkboard
or whiteboard. One person becomes the first leader and picks up a card. Without
showing it to the others, he or she reads the sentence aloud. The others write the
underlined noun on their chalkboards in possessive or plural form (determined by
the clues in the sentence). As each person finishes, they place their chalkboards
face down. When all boards are down, the leader says "Showdown!" and everyone
shows their answer. The leader checks answers, according to the sentence card.
For the next round, a new student on the team becomes the leader. The teacher
moves about the room, monitoring the activity and making sure students are
getting the correct answers.
(Figure 14)

CHAPTER 16 Page 213
Reading Application:
1. Food Label Comparison Chart
Ask each student to bring to school one food label showing nutrition information.
You will also need one label to use as an example. Give each team member one
copy of the Food Label Comparison worksheet, and place a transparency of the
worksheet on the overhead projector. Demonstrate how to complete the chart
using information on the sample food label. Ask each person to complete the
information for their own food label in column 1. Then everyone passes their food
labels to the left and completes column 2. Continue until all columns are filled.
Finally, each person takes turns reading one column of answers on their chart. The
rest of the team checks to see that they have the same information, and they
resolve any discrepancies by referring to the food label in question.
(Figure15)
Comparison Example 1 2 3 4
1. What is the name of the product?
2. How large is one serving?
3. How many calories per serving?

4. How man total grams of fat per serving?
5. How many grams of fiber are in each
serving?
6. How many milligrams of salt are in each
serving?
7. What is the percent Daily Value of Vita-
min C in each serving?
8. How many grams of proteins are in each
serving?
2. Early American History Timeline Activity:

You will need to print out the Early American History Timeline master to understand
these directions. Each student will need four copies of the first page and one copy
of the second page. Have each student cut apart the cards. Working in teams,
students research the events to find out their correct chronological order. On the
back of each card, they should lightly write in the date of the event. Then students
should arrange the cards in order and place them in the boxes on their four sheets.
They need to record the date of the event in the box below it before gluing the
card down. (Check the order of cards before they are glued in place.) The next
step of the activity is to go back through the events and write a brief summary of
each item in the space provided. You can structure this as an individual activity, a
pair activity, a team activity or even as a whole-class project.

CHAPTER 16 Page 214
(Figure 16)

CHAPTER 16 Page 215
These ideas are created by Laura Candler: <http://home.att.net/~candlers/resources.htm>
What if the number of students in my class is not divisible by four?

 You can have teams of three or teams of five also.
 A team of three is preferable. This is because in a team of five, one student
seems to be left out.
 Other teachers prefer to have a few teams of five because they have students
who are frequently absent.
Is there a fixed time to keep the team together?
 If students stay together all day, six weeks is still the optimal number of weeks to
keep teams together. After this, too much time will be spent dealing with social
skills!
 However, if you teach in a middle school or high school setting and you have
the students for just one period a day, you can keep them together for nine
weeks without any problem.
What about that student who cannot get along with anyone?
 Place all students on teams, but if there is someone who is extremely rude and
hard to get along with, provide another seat in the class also.
 Let the class know that working on a team is fun, but it comes with certain
responsibilities. You have to respect the members on your team and treat them
as you would like to be treated.
 If someone cannot seem to do that, remove him/her from the team for that
day and give an alternate assignment that is not so fun. In fact, make sure the
assignment involves lots of paperwork.
 If they ask for help, say that if they were on a team they could get help.
 If they come in the next day with a better attitude, they may rejoin their team.
 Just be clear about your expectations for behaviour.
What if my school tracks students into ability groups and I have all low-ability
students?
 Even within a group of students who are similar in ability, some students stand
out above the others as leaders.
 Spread those students out among the teams, and use the other factors such
as race, gender, and personality to form heterogeneous groups.
 Please use cooperative learning with these kids! They need it more than any
other group!

CHAPTER 17 Page 217
Task:
What is meant by course-book materials?
Course-book materials are all items related to the course-book package. These
materials are used to present and practise language, and to build on learners’ skills.
The course-book pack comprises; student’s book, workbook, teacher’s manual
and/or resources, audio cassettes and/ or CDs, Videos and/or DVDs related to the
units of the book, tests and photocopiable materials; some course-book even have
websites and interactive CD-ROMs.
In order to select the best course-book, the teacher needs to be familiar with
learners’ needs, language and interests. This is usually done by conducting
questionnaires, interviews or diagnostic tests.
In Alan Cunningsworth’s book, "Choosing Your Course-book" (Macmillan Publishers,
1995) there is a list of four main guidelines to help you evaluate your course-books.
They are as follows:
1. Course-books should correspond to the learners' needs. They should match the
aims and objectives of the language-learning programme.
 Cunningsworth suggests that the goals of the course should be laid out first
and that a course-book which matches the goals of your course should come
second.
 Another important point is that you should look to see if the content matches
the students' needs as well. For example, there is no use in teaching a group
of young children from China a book that is meant for adults in Europe.
2. Course-books should reflect the uses (present or future) which learners will make
of the language. Select course-books which will help to equip students to use
language effectively for their own purposes.
 Will the book you choose motivate your students? Will it encourage your
students to become autonomous learners- to learn English in their own time?
 Things to look for here include authentic materials, realistic situations, and
activities that will help develop communicative skills and strategies.
3. Course-books should take account of students' needs as learners and should
facilitate their learning processes, without dogmatically imposing a rigid 'method'.
 Cunningsworth believes that students can benefit from being allowed to use
their own style to learn. For example, some students are visual learners, while
others are aural learners.
 Students also need to be challenged- as it will help to motivate the students.
 Things to look for in the book include: quizzes, variety of topic and activity,
lively and interesting presentation of the book, and self-check lists.

CHAPTER 17 Page 218
4. Course-books should have a clear role as a support for learning. Like teachers,
they mediate between the target language and the learner.
 The activities should promote fluency and accuracy at a level that is
appropriate for your learners.
 The course-book should also support the teachers by providing a teaching
methodology or an approach to learning, as well as suggestions on how to
use the material.
Task:
Do you have any further suggestions or recommendations?
Task:
What questions should we ask when selecting teaching materials?
To select the most appropriate materials that match the aims and objectives of the
language-learning programme, the teacher needs to gather data on the following
points;
Logistic Factors:
1. Cost-effect?
2. Supplementary components needed?
3. Fit schedule requirements?
Attractiveness and Clarity of the Materials:
1. Is the material visually attractive?
2. Is it visually clear (e.g. using different colours, different fonts, headings, etc.)?
3. Does the visual material help learners to understand context and meaning?
4. Are the materials user-friendly?
Organisation:
1. Is it well organised?
2. Can you and your learners follow the 'logic' of the material and find your way
around the page or the unit quickly and easily?
Appropriateness:
1. Is it culturally appropriate?
2. Will the context(s) be familiar to learners?
3. Is it suitable for your learners' age and their needs and interests?
Interest and Motivation:
1. Will the topics be motivating to suit the age, gender, experience and personal
interests of your learners"?
2. Will it encourage your students to become autonomous learners; to learn
English in their own time?
3. Does the book present various teaching styles?
4. Does the book address various learning styles?
5. Is it generally appealing to students?

CHAPTER 17 Page 219
Pedagogical:
1. What is the main methodology used in the Course-book?
2. Is the material mainly telling the information or is it based on elicitation?
3. Does it give enough input or it asks students to discover the required
elements?
4. Is it learner-centred or teacher-centred?
5. Is it fluency- or accuracy-oriented?
6. Is the practice communicatively or mechanically oriented?
7. Are there enough rules, support, explanation and guidelines?
8. What is the main syllabus (topics, functional, notional, combination?
9. Is it at the right level?
10. Are the aims suitable, relevant, challenging and interesting?
11. Does it provide a clear enough context and/or explanations for learners to
understand new language?
12. Does it give learners enough opportunities to use the language?
13. Do activities promote fluency and accuracy at a level that is appropriate for
your learners?
14. Are the texts, tasks and activities relevant, graded, and sequenced?
15. Do the materials explicitly state the rationale that goes with needs?
16. Do the various components of the book fit harmoniously?
17. Are the skills integrated?
18. Is there enough room for practice?
19. Do materials include Real-life tasks?
20. Is there enough recycling and recapping?
21. Are reading & listening texts authentic and relevant to the stated aims?
22. Does the course-book have supporting materials (visuals, workbook, resource
book, teacher's book, answer key, transcripts, website, other)?
23. Does the course-book material have testing approach and/or readymade
quizzes?
24. What to check in materials with a lexical focus?
25. What to check in materials with a grammar focus ?

CHAPTER 17 Page 220

CHAPTER 17 Page 221
Sometimes the materials do not typically match with all the requirements of the
learning programme. In this case, teachers would need to either replace the
course-book material with materials with the same focus/aim or tailor the course-
book material by changing some items to suit her/his learner. Although it is normal
to leave out part of a unit or even a whole unit, it is recommended not to do that
frequently. This is due to two main reasons
a. It might confuse learners
b. Course-book is one of the main sources of learning and revision for our learners.
So repetition of canceling might harm the global aim of the learning
programme.
Before adapting materials, teachers need to put in mind the following questions;
what can I adapt? How can I adapt it? And where do I find alternative materials?
Adaptation could be by omitting, replacing, reordering, or adding

CHAPTER 17 Page 222
Here are some ideas to adapt material that is not suitable for a particular teaching
situation.
Strategies Problems Possible solutions
 The task or exercise is

Extending too short.  Write extra items, following
Material  The learners need more the same pattern.
practice.
 Use as much as you need,

 The task or exercise is
but do not feel you have to
Shortening too long.
use it all.
Material  The learners do not
 Give different parts of the text
need so much practice.
or task to different learners.
 The task does not suit

 Change the interaction pattern,
the learners' learning style.
e.g. use a matching task
 You want a change
Changing the as a mingling activity (i.e. one
of pace.
Form of Tasks in which learners move
 The course-book often
around the c1ass, in this case
repeats the same kind
to find their partners).
of task.
 Make material more

challenging, e.g. learners try
 The texts or tasks are
Changing the to answer comprehension
too easy or too difficult.
Level of the questions before reading.
Material  Make material less challenging,
e.g. break up a long text
into shorter sections.
 The activities in the units  Change the order of the

in the book always material, e.g. ask learners
Reordering follow the same sequence. to cover up a page or part of
Material  The learners need to a page, so that they focus
learn or practise things in a on what you want them to
different order. do first.
 Use 'extra material from

 There is not enough
the book: grammar summaries,
practice material in a
Making Use of word lists. lists of irregular verbs,
particular unit.
all the etc.
 The learners need to
Resources in  Give whole-book tasks, e.g.
revise particular items.
the Book searching through the book
 You want to preview
for texts, pictures, language
material in a future unit.
examples.

CHAPTER 17 Page 223
When planning lessons, think about what the course-book gives you, and what you
need to add. For example:
Course-book provides: Teacher can provide additional:
Situation/ context Warmer

Picture Instructions
Dialogues (audio, script, video) Role-play
Tasks and exercises Homework tasks
References:
 Gabrielatos,C. 2004, Session Plan: The Course-book as a Flexible
ToolPublished in: IATEFL Teacher Trainers and Educators SIG Newsletter
1/2004, 28-31. Cunningham, A. 1995. Choosing Your Course-book.
Heinemann.
 Dendrinos, B. 1992. The EFL Course-book and Ideology. N.C. Grivas
Publications.
 Gabrielatos, C. 2001. ‘Shopping at the ELT Supermarket: Principled decisions
and practices.’ ELT News 144 (February 2001). Revised version 2002 (March)
Developing Teachers, <http://www.developingteachers.com/
articles_tchtraining/eltshop1_costas.htm.>
 Karavas-Doukas, E. 1996. ‘Using Attitude Scales to Investigate Teachers’
Attitudes to the Communicative Approach.’ ELT Journal 50/3.
 Roberts, J. 1998. Language Teacher Education. Arnold.
 Scrivener, J. 1996. ‘ARC: A Descriptive Model for Classroom Work on
Language.’ In Willis, J. & Willis, D. (eds.) Challenge and Change in
Language Teaching. Macmillan Heinemann.
 Woods, D. 1996. Teacher Cognition in Language Teaching. Cambridge
University Press.

R EFERENCES Page 225
References and Books on Methodology:

 Asher, James. 1977. Learning Another Language Through Actions: The
Complete Teacher's Guidebook. Los Gatos, CA: Sly Oaks Productions. See also
http://www.tpr-world.com/.
 Brown, H. Douglas. 1994. Teaching by Principles: An Interactive Approach to
Language Pedagogy. Prentice Hall.
 Carroll E. R. (1969). The Learning of Language. National Council of Teachers of
English Publication. New York.
 Finocchiaro, Mary & Brumfit, Christopher. 1983. The Functional-Notional
Approach: From Theory to Practice. Oxford University Press.
 Krashen, Stephen D., & Terrell, Tracy D. 1983. The Natural Approach: Language
Acquisition in the Classroom. Pergamon Press. See also Bilingual Education:
Arguments For and (Bogus) Arguments Against , Theory of Second Language
Acquisition, A Summary of Stephen Krashen's "Principles and Practice in Second
Language Acquisition", Why Bilingual Education?.
 Larsen-Freeman, Dianne. 1986. Techniques and Principles in Language
Teaching. New York: Oxford University Press.
 Nunan, David. 1991. Language Teaching Methodology: A Textbook for
Teachers. Prentice Hall. See also http://ec.hku.hk/dcnunan/
 Prator, Clifford H. & Celce-Murcia, Marianne. 1979. "An outline of language
teaching approaches." In Celce-Murcia, Marianne & McIntosh, Lois (Ed.),
Teaching English as a Second or Foreign Language. Newbury House.
 Richards, Jack & Rodgers, Theodore. 1986. Approaches and Methods in
Language Teaching. New York: Cambridge University Press.
References: What Language Teaching Is
 Beretta, A. (1991). Theory construction in SLA: Complementarity and opposition.
Studies in Second Language Acquisition, 13 (4), 493-511.
 Brown, D. (1994). Teaching by principles: An interactive approach to language
pedagogy. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall Regents.
 Chamot, A.U. (1995). The teacher's voice: Action research in your classroom.
ERIC/CLL News Bulletin, 18 (2).
 Doff, A. (1988). Teach English: A training course for teachers. Cambridge:
Cambridge University Press.
 Harmer, J. (1991). The practice of English language teaching. London:
Longman.
 Kramsch, C. (1993). Context and culture in language teaching. New York:
Oxford University Press.
 Kramsch, C. (1995). Embracing conflict versus achieving consensus in foreign
language education. ADFL Bulletin, 26(3), 6-12.
 Lightbown, P., & Spada, N. (1992). How languages are learned. Oxford: Oxford
University Press.
 Richards, J., & Lockhart, C. (1994). Reflective teaching in second language
classrooms. New York: Cambridge University Press.
 Rivers, W. (1988). Teaching French: A practical guide. Lincolnwood, IL: National
Textbook Company.

 Sandrock, P. (1995). Foreign language education at the crossroads: Bringing

coherence to the journey of a lifetime. In R. Donato & R. M. Terry (Eds.), Foreign
language learning: The journey of a lifetime (pp. 167-188).
 Schön, D. (1983). The reflective practitioner: How professionals think in action.
New York: Basic Books.
 Seldin, P. (1991). The teaching portfolio: A practical guide to improved
performance and promotion/tenure decisions. Bolton, MA: Anker Publishing.
 Wallace, M. J. (1991). Training foreign language teachers: A reflective
approach. New York: Cambridge University Press.
References: Teaching Methods
 Bailey, N., Madden, C., & Krashen, S. (1974). Is there a "natural sequence" in
adult second language learning? Language Learning 21, 235-243.
 Bennett, J. (1996). Learner-centered instruction for adult learners. A workshop for
curriculum designers involved in the revision of the NAFSA curriculum.
Washington, DC: NAFSA: Association of International Educators.
 Bialystok, E. (1990). Communication strategies: A psychological analysis of
second language use. Oxford: Basil Blackwell.
 Biber, D. (1988). Variation across speech and writing. Cambridge: Cambridge
University Press.
 Bloom, B.S. (Ed.). (1956). Taxonomy of educational objectives: The classification
of educational goals. Handbook I: Cognitive domain. New York: David McKay.
 Brinton, D., Snow, M. A., and Wesche, M. B. (1989). Content-based second
language instruction. New York: Newbury House/Harper & Row.
 Brooks, N (1960). Language and language learning: Theory and practice. New
York: Harcourt, Brace & World.
 Brown, D. (1994). Teaching by principles: An interactive approach to language
pedagogy. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall Regents.
 Brown, H. D. (1987). Principles of language learning and teaching (2nd ed.).
Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall.
 Bruffee, K. A. (1984). Collaborative learning and the "conversation of mankind."
College English 46, 635-652.
 Canale, M., and Swain, M. (1980). Theoretical bases of communicative
approaches to second language teaching and testing. Applied Linguistics, 1
(1), 1-47.
 Chaudron, C. (1988). Second language classrooms: Research on teaching and
learning. New York: Cambridge University Press.
 Cummins, J. (1991). Interdependence of first- and second-language proficiency
in bilingual children. In E. Bialystok (Ed.), Language processing in bilingual
children. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
 Doughty, C., & Pica, T. (1986). "Information gap" tasks: Do they facilitate second
language acquisition? TESOL Quarterly 20, 305-325.
 Ellis, R. (1994). The study of second language acquisition. Oxford: Oxford
University Press.
 Flynn, S., & O'Neill, W. (Eds.). (1988). Linguistic theory in second language
acquisition. Dordrecht: Kluwer.

 Freed, B. F. (Ed.). (1991). Foreign language acquisition research and the

classroom. Lexington, MA: D. C. Heath.
 Gass, S. M. (1988). Integrating research areas: A framework for second
language studies. Applied Linguistics 9 , 198-217.
 Gass, S. M., & Schachter, J. (Eds.). (1989). Linguistic perspectives on second
language acquisition. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
 Gass, S. M., & Selinker, L. (1994). Second language acquisition: An introductory
course. Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum.
 Harley, B., Allen, P., Cummins, J., & Swain, M. (Eds.). (1990). The development of
second language proficiency. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
 Hilles, S. (1986). Interlanguage and the pro-drop parameter. Second Language
Research 2, 33-52.
 Hymes, D. (1970). On communicative competence. In J. Gumperz & D. Hymes
(Eds.), Directions in sociolinguistics. New York: Holt, Rinehart & Winston.
 Hymes, D. (1971). Competence and performance in linguistic theory. In R.
Huxley & E. Ingram (Eds.), Language acquisition: Models and methods.
Academic Press.
 Kramsch, C., & McConnell-Ginet, S. (Eds.). (1992). Text and context: Cross-
disciplinary perspectives on language study. Lexington, MA: D.C. Heath.
 Krashen, S. (1977). Some issues relating to the monitor model. In H. Brown, C.
Yorio, & R. Crymes, (Eds.), On TESOL '77. Washington, DC: TESOL.
 Krashen, S. (1982). Principles and practice in second language acquisition.
Oxford: Pergamon.
 Krashen, S. (1985). The input hypothesis: Issues and implications. London:
Longman.
 Krashen, S. (1992). Some new evidence for an old hypothesis. Paper delivered
at the Georgetown University Round Table in Linguistics, Washington, DC.
 Krashen, S., Butler, J., Birnbaum, R., & Robertson, J. (1978). Two studies in
language acquisition and language learning. ITL: Review of Applied Linguistics
39/40, 73-92.
 Krathwohl, D. R., Bloom, B. S., & Masia, B. B. (1964). Taxonomy of educational
objectives: The classification of educational goals. Handbook II: Affective
domain. New York: David McKay.
 Krueger, M., & Ryan, F. (Eds.). (1993). Language and content: Discipline- and
content-based approaches to language study. Lexington, MA: D. C. Heath.
 Larsen-Freeman, D. (1991). Second language acquisition research: Staking out
the territory. TESOL Quarterly, 25 (2), 315-350.
 Larsen-Freeman, D., & Long, M.H. (1991). An introduction to second language
acquisition research. London: Longman.
 Lee, J. F. and VanPatten, B. (1995). Making communicative language teaching
happen. McGraw-Hill, Inc.
 Lewis, M. and Hill, J. (1992). Practical techniques for language teaching.
Language Teaching Publications.

 Lightbown, P. (1981). What have we here? Some observations on the effect of

instruction on L2 learning. In E. Phillipson, E. Kellerman, L. Selinker, M. Sharwood-
Smith, & M. Swain (Eds.), Foreign/second language pedagogy research.
Clevedon: Multilingual Matters.
 Lightbown, P. (1985). Great expectations: Second language acquisition
research and classroom teaching. Applied Linguistics 6, 173-189.
 Littlewood, W. (1981). Communicative language teaching: An introduction.
 Littlewood, W. (1984). Foreign and second language learning. Cambridge:
 Livingstone, C. (1983). Role play in language learning. London: Longman.
 Long, M., & Crookes, G. (1992). Three approaches to task-based syllabus design.
TESOL Quarterly 26 (1) , 27-56.
 McCarthy, M. (1991). Discourse analysis for language teachers. Cambridge
University Press.
 McLaughlin, B. (1987). Theories of second-language learning. London: Edward
Arnold.
 Nemser, W. (1971). Approximative systems of foreign language learners.
International Review of Applied Linguistics 9 , 115-123.
 Nunan, D. (1988). The learner-centered curriculum: A study in second language
teaching. New York: Cambridge University Press.
 Nunan, D. (1989). Designing tasks for the communicative classroom. Cambridge
University Press.
 Omaggio Hadley, A. (1993). Teaching language in context (2nd ed.). Heinle &
Heinle.
 Pica, T., & Doughty, C. (1985). The role of group work in classroom second
language acquisition. Studies in Second Language Acquisition, 7 , 233-248.
 Pinker, S. (1994). The language instinct: How the mind creates language. New
York: William Morrow.
 Preston, D. R. (1989). Sociolinguistics and second language acquisition. London:
Basil Blackwell.
 Pride, J. B. (1979). Sociolinguistic aspects of language learning and teaching.
London: Oxford University Press.
 Savignon, S. (1972). Communicative competence: An experiment in foreign
language teaching. Center for Curriculum Development.
 Savignon, S. (1983). Communicative competence: Theory and classroom
practice. Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley.
 Savignon, S. (1991). Communicative language teaching: State of the art. TESOL
Quarterly, 25 (2), 261-277.
 Schachter, J. (1990). Communicative competence revisited. In B. Harley, P.
Allen, J. Cummins, & M. Swain (Eds.), The development of second language
proficiency (pp. 39-49). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
 Shrum, J. L., & Glisan, E. W. (1994). Teacher's handbook: Contextualized
language instruction. Heinle & Heinle.

 Spada, N. (1987). Relationships between instructional differences and learning

outcomes: A process-product study of communicative language teaching.
Applied Linguistics, 8 (2), 137-161.
 Spolsky, B. (1989). Conditions for language learning. London: Oxford University
Press.
 Swain, M. (1985). Communicative competence: Some roles of comprehensible
input and comprehensible output in its development. In S. Gass & C. Madden
(Eds.), Input in second language acquisition. Rowley, MA: Newbury House.
 Tarone, E. (1988). Variation in interlanguage. London: Edward Arnold.
 Walz, J. (1989). Context and contextualized language practice in foreign
language teaching. The Modern Language Journal, 73 (2), 160-168.
References: Planning a Lesson
 Chamot, A. U., & O'Malley, J. M. (1994). The CALLA handbook: Implementing
the cognitive academic language learning approach. Reading, MA: Addison-
Wesley.
 Kramsch, C. J. The order of discourse in language teaching. In B. F. Freed (Ed.),
Foreign language acquisition and the classroom (pp. 191-204). Lexington, MA:
D. C. Heath.
 Lee, J. F., & VanPatten, B. (1995). Making communicative language teaching
happen. San Francisco: McGraw-Hill.
 Lewis, M., & Hill, J. (1992). Practical techniques for language teaching.
Language Teaching Publications.
 Lightbown, P. (1983). Exploring relationships between developmental and
instructional sequences in L2 acquisition. In H. Seliger & M. Long (Eds.),
Classroom-oriented research second language acquisition (pp. 217-243).
Rowley, MA: Newbury House.
 McCutcheon, G. (1980). How do elementary school teachers plan? The nature
of the planning process and influences on it. The Elementary School Journal, 81
(1), 4-23.
 Nunan, D. (1989). Designing tasks for the communicative classroom.
Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
 Omaggio Hadley, A. (1993). Teaching language in context (2nd ed.). Boston:
Heinle & Heinle.
 Rooks, G. (1981). Nonstop discussion book. Cambridge, MA: Newbury House.
 Shrum, J. L., & Glisan, E. W. (1994). Teacher's handbook: Contextualized
language instruction. Boston: Heinle & Heinle.
 VanPatten, B. (1990). Attending to form and content in the input. Studies in
Second Language Acquisition, 12, 287-301.
 VanPatten, B., & Cadierno, T. (1993). Explicit instruction and input processing.
Studies in Second Language Acquisition, 15, 225-244.
 RESOURCES: MOTIVATING LEARNERS
 Bialystok, E. (1990). Communication strategies: A psychological analysis of
second language use. Oxford: Basil Blackwell.
 Chamot, A. U. (1993). Student responses to learning strategy instruction in the
foreign language classroom. Foreign Language Annals, 26(3), 308-321.

 Chamot, A. U., Barnhardt, S., El-Dinary, P. B., Carbonaro, G., & Robbins, J. (1993).
Methods for teaching learning strategies in foreign language instruction and
informal assessment of language skills. Final report submitted to Center for
International Education, U.S. Department of Education. Available from ERIC
Clearinghouse on Languages and Linguistics, ED 365 157.
 Chamot, A. U., & Küpper, L. (1989). Learning strategies in foreign language
instruction. Foreign Language Annals, 22(1), 13-24.
 Derry, S. J. (1990). Learning strategies for acquiring useful knowledge. In B. F.
Jones & L. Idol (Eds.), Dimensions of thinking and cognitive instruction (pp. 347-
379). Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum.
 Gagné, E. D., Yekovich, C. W., & Yekovich, F. R. (1993). The cognitive
psychology of school learning (2nd ed.). New York: Harper Collins.
 Gardner, R. C. (1985). Social psychology and second language learning: The
role of attitudes and motivation. London: Edward Arnold.
 Gardner, R. C., & Lambert, W. (1972). Attitudes and motivation in second-
language learning. Rowley, MA: Newbury House.
 Gass, S. M., & Selinker, L. (1994). Second language acquisition: An introductory
course. Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum.
 Harley, B., Allen, P., Cummins, J., & Swain, M. (Eds.). (1990). The development of
second language proficiency. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
 Hosenfeld, C., Arnold, V., Kirchofer, J., Laciura, J., & Wilson, L. (1981). Second
language reading: A curricular sequence for teaching reading strategies.
Foreign Language Annals, 14(5), 415-422.
 Larsen-Freeman, D., & Long, M. H. (1991). An introduction to second language
acquisition research. London: Longman.
 O'Malley, J. M., & Chamot, A. U. (1990). Learning strategies in second language
acquisition. New York: Cambridge University Press.
 O'Malley, J. M., Chamot, A. U., & Küpper, L. (1989). Listening comprehension
strategies in second language acquisition. Applied Linguistics, 10(4), 418-437.
 Oxford, R. (1990). Language learning strategies: What every teacher should
know. Boston: Heinle & Heinle.
 Oxford, R., & Cohen, A. (1992). Language learning strategies: Critical issues of
concept and classification. Applied Language Learning, 3, 1-35.
 Palincsar, A. S., & Brown, A. L. (1985). Reciprocal teaching: Activities to promote
"reading with your mind." In T. L. Harris & E. J. Cooper (Eds.), Reading, thinking,
and concept development: Strategies for the classroom (pp. 147-160). New
York: The College Board.
 Palincsar, A. S., & Brown, A. L. (1986). Interactive teaching to promote
independent learning from text. The Reading Teacher, 39(2), 771-777.
 Paris, S. G., & Winograd, P. (1990). How metacognition can promote academic
learning and instruction. In B. F. Jones & L. Idol (Eds.), Dimensions of thinking and
cognitive instruction (pp. 15-51). Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum.
 Pressley, M., & Harris, K. (1990). What we really know about strategy instruction.
Educational Leadership, 48(1), 31-34.

 Rost, M., & Ross, S. (1991). Learner use of strategies in interaction: Typology and
teachability. Language Learning, 41(2), 235-273.
 Spolsky, B. (1989). Conditions for language learning. London: Oxford University
Press.
 Thompson, I., & Rubin, J. (1995). How to be a more successful language learner
(2nd ed.). Boston: Heinle & Heinle.
 Titone, R., & Danesi, M. (1985). Applied psycho-linguistics: An introduction to the
psychology of language learning and teaching. Toronto: University of Toronto
Press.
 Vann, R. J., & Abraham, R. G. (1990). Strategies of unsuccessful language
learners. TESOL Quarterly, 24, 177-198.
 Wenden, A. (1987). How to be a successful learner: Insights and prescriptions
from L2 learners. In A. Wenden & J. Rubin (Eds.), Learner strategies in language
learning. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall.
 Wenden, A., & Rubin, J. (Eds.). (1987). Learner strategies in language learning.
Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall.
 Zimmerman, B. J., & Pons, M. M. (1986). Development of a structured interview
for assessing student use of self-regulated learning strategies. American
Educational Research Journal, 23(3), 614-628.
References: Teaching Grammar
 Bygate, M., Tonkyn, A., & Williams, E. (Eds.). (1994). Grammar and the language
teacher. Hemel Hempstead, England: Prentice Hall.
 Byrd, P. (1994). Writing grammar textbooks: Theory and practice. System, 22 (2),
245-255.
 Byrd, P. (1995). Issues in the writing and publication of grammar textbooks. In P.
Byrd (Ed.), Material writer's guide (pp. 45-63). Boston: Heinle & Heinle.
 Celce-Murcia, M., & Hilles, S. (1988). Techniques and resources in teaching
grammar. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
 Cook, V. (1994). Universal grammar and the learning and teaching of second
languages. In T. Odlin (Ed.), Perspectives on pedagogical grammar (pp. 25-48).
 Hubbard, P. L. (1994). Non-transformational theories of grammar: Implications
for language teaching. In T. Odlin (Ed.), Perspectives on pedagogical grammar
(pp. 25-48). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
 Krashen, S. (1981). Second language acquisition and second language
learning. London: Continuum.
 Larsen-Freeman, D. (1997). Grammar and its teaching: Challenging the myths
(ERIC Digest). Washington, DC: ERIC Clearinghouse on languages and
Linguistics, Center for Applied Linguistics. Retrieved May 14, 2003, from http://
www.cal.org/ericcll/digest/larsen01.html
 Larsen-Freeman, D. (2001a). Teaching grammar. In M. Celce-Murcia (Ed.),
Teaching English as a second or foreign language. (3rd ed.) (pp. 251-266).
Boston: Heinle & Heinle.
 Larsen-Freeman, D. (2001b). Teaching language: From grammar to
grammaring. Boston: Heinle & Heinle.

 Lee, J. F., & VanPatten, B. (1995). Making communicative language teaching

happen. New York: McGraw-Hill.
 Omaggio Hadley, A. (2001). Teaching language in context (3 rd ed.). Boston:
Heinle & Heinle.
 Rutherford, W. (1987). Second language grammar: Learning and teaching.
London: Longman.
 Rutherford, W., & Sharwood Smith, M. (1988). Grammar and second language
teaching: A book of readings. New York: Newbury House.
 Ur, P. (1988). Grammar practice activities: A practical guide for teachers.
 Weaver, C. (1996). Teaching grammar in context. Portsmouth, NH: Heinemann.
References: Teaching Listening
 Byrnes, H. (1984). The role of listening comprehension: A theoretical base.
Foreign Language Annals , 17 , 317-329.
 Coakley, C.G., & Wolvin, A.D. (1986). Listening in the native language. In B. H.
Wing (Ed.), Listening, reading, writing: Analysis and application (pp. 11-42).
Middlebury, VT: Northeast Conference.
 Gass, S. M. (1988). Integrating research areas: A framework for second
language studies. Applied Linguistics, 9 , 198-217.
 Lund, R.J. (1990). A taxonomy for teaching second language listening. Foreign
Language Annals, 23 , 105-115.
 Mendelsohn, D.J., & Rubin, J. (1995). A guide for the teaching of second
language listening. San Diego, CA: Dominie Press.
 Morley, J. (1991). Listening comprehension in second/foreign language
instruction. In M. Celce-Murcia (Ed.), Teaching English as a second or foreign
language (pp. 81-106). Boston, MA: Heinle & Heinle.
 Nunan, D., & Miller, L. (Eds.). (1995). New ways in teaching listening. Alexandria,
VA: TESOL.
 Omaggio-Hadley, A. (1993). Teaching language in context (2nd ed.). Boston,
MA: Heinle & Heinle.
 Peterson, P.W. (1991). A synthesis of methods for interactive listening. In M.
Celce-Murcia (Ed.), Teaching English as a second or foreign language (pp. 106-
122). Boston, MA: Heinle & Heinle.
 Richards, J.C. (1983). Listening comprehension: Approach, design, procedure.
TESOL Quarterly, 17 , 219-240.
 Rixon, S. (1981). The design of materials to foster particular linguistic skills. The
teaching of listening comprehension. (ERIC Document Reproduction Service
No. ED 258 465).
 Rost, M. (1990). Listening in language learning. London: Longman.
 Rubin, J. (1987). Learner strategies: Theoretical assumptions, research history
and typology. In A. Wenden & J. Rubin (Eds.), Learner strategies in language
learning (pp. 15-30). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall.
 Rubin, J. (1995). The contribution of video to the development of competence
in listening. In D.J. Mendelsohn & J. Rubin (Eds.), A guide for the teaching of
second language listening (pp. 151-165). San Diego, CA: Dominie Press.

 Underwood, M. (1989). Teaching listening. London: Longman.
References: Teaching Speaking

 Brown, and G. Yule. (1983). Teaching the spoken language. New York:
 Schmidt, R. W., & Frota, S. N. (1986). Developing basic conversational ability in a
second language: A case study of an adult learner of Portuguese. In R. R. Day
(Ed.), Talking to learn (pp. 237-326). Rowley, MA: Newbury House.
References: Teaching Reading
 Ackersold, J. A., & Field, M. L. (1997). From reader to reading teacher: Issues and
strategies for second language classrooms. New York: Cambridge University
Press.
 Anderson, N. (1999). Exploring second language reading: Issues and strategies.
Boston, MA: Heinle & Heinle.
 Barnett, M. A. (1989). More than meets the eye: Foreign language learner
reading theory and practice. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice Hall Regents.
 Bernhardt, E. (1991). Reading development in a second language. Norwood, NJ:
Ablex.
 Carrell, P. L. (1989). Metacognitive awareness and second language reading.
Modern Language Journal, 73, 121-133.
 Day, R. R., & Bamford, J. (1998). Extensive reading in the second language
classroom. New York: Cambridge University Press.
 Devine, J. (1993). The role of metacognition in second language reading and
writing. In J. G. Carson & I. Leki (Eds.), Reading in the composition classroom (pp.
105-127). Boston, MA: Heinle & Heinle.
 Eskey, D. (2002). Reading and the teaching of L2 reading. TESOL Journal, 11(1), 5-
9.
 Galloway, V. (1992). Toward a cultural reading of authentic texts. In H. Byrnes
(Ed.), Languages for a multicultural world in transition (pp. 87-121). Lincolnwood,
IL: National Textbook Co.
 Glazer, S. M. (1992). Reading comprehension: Self-monitoring strategies to
develop independent readers. New York: Scholastic Professional Books.
 Grellet, F. (1981). Developing reading skills: A practical guide to reading
comprehension exercises. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
 Hosenfeld, C., Arnold, V., Kirchofer, J., Laciura, J., & Wilson, L. Second language
reading: A curricular sequence for teaching reading strategies. Foreign
Language Annals, 14, 415-422.
 Kramsch, C. (1985). Literary texts in the classroom: A discourse model. The
Modern Language Journal, 69(4), 356-366.
 Phillips, J. K. (1985). Proficiency-based instruction in reading: A teacher
education module. Introductory Packet; Applications Packet; Sample Materials.
Material produced in conjunction with a grant from the International Research
and Studies Program, U.S. Department of Education.
 Silberstein, S. (1994). Techniques and resources in teaching reading. New York:
Oxford University Press.

 Swaffar, J., Arens, K., & Byrnes, H. (1991). Reading for meaning: An integrated
approach to language learning. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall.
 Urquhart, A. H., & Weir, C. (1998). Reading in a second language: Process,
product, and practice. New York: Longman.
References: Teaching Writing
 Dvorak, T. (1986). Writing in the foreign language. In B. Wing (Ed.), Listening,
reading, writing: Analysis and application (pp. 145-167). Northeast Conference
Reports. Middlebury, VT: Northeast Conference.
 Glazer, S. M., & Brown, C. S. (1993). Portfolios and beyond: Collaborative
assessment in reading and writing. Norwood, MA: Christopher-Gordon
Publishers.
 Graves, D. H. (1983). Writing: Teachers and children at work. Portsmouth, NH:
Heinemann.
 Hewins, C. (1986). Writing in a foreign language: Motivation and the process
approach. Foreign Language Annals, 19(3), 219-223.
 Lloyd-Jones, R. (1977). Primary trait scoring. In C. R. Cooper & L. Odell (Eds.),
Evaluating writing (pp. 33-66). Urbana, IL: National Council on the Teaching of
English.
 Terry, R. M. (1989). Teaching and evaluating writing as a communicative skill.
Foreign Language Annals, 22(1), 43-54.
 Tierney, R. J., Carter, M. A., & Desai, L. E. (1991). Portfolio assessment in the
reading-writing classroom . Norwood, MA: Christopher-Gordon Publishers.
 White, E. (1985). Teaching and assessing writing. San Francisco: Jossey-Bass.
References: Miscellanies
 Abbott, G. & P. Wingard. (1985). The Teaching of English as an International
Language: A Practical Guide. Great Britain.
 Austin S. . (1970). Speaking & Listening:A Contemporary Approach. Harcourt,
Brace & World, Inc. USA
 Allen, W. W. (1985). Toward cultural proficiency. In Alice C. Omaggio (Ed.),
Proficiency, curriculum, articulation: The ties that bind . Reports of the Northeast
Conference on the Teaching of Foreign Languages (pp. 137-166). Middlebury,
VT: Northeast Conference.
 Allen, W., & Fouletier-Smith, N. (1995). Parallèles: Communication et culture.
Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice Hall.
 American Association of Teachers of German. (1997). Focus on student
standards. AATG Newsletter, 32(2): 9-15.
 Birckbichler, D. W. (1995). Ohio's Collaborative Articulation and Assessment
Project. ADFL Bulletin 26(3): 44-45.
 Brown, H. D. (2001). Teaching by principles. An interactive approach to
language teaching pedagogy. Newyork: Longman
 Brooks, N. (1960). Language and language learning: Theory and practice. New
York: Harcourt, Brace and World.
 Brooks, N. (1983). Teaching culture in the foreign language classroom. Foreign
Language Annals, 16.

 Byram, M. (1989). Cultural studies in foreign language education. Philadelphia,

PA: Multilingual Matters.
 Celce Å\Murcia, M. & L. mcIntosh. (1979). Teaching English as a Second or
Foreign Language. Newbury House Publishers, Inc. Massachusetts.
 Clark, M. (1976). Second language acquisition as a clash of consciousness.
Language Learning 26: 377-389.
 Crawford-Lange, L. M., & Lange, D. L. (1984). Doing the unthinkable in the
second language classroom: A process for the integration of language and
culture. In T. V. Higgs (Ed.), Teaching for proficiency: The organizing principle.
ACTFL Foreign Language Education Series (pp. 139-177). Lincolnwood, IL:
National Textbook Company.
 Damen, L. (1987). Culture learning: The fifth dimension in the language
classroom. Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley.
 Dendrinos, B. 1992. The EFL Course-book and Ideology. N.C. Grivas Publications.
 Fearing, F. (1954). An examination of the conceptions of Benjamin Whorf in the
light of theories of perception and cognition. In H. Hoijer (Ed.), Language and
culture. Conference
 on the interrelations of language and other aspects of culture (pp. 47-81).
Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
 Fiedler, F. E., Mitchell, T., & Triandis, H. C. (1971). The culture assimilator: An
approach to cross-cultural training. Journal of Applied Psychology 55: 95-102.
 Foreign Languages: Ohio's Model Competency-Based Program. (1996).
Columbus, OH: The Ohio Department of Education.
 Fox J. W. (1974). Teaching Listening Skills. English Teaching Forum. October --
December, 12, pp. 42-45
 Furnham, A., & Bochner, S. (1989). Culture shock. New York: Routledge.
 Gabrielatos, C. 2001. ‘Shopping at the ELT Supermarket: Principled decisions
and practices.’ ELT News 144 (February 2001). Revised version 2002 (March)
Developing Teachers, http://www.developingteachers.com/
articles_tchtraining/eltshop1_costas.htm.
 Gabrielatos,C. 2004, Session Plan: The Course-book as a Flexible ToolPublished
in: IATEFL Teacher Trainers and Educators SIG Newsletter 1/2004, 28-31.
Cunningham, A. 1995. Choosing Your Course-book. Heinemann.
 Galloway, V. (1992). Toward a cultural reading of authentic texts. In H. Byrnes
(Ed.), Languages for a multicultural world in transition. Northeast Conference
Reports on the Teaching of Foreign Languages (pp. 87-121). Lincolnwood, IL:
National Textbook Company.
 Giles, H., Bourhis, R. Y., & Taylor, D. M. (1977). Toward a theory of language in
ethnic group relations. In H. Giles (Ed.), Language, ethnicity, and inter-group
relations (pp. 307-348). New York: Academic Press.
 Hendon, U. S. (1980). Introducing culture in the high school foreign language
class. Foreign Language Annals, 13.
 Joiner, E. (1977). Communicative Activities for Beginning Language Students.
English Teaching Forum, April, 15, pp. 8-9.

 Goode, T., Sockalingam, S., Bronheim, S., Brown, M., and Jones, W. (2000). A
planner's guide: Infusing principles, content and themes related to cultural and
linguistic competence into meetings and conferences. Washington, DC:
National Center for Cultural Competence. Retrieved October 9, 2006, from
http://www11.georgetown.edu/research/gucchd/nccc/resources/
publicationstitle.html
 Grandin, J. M., Einbeck, K., & von Reinhart, W. (1992). The changing goals of
language instruction. In H. Byrnes (Ed.), Languages for a multicultural world in
transition. Reports of the Northeast Conference on the Teaching of Foreign
Languages (pp. 123-163). Lincolnwood, IL: National Textbook Company.
 Heidi Byrnes. (1998) “Reading in the beginning and intermediate college foreign
language class” by, in Modules for the professional preparation of teaching
assistants in foreign languages (Grace Stovall Burkart, ed.; Washington, DC:
Center for Applied Linguistics.
 Karavas-Doukas, E. 1996. ‘Using Attitude Scales to Investigate Teachers’
Attitudes to the Communicative Approach.’ ELT Journal 50/3.
 Kramsch, C. (1993). Redrawing the boundaries of foreign language study. In M.
Krueger & F. Ryan (Eds.), Language and content: Discipline- and content-based
approaches to language study. Heath Series on Foreign Language Acquisition
Research and Instruction (pp. 203-217). Lexington, MA: D. C. Heath.
 Kramsch, C. (1994). Context and culture in language teaching. London: Oxford
University Press.
 Kramsch, C. (1995). Embracing conflict versus achieving consensus in foreign
language education. ADFL Bulletin, 26(3): 6-12.
 Krathwohl, D. R., Bloom, B. S., & Masia, B. B. (1964). Taxonomy of educational
objectives: The classification of educational goals. Handbook II: Affective
domain. New York: David McKay.
 Krueger, M., & Ryan, F. (Eds.). (1993). Language and content: Discipline- and
content-based approaches to language study. Heath Series on Foreign
Language Acquisition Research and Instruction. Lexington, MA: D. C. Heath.
 Lafayette, R. C. (Ed.) (1996). National standards: A catalyst for reform. The ACTFL
Foreign Language Education Series. Lincolnwood, IL: National Textbook
Company.
 Lambert, W. E. (1975). Culture and language as factors in learning and
education. In A. Wolfgang (Ed.), Education of immigrant students (pp. 55-83).
Toronto: Ontario Institute for Studies in Education.
 Lange, D. L. (1997). Models of articulation: Struggles and successes. ADFL
Bulletin 28: 31-42.
 Mary Spartt, Alan Pulverness, Melanie Williams. (2000). The TKT Course. University
of Cambridge ESOL Examination .Cambridge University Press.
 The Massachusetts World Languages Framework: Making Connections Through
World Languages. (1995). Malden, MA: The Massachusetts Department of
Education.
 Meade, B., & Morain, G. (1973). The culture cluster. Foreign Language Annals 6:
331-338.

 Metcalf, M. F. (1995). Articulating the teaching of foreign languages: The

Minnesota Project. ADFL Bulletin 26(3): 52-54.
 Miller, J. D., & Bishop, R. H. (1979). USA-Mexico culture capsules. Rowley, MA:
Newbury House.
 Miller, J. D., Drayton, J., & Lyon, T. (1979). USA-Hispanic South American culture
capsules. Rowley, MA: Newbury House.
 Miller, J. D., & Loiseau, M. (1974). USA-France culture capsules. Rowley, MA:
Newbury House.
 Moorjani, A., & Field, T. T. (1988). Semiotic and sociolinguistic paths to
understanding culture. In A. J. Singerman (Ed.), Toward a new integration of
language and culture. Reports of the Northeast Conference on the Teaching of
Foreign Languages (pp. 25-45). Middlebury, VT: Northeast Conference.
 Moran, P. R. (2001). Teaching culture: Perspectives in practice. Boston: Heinle &
Heinle.
 National Standards in Foreign Language Education Project. (1999). Standards
for foreign language learning in the 21st century. Yonkers, NY: The National
Standards Project.
 Nostrand, H. L. (1967). Background data for the teaching of French. Seattle:
University of Washington.
 Nostrand, H. L. (1978). The "emergent model" applied to contemporary France.
Contemporary French Civilization 2(2): 277-294.
 Oberg, K. (1960). Culture shock: Adjustment to new cultural environments.
Practical Anthropology 7: 188-202.
 Omaggio Hadley, A. (1993). Teaching language in context (2nd ed.). Boston:
Heinle & Heinle.
 Peck, D. (n.d.). Teaching culture: Beyond language. Yale-New Haven Teachers
Institute. Retrieved September 6, 2006, from http://www.yale.edu/ynhti/
curriculum/units/1984/3/84.03.06.x.html
 Peterson, E., & Coltrane, B. (2003). Culture in second language teaching. CAL
Digest. Washington, DC: Center for Applied Linguistics. Retrieved September 6,
2006, from http://www.cal.org/resources/digest/0309peterson.html
 Preston, D. R. (1989). Sociolinguistics and second language acquisition. London:
Basil Blackwell.
 Pride, J. B. (1979). Sociolinguistic aspects of language learning and teaching.
London: Oxford University Press.
 Roberts, J. 1998. Language Teacher Education. Arnold.
 Rosie Tanner ,Catherine Green. (2000). Tasks for teacher education: a reflective
approach, London: Longman.
 Sapir, E. (1964). Culture, language, and personality: Selected essays. Edited by
David G. Mandelbaum. Berkeley, CA: University of California Press.
 Schumann, J. H. (1978). The acculturation model for second language
acquisition. In R. C. Gingras (Ed.), Second language acquisition and second
language teaching (pp. 27-50). Washington, D.C.: Center for Applied
Linguistics.

 Scrivener, J. 1996. ‘ARC: A Descriptive Model for Classroom Work on Language.’

In Willis, J. & Willis, D. (eds.) Challenge and Change in Language Teaching.
Macmillan Heinemann.
 Seelye, H. N. (1994). Teaching culture: Strategies for intercultural communication
(3rd ed.). Lincolnwood, IL: National Textbook Company.
 Singerman, A. J. (Ed.). (1988). Toward a new integration of language and
culture. Reports of the Northeast Conference on the Teaching of Foreign
Languages. Middlebury, VT: The Northeast Conference.
 Singerman, A. J. (Ed.). (1996). Acquiring cross-cultural competence: Four stages
for students of French. American Association of Teachers of French National
Commission on Cultural Competence. Lincolnwood, IL: National Textbook
Company.
 Steele, R., & Suozzo, A. (1994). Teaching French culture: Theory and practice.
Lincolnwood, IL: National Textbook Company.
 Stern, H. H. (1983). Toward a multidimensional foreign language curriculum. In R.
G. Mead, Jr. (Ed.), Foreign languages: Key links in the chain of learning. Reports
of the Northeast Conference on the Teaching of Foreign Languages.
Middlebury, VT: Northeast Conference.
 Taylor, H. D., & Sorenson, J. L. (1961). Culture capsules. Modern Language
Journal 45: 350-354.
 Terrell, T. D., Andrade, M., Egasse, J., & Muñoz, E. (1994). Dos mundos (3rd ed.).
New York: McGraw-Hill.
 Terrell, T. D., Tschirner, E., Nikolai, B., & Genzmer, H. (1992). Kontakte: A
communicative approach (2nd ed.). New York: McGraw-Hill.
 Triandis, H., Vassiliou, V., & Vassiliou, G. (Eds.). (1972). The analysis of subjective
culture. New York: John Wiley.
 van Lier, Leo. (1988). The classroom and the language learner. London:
Longman.
 Weaver, C. (1996). Teaching grammar in context. Portsmouth, NH: Boynton/
Cook Publishers, Inc.
 Woods, D. 1996. Teacher Cognition in Language Teaching. Cambridge
University Press.
 Yagang, F. (1993). Listening: Problems and Solutions, English Teaching Forum,
January 31, pp. 16-19.
Online References:
 <http://www.englishraven.com-Second Language Teaching Methodologies-
Eric Clearinghouse on Languages and Linguistics>
 <www.eslabout.com– Teaching Techniques—http://www.englishraven.com-
Whole Language, Whole Person- A Handbook of Language Teaching
Methodology>
 <http://home.att.net/~teaching -(Teaching Resources)>
 <http://www.1.harenet.ne.jp/~warning/papers/eltnews.html>
 <sfs.scnu.edu.cn/chendm1/PPT/Unit%207.ppt>
 <http://iteslj.org/Techniques/Celik-Inttonation.html>

 <http://onestopenglish.com/english grammar/grammar task based.htm -

Clandfield, L. (n.d). Task-based grammar teaching. Retrieved 15th July 2007.>
 <http:// coe.sdsu.edu/people/ jmora/grammar.html -Mora, J. K. (2003). Major
components of the study of grammar and syntax: Teaching grammar in
context. Retrieved 15th July 2007.>
 <http://onestopenglish.com/english grammar/ grammar discovery
technique.html - Tennant, A. (n.d). Using the discovery technique for teaching
grammar. Retrieved 15th July 2007.>
 <Grifs [at] hun.edu.tr - Arif Saricoban, Hacettepe University (Beytepe-Ankara,
Turkey)>
 <http://www.geocities.com/Athens/Delphi/1979/games/articales/
sflgames.html?200717#playinggames#playinggames>
 <http://iteslj.org/Articles/Schoepp-Songs.html- Using Songs in Classroom>
 <http://members.aol.com/randywoo/bsahis/r-k.htm>
 <http://www.nclrc.org/essentials/reading/reindex.htm>
 <http://www.basic-skills-wales.org>
 <http://www.nclcr.org/essentials/index.htm>
 <http://www.britishcouncil.org/hongkong-eltnetwork-article-december06-
2.htm>
 <http://www.nadasisland.com/ghaith-writing.html#nature>
 <http://www.professorjackrichards.com/interview.htm?http:/
www.professorjackrichards.com/pages/interview-content-
interchange.htm~content>
 <http://www.professorjackrichards.com/interview.htm?http://
www.professorjackrichards.com/pages/interview-content-
interchange.htm~content>
 <http://www.philseflsupport.com/coursebookevaluationcriteria.htm>
 <http://www.philseflsupport.com/coursebookevaluationcriteria.htm>
 <http://www.projectshine.org/healthliteracy/tutortips2.htm>
 <http://www.teachingenglish.org.uk/think/read/extensive.shtml>
 <http://www.eslweb.org/resources/index.php?topic=336.msg43>
 <http://www.teachingenglish.org.uk/think/read/reading_tips.shtml>
 <http://www.teachingenglish.org.uk/think/read/extensive.shtml>
 <http://www.onestopenglish.com>
 <http://www.handoutsonline.com>
 <www.eslmag.com>

130 Hour Advanced TEFL PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

130 Hour Advanced TEFL PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

130 Hour Advanced TEFL PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

5

Linguists define grammar as a set of components; phonetics (the production and

TEFL Certificate - Notting Hill College

Examples man, Adam, Beauty, Team, Aeroplane,

A note on Lower case Always Lower case Lower case Sometimes

TEFL Certificate - Notting Hill College

Plural Formation Rules:

TEFL Certificate - Notting Hill College

TEFL Certificate - Notting Hill College

9-In the superlative form:

“The” is NEVER used before:

TEFL Certificate - Notting Hill College

The Passive Form:

ACTIVE PASSIVE EXAMPLE

Present Simple Am/is/are + pp. He repairs cars.

Past Simple Was/were + pp. He repaired the cars.

Present Continuous Am/is/are + being + He is repairing cars.

Past Continuous Was/were + being + He was repairing cars.

Present Perfect Has + been + pp. He has repaired the cars.

Past Perfect Had + been + pp. He had repaired the cars.

Future: Will Will + be +pp. He will repair the cars.

(Be + Going to) Am/is/are+going He is going to repair the cars.

Modals: Can/May/ Can/may/must + He must repair the cars.

TEFL Certificate - Notting Hill College

Zero If + Present Simple To express facts. If you heat water, it boils.

1st If + Present Simple To predict a situa- If the weather is fine, I will go

2nd If + Past Simple 1-To describe a 1- If I saw a ghost, I would

If +Past Perfect To express regret or 1- If I had locked the car,

TEFL Certificate - Notting Hill College

- Things What is he wearing today?

- Choice Which jeans shall I wear, the blue or

- Possession Whose jeans are these?

- Price How much does that pair of blue

- Frequency How often do you wear jeans?

TEFL Certificate - Notting Hill College

 Knock before you enter.

- Knock before you enter.

- You should knock before you enter.

- You should have knocked before you entered.

- You must knock before you enter.

- You may knock before you enter.

TEFL Certificate - Notting Hill College

- If I were you, I would knock before I enter.

- Could you please knock before you enter?

- You had better knock before you enter.

- Don’t you dare enter before you knock.

- I’m going to knock before I enter.

- Knocked before you enter.

TEFL Certificate - Notting Hill College

A consonant is a speech sound produced by a partial or complete obstruction of

TEFL Certificate - Notting Hill College

Lips Labial/ Bilabial

Alveolar ridge Alveolar

Hard palate Palatal

Soft palate Velar

TEFL Certificate - Notting Hill College

TEFL Certificate - Notting Hill College

 Tap: Formed by a quick contact between articulators.

TEFL Certificate - Notting Hill College